Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Being part of the Jedi High Council had its perks from time to time, but those were few and far between, not nearly sufficient to serve as some sort of incentive for those who sat on the twelve chairs, bearing heavy responsibilities both from the Order and the Republic. Mace Windu knew this better than most, as the Master of the Order his obligations were endless and his headaches never really left him, only varying in intensity depending on the issue he had to deal with.

He could complain - and he really wanted to - but it was an honor to serve as a Jedi and one never could, not when Master Yoda was present in the room, his stick ready to hit members and his troll’s voice following with a “old I am, when eight hundred years you reach, complain to me you can”. And who could argue with that? Nevermind that no one in that Council would live eight hundred years or surpass Yoda’s age. That was one of the things that kept Mace quiet and not voicing his discomforts.

The korun Master was almost free from his obligations for the day, more than ready to get a hearty meal with his former Padawan at the commissary and go back to his rooms to meditate, drink relaxing tea and hopefully convince his brain to postpone his headache to tomorrow when the Council agreed to review (again) and discuss in more detail (again) the Senate petition. The first two he knows he’ll accomplish tonight, as for his chronic pain, well, he’ll deal with it as usual - which meant he would sleep with it regardless.

Finishing the last points of their discussion and preparing to leave was unusual that afternoon. The Force started to feel different around the Council chambers. Not warning or meaning immediate danger, no, it was just strange, almost as if anticipatory, expecting something…

Mace never felt it like that in his entire life as a Jedi, even on missions with good or bad situations, the Force always warned or gave him a direction, and now the Jedi Master would describe it, if it were sentient, as excited, like it was preparing for some event.

He wasn’t the only one to notice the change, as his eyes scanned the room and the faces of his fellows counselors, he saw Yoda’s ears twitch discreetly, feeling the currents but waiting for them to reveal their purpose; Master Dooku also seemed distracted, usually serious and active in discussions involving the Senate until the last minute, and had his gaze distant and unfocused; the kel dor Master seemed to also have caught the strangeness of the situation but except for his rigid posture, nothing indicated his awareness.

No one else looked to have noticed what was happening and Mace had the urge to hmmf as Yoda did when in a situation he didn’t understand yet. He didn’t mention it and neither did the others but they all adopted vigilant poses as the rest of the Council finally finished and the Masters started to leave. This time, as he left, Mace was followed by Master Dooku and Master Koon.

Without verbal communication, they walked to the commissary. Mace grabbed his evening meal alongside Dooku and chose a table more close to the corners, away from the happy energy coming from Padawans and Initiates at the center tables. Plo joined them soon with a drink since his mask didn’t allow him to eat outside his quarters.

Mace hadn’t expected Yoda to join them to talk about whatever it was that was causing the Force to feel that way - the Grand Master was a little too settled in his evening routine of eating in his quarters and he had the infuriating sense of being more patient than any of them, trusting the Force to provide answers in time.

Mace had barely picked the first bite into his mouth when Dooku broke the silence.

“The Force, have you noticed?”

Plo nodded. “I wouldn’t go as far as to describe it as excited but it does feel different, doesn’t it?”

“Agreed.” Mace said. “The only question is why?”

The three Masters pondered the question in silence, eating and drinking to give time to entertain the possibilities of the answers. Dooku, sitting with his back to the wall and face turned to the entrance of the commissary, stopped eating and fixed his gaze to a group entering the hall.

“I think, Master Windu, that a better question would be who.”

Mace and Plo looked at him and Dooku made an aborted gesture to the Initiates forming a line to take their food. Plo turned slowly - because Jedi Masters were that dignified - to observe the group. Mace finished swallowing and turned his head too. He immediately knew what was wrong - better yet, as Dooku so eloquently put it, who was wrong.

Initiate Kenobi had so many shatterpoints surrounding him that Mace had to blink twice before deciding that yes, it was possible for a single person to have so many paths - important ones by the looks of it - laid ahead of them that were life changing decisions. The Force also confirmed it, the gentle but firm excitement was centered around the stewjoni boy. Kenobi seemed unaware of it though, grabbing his food and listening to his friends talk.

“Ah, that’s the boy who piqued Master Yoda’s attention.” Plo said after observing him for a few moments and turning back to his drink. It wasn’t polite to stare after all.

“He is,” Dooku said, but his voice carried a tone of disapproval. “Yoda’s been meddling with that boy ever since he arrived at the creche.”

“What does he intend to do? I thought he wasn’t taking another Padawan.”

“He isn’t. But he decided that he wants that boy in our lineage and as you know, my former Padawan is quite attuned with the Living Force.”

Plo huffed.

“Please, nobody in all the Councils can forget Qui-Gon’s penchants for dramatics and his so-called ‘it was the Will of the Force’ excuses.” More like banthashit, but Mace couldn’t say that in public with so many impressionable minds present.

Mace saw Dooku’s lips twitch in a combination of amusement and exasperation.

“Indeed. Young Kenobi would balance Qui-Gon, as the boy is known for his affinity with the Cosmic Force and is prone to visions.” Dooku said as if giving a report with the official points. He continued in a lower voice with his own conclusions: “We all know that since Xanatos, my Padawan’s been more than reckless and not…"

“...well?” Plo added gently.

“Yes, well.” They all knew this. Xanatos' Fall had been a constant shadow dominating Qui-Gon Jinn’s life and didn’t show any signs of leaving the Jedi Master any time soon. “Yoda’s been somewhat convinced that Kenobi is the solution for this problem.”

Mace felt his eyebrows rising.

“These were exactly my thoughts on the matter.”

“A Padawan isn’t responsible to help a Master to overcome these types of problems.” The kel dor said tense. No, not tense, angry. Mace then remembered that Plo’s calling was Searching and he held great affection for the foundlings and Initiates of the Order. “If he can’t overcome those obstacles and release his experiences to the Force, he should seek a mind healer, not be given a Padawan.”

“I agree,” Dooku said sternly, “a child’s care should be given to those who want it and are sound in mind. Qui-Gon doesn’t want another Padawan and neither is qualified to deal with one at the present. I’ve been having many conversations with my former Master to dissuade him of these foolish ideas but he will not listen to reason.”

Plo didn’t answer but his body language said it all - the kel dor wasn’t happy with that. Mace agreed with them, even having Yoda as a Master he did have to concede that his meddling could be at this point more harmful to the child and the Master in question than helpful. So he didn’t waste time asking what could be done about it, because they all knew that little could stand in the path of Yoda when the green troll set his head in it.

“And now we have an Initiate that has the Force happily wrapped around him and is surrounded by so many shatterpoints I can’t even look at him and not have a major headache.”

“Shatterpoints?” Plo asked.

“Yes. I’ve never seen so many connected to a single individual before. It looks like Kenobi is the center of every major event in the galaxy for the next decade.”

“And they weren’t there before tonight?” Dooku asked, a hand in his beard, curiosity sparkled.

“I think that I would remember if I’d seen an Initiate with so many shatterpoints like these before.”

They let the silence settle between them. Dooku threw a glance or two at the Initiates, keeping an eye on Kenobi, an speculative glint in his eyes and Mace knew the fellow counselor had a theory or two formulating in his mind. Plo was more quiet and he looked less angry, but his Force signature was still tense and not as welcome and warm as it usually was. The korun Master was aware that the matter of Yoda’s meddling was far from being resolved - even more so with Plo on the loop, the Grand Master of the Order would have to pass through him if he wanted to accomplish his plan.

As for Mace, he wouldn’t think much of this conversation - he would retreat to his quarters and meditate about the matter, leaving the Force to be his guide. Just to be sure though, he would keep an eye on Kenobi. There were just too many shatterpoints around the boy to leave him to Yoda’s designs.

-.-

Obi-Wan spent the entire night awake in his quarters in the Initiate dorms. After having simply blinked awake in the evening in his twelve year old body on the creche, his night was spent in shock and careful consideration. For the duration of the meal at the commissary he redirected his friends’ concerned gazes and attempts at conversation with him and tried his best to not flinch or scream in panic.

What in the Sith hells was going on?

His facade was enough for tonight and he succeeded in returning to his quarters without arousing suspicions. He meditated - or at least tried to - and when that didn’t work, he started going through katas to clear his mind, a moving meditation of sorts to relieve his body of nervous energy. Still, the results left him less than satisfied.

He still couldn’t wrap his mind around what was happening.

One moment he was an old man, part of the Force for a long time, watching the Skywalkers repeating history. He remembers watching Luke becoming a powerful Jedi, the New Republic arising and a new Jedi Order being created. It was all going well, or as well as it could be when a new government was repairing decades of a Sith Empire's worth of destruction and evils. Then the First Order rising to power from the ashes of the Empire with that clone of Sidious. Ben, no, Kylo Ren turning to the dark side and condemning the galaxy once again to darkness and shadows. In the next moment he was in the past, an Initiate again.

Was this what was destined to happen? A millennia of Jedi keeping peace and then a millennia of Sith ruling and destroying all Light’s legacy? Was this what bringing balance to the Force meant?

Or was this a really long, strange and complex vision that Obi-Wan had? Was it a warning? Why was it given to him of all people, when he had failed the most?

Obi-Wan didn’t know and he was at loss with what he was supposed to do. He was just an Initiate - he couldn’t fix anything, didn’t have the power or allies to help him yet.

Forcing his young body to stop pacing, he climbed on the bed and arranged himself in a comfortable position, crossing his legs. Closing his eyes and keeping his breaths calm he opened himself to the Force, deciding to make a list with his options and analyze them.

He thought first about telling someone of his predicament.

But then...what? His creche Master would send him to a mind healer (and he should see one anyway, after all he’s been through in his life and his time as a Force ghost) but both would believe him mad, when he knew he wasn’t (just very traumatized and confused, but that’s not the point).

At this point in time, many in the Order simply didn’t believe about resurrection? Time travel? Force ghosts? Whatever it was, Obi-Wan could only hope they’d believe his words as some kind of vision and would tell him to mind the present, Padawan (and why was this thought suspiciously sounding like Qui-Gon’s voice?) and that always in motion, the future is (yes Master Yoda, and look at where that line of thinking brought the Jedi Order).

No - telling someone was out of question. At least for now.

His second option was also to tell the truth but to the people who could actually do something to prevent the terrible future he had lived. The problem was that an Initiate couldn’t simply request an audience with the High Council. It simply wasn’t done - not that Initiates couldn’t talk to the Masters, but audiences were held to Masters and Padawans pairs and Knights and they were usually about mission reports.

None of the Council members would hear his story because he had to talk to his creche Master first, then a mind healer as the protocol dictates. And if that wasn’t enough, the matter would be subjected to other Councils, probably the Council of First Knowledge. It would be so much bureaucracy until he could talk to those he needed to.

And, if by some miracle, he managed to get there, there was a great risk of the consequences - some, such as Master Dooku, could Fall earlier after hearing about his own fate, and Obi-Wan knew that wasn’t worth the risk or the suspicions that would be cast upon those Jedi.

Finally, he considered the most relevant negative factor in that option: the members of the High Council weren’t his friends yet, and would suspect a lot of things before giving credit to his tale (he’d know, as a former member, the Council could take weeks in a debate about any matter, and only during the war that they became efficient in making decisions).

Another option was that he could tell his crechemates so that they would be alert - they had, after all, noticed his odd behavior today even if Obi-Wan managed to distract them enough to not draw unwanted attention to himself. His friends would try to be supportive, but deep down they too would think he was just making things up because of his aging soon. Besides, none of them had any real power to change anything even if they listened to him, and knowing things could become a self-fulfilling prophecy on its own. To make matters worse, only Obi-Wan was a Master among them - he couldn’t exactly expect them to act as calm and calculating towards this as he was (or trying to at least). It would be chaos.

No, no. He couldn’t tell them either.

So, the summary was that he was truly and completely alone on this. At least for now - he could revisit his decision later if the situation was dire enough.

As for minding the present (see? He’d learned that lesson): He had come back and possessed the knowledge of decades ahead of him. Even though on a child’s body, his connection to the Force was of a Master’s and Obi-Wan suspected that with time, he’d be able to rebuild his muscle memory without difficulties (except for his future growth spurts).

He’d have to be very careful here - rebuild his mental shields and project an aura of an Initiate. People around him could never suspect that he was a tired, weary old man. After taking a moment to put his shields in place and leave nothing pass through them, he stopped a few minutes to think about this. Obi-Wan didn’t think he could act as a twelve year old.

He remembers his feelings - mostly fear - about being sent to the Agricorps but they are like a distant memory to him now, when he has so much more to worry about than simply becoming a Jedi Knight - and he knows that even if he decides to leave the Order, he’ll still be a Jedi, because it’s not about the Order, it’s about following the Will of the Force and the Light. He spent twenty years without the Jedi, without the Order and was still a Jedi in his heart - that’s what matters.

So he concludes that his personality will have to change. Yes, it’ll be strange for his friends and for the Masters around him but it’ll be for the best. He can’t risk being discovered for what happened to him but he can risk losing a few friends and being regarded as the odd one - he’s already Oafy-Wan, the clumsy Initiate.

He’ll settle for being more quiet and studious. Training only the minimum necessary on the training salles and maintaining his advanced katas in his bedroom. He will spend more time at the Archives and try to collect information about the Senate and Sidious - and whatever political problems he feels the hand of the Sith behind it.

Thinking of the Sith, Obi-Wan had no idea why he, of all Jedi, was chosen to come back - he was pretty sure they weren’t involved in this at least. The Force was with him, more so than usual, clinging to him (and he could feel only the Light) and maybe he has to be careful about that too - if he noticed, he’s sure other Masters can too - perhaps he’ll have to consider muting his presence on the Force, just to avoid drawing attention to himself.

He still hadn’t decided how to feel about being properly alive again - but he’d accept that even without answers, it was the Will of the Force.

Now, he only has to decide what to do on his second chance at life - he can’t tell anyone about his unique situation but will he, when he feels it’s time? Will he leave the responsibility of bearing this burden to another?

Who was he fooling? Of course he’d try to save the Order and prevent the fall of the Republic.

Do or do not, there is no try.

Right, he only had one chance at this. He would do it right.

Does that mean that if he fails he would have another chance? Since, well, he was alive again and maybe he’d have multiple chances at this?

No. He couldn’t think of it like this. One chance to fix everything. He could do this.

He can do this.

Alright, no pressure.

Now that the present is decided, Obi-Wan has to plan for the long term: he has to decide how to save the Order - does he become Qui-Gon’s Padawan again and prevent his death? Let him train Anakin? Does he go to the Agricorps or try to become another Master’s Padawan? What part of the Agricorps? Whom should he choose as his Master?

And the Republic: how does one save democracy? He knows it didn’t fall in one day. No, it took years, maybe decades. Wait, is there some event that occurs now which contributes to the fall of the Republic? Was that why he was sent at this point in time? He should investigate this.

He has more sympathy for Mace now, with all those shatterpoints. Obi-Wan can feel his headache pulsing inside his head. He pushes the pain to the Force and forces himself to continue.

The Clone Wars were a major point too, he thinks. If he is careful in his planning, he could prevent the war from ever happening - Kamino, the Clones, the Separatists...If he only knew what exactly happened. The Jedi Council investigated the matter, and he was responsible for finding Kamino initially but they never discovered the whole truth (and even if he believes that Master Sifo-Dyas was responsible for ordering the production of the clones, it was clear at the end that somehow the Sith had interfered early in the process, probably causing the Master’s death - or else how could he explain the clones turning against all the Jedi?).

His heart aches for Cody and his men. Obi-Wan had a lot of time in the deserts of Tatooine to forgive their betrayal and realize that it probably wasn’t their fault. A lifetime ago, he bled with them, led them to battles, became one of the vod. Now, if he succeeds, they’ll no longer exist. They’ll become forever part of his remembrances, nu kyr'adyc, shi taab'echaaj'la.

He gathers his grief, heavy with guilt and sadness, and offers it to the Force, because if he starts to recall his days as General Kenobi, he’ll never finish his task before daylight comes.

One thing he is sure of after pondering the Clone Wars: the Jedi were no longer fit to lead armies - becoming so involved in politics and being servants of corrupt politicians was their downfall. Maybe in the past, when there were open Sith Wars and the Jedi were true Knights fighting for peace, but not now, in this time, when their roles of peacekeepers was everything they were taught since the creche.

Maybe Obi-Wan should change that? Could he even do that - lead the Order back to the old days of great warriors?

But no - it wouldn’t work. They didn't have the numbers. Oh, perhaps that was wrong too. Obi-Wan wasn’t sure about this but he knew in the past there were a lot more Jedi around the galaxy than now, and they were steadily diminishing, until around the start of the Clone Wars, in that first battle on Geonosis when they had heavy loses and it never really stopped, with the rise of the Empire and what was left of the Jedi were annihilated, hunted and tortured to death or worse, forced to become Inquisitors.

Were the Sith causing the slow death of the Order? He couldn’t be sure, but he had to assume that ever since the last Sith War, when their enemy was declared extinct, they lurked in the dark and plotted against them, and the galactic war was just the culmination of this long plan.

Obi-Wan had so many questions and very few answers. Just to get better, he’d have to deal with it cautiously - for now, no one could know what’d happened to him - and he had to pretend to be an unremarkable Initiate, while he decided which path he would guide the Order to save the galaxy.

No pressure. He’d been once a GAR High General and he was never behind his paperwork. He could do this.

-.-

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Obi-Wan had forgotten that he’d have to face Bruck Chun in the Tournament.

Force, why had he forgotten?

It wasn’t a terrible situation, no. Just unfortunate. He’d been so busy in the last few rotations, that it never occurred to him he’d have to revive this moment again.

–-.--

He spent most of his time in the Archives, researching. Master Nu raised more than one eyebrow at his continued presence there - after all, what kind of Initiate would willingly spend their time surrounded by holopads and actual books? No, they all ran away as far as they could from the place, dreading researching projects the Masters gave them for their classes. And who could blame them? They were younglings, full of energy - even more so for being Jedi - and the Archives had rules about being quiet, and organized, and neither were strong points for Initiates, not even most Padawans, truly.

Actually, now that Obi-Wan was here most of his afternoons, he noticed that very few Masters came here. Of course he knew that the majority of the Knights of the Order were out there in the galaxy, searching, exploring, helping peace treaties to be signed, investigating...but it still left a lot of people in the Temple, and the Archives were always empty. He wasn’t a scholar, no, but Obi-Wan was well aware of the power that knowledge could give to an individual.

That’s why he searched among books and holopads. At first, he tried to find if his current predicament had some theoretical foundation more than through the Force, all things are possible. He had found nothing - at least nothing in the sections he was allowed to study and he wasn’t very eager to access the Master’s sections. No, that would be a last resource case for him (keeping a low profile and all of that).

Master Nu's silent questions didn’t deter Obi-Wan from his purpose here either. No, the old Master couldn’t forbid him from being there unless he was neglecting his own health and skipping meals, which Obi-Wan wasn’t. He was being extremely cautious in this point, all for maintaining the pretense of an Initiate, and he knew younglings of his age were always hungry because of their growing bodies and endless twitching energy.

It was true though that his years on Tatooine left him with a complicated relationship with food (and being a ghost for longer than that certainly didn’t help). Sometimes he sustained himself with the Force for so long that he’d forgotten how to feel hungry, but here he tried to maintain a schedule - he ate the minimum required to sustain his growing body and keep himself healthy, eating between meals ration bars that he kept in his pockets every few hours or so to not worry any adults that could be watching him.

So far, his meticulousness was paying off. Nobody had bothered him, which suited him just fine because it would be terrible to have to explain why he wasn’t with his friends, or why he was researching time-travel.

Obi-Wan would continue to research time-travel but at that moment the Force was being incredibly loud in his mind, telling him he needed to change subjects. Hmmm, that was curious. For days since his arrival, he tried to obtain answers by meditating (he was sure his crechemaster was confused by his sudden love for meditation), all for nothing. No response, no nudging to a certain direction. His only answer was silence.

Well, who was he to deny the Will of the Force that was being presented to him now?

Closing his eyes, he let the Force guide his hands to type his next research subject. When he opened them again, he felt mildly nauseous.

Oh, of course this would be his first mission in changing history in his second life.

Mandalore.

Obi-Wan had many memories about his dealings with mandalorians. There was an entire ball of feelings and regrets that he didn’t even know where to begin to unpack and analyze. His one year mission guarding and protecting Satine, Jango Fett and his millions of clones, Maul taking Mandalore, Satine being-

No, it wasn’t time to go there.

In the end, he knew the Empire hadn’t left much of the planet nor its systems inhabitable, and the population was almost non-existent, scattered through the galaxy, acting as bounty hunters. They strayed very far away from the path of the glorious mandalorian empire, especially after the Darksaber was lost and had fallen into the wrong hands.

Satine, Obi-Wan knew, had played a heavy part in destroying the mandalorians, even with her good intentions, she helped destroy their culture and made them weak and defenseless against the Empire. She would always be his first love, and letting her go was one of the few times he ever felt close to Falling, but he had years to think about her ideologies and in his heart, he knew her pacifism was a naive, childish ideal that could have no place in the dark galaxy they lived in.

Obi-Wan blinked. His focus had slipped. He was sure that his mission this time on Mandalore was more than repeating history. No, the real questions here were what he was supposed to do in Mandalore and what exactly had Mandalore to do with the fate of the galaxy?

Well, that would have to wait until he could meditate more. For the moment, he could take his time researching all he could about the history of the planet.

--.--

There was a lot about Mandalore.

Unfortunately, a lot was not very useful for him. Almost everything available was about the Sith wars and the Mandalore Empire. Obi-Wan was surprised that there wasn’t even much information about the only mandalorian Jedi, Tarre Vizsla.

For all he knew and read about Tarre Vizsla and the Darksaber, Obi-Wan knew that it was lost (somewhere with the Death Watch, Kyr'tsad, if memory served him), and it wasn’t being used to unite the Houses - which he deduced was one of the priorities of his mission.

Without united Houses, mandalorians would fight against each other, until there was nothing left and the New Mandalorians, led by Satine, would take over the government and begin the process of stripping Mandalore of its culture - the language, the Supercommando Codex, the weapons and Beskar. That he knew it couldn’t happen again.

Somehow, Obi-Wan had to find someone - mandalorian - that could unite the Houses. That part would be, in theory, more easily achieved with the Darksaber. So Obi-Wan had to find who had it at the present among the members of the Kyr'tsad and whom to give it to (someone who probably wasn't part of the New Mandalorians) - which probably left him with the only other option, the True Mandalorians, the Haat Mando'ade.

This was going to be a difficult problem. Because of the history between Mandalore and the Jedi as enemies for centuries, Obi-Wan couldn’t simply go there openly. No Jedi set their feet on Mandalore since the Sith Wars - and Master Jinn and him would be the firsts to do it but only because the Senate had requested so. And now that he had a few cycles to meditate and study more, Obi-Wan realized what an enormous task was given to him - traditionally, Mandalore allied itself with the Sith to defeat the Jedi.

If Obi-Wan had to find someone who could unite Mandalore, it wouldn’t be so they could fight against Jedi, but with Jedi. He’d have to overcome centuries of prejudices between them, make both sides see the threat the Sith represented and convince them to fight together to defeat Sidious.

Ideally, if this alliance was to work, he had to make it happen before the return of the Sith, before Darth Maul appeared in Naboo so that they had time to prepare.

How?

Obi-Wan would probably still be a Padawan or if he left the Order, he would still be too young to negotiate between both parties. No, he couldn’t leave the Order - it would be easier to do this from the inside. He couldn’t afford to go to the Agricorps either, he had to involve the High Council on this alliance or it wouldn’t work.

The only path laid out for him to achieve this was through Knighthood.

What should I do?

Should he be Qui-Gon’s Padawan again? Obi-Wan cared deeply for his Master but he wasn’t very keen on becoming his apprentice again. Qui-Gon Jinn hadn’t wanted to take Obi-Wan the first time and he doubted this time around he would - Master Yoda’s meddling had paid off in the end but at what price, he asked himself. He had to become a slave, and offered to kill himself just to become the man’s Padawan.

Then, for the rest of his apprenticeship he felt as if he was in debt with his Master, never being good enough, never making his Master happy, always a disappointment, always living in the shadows of Xanatos. Obi-Wan had never been enough. He’d never been wanted. Not by Qui-Gon, not by Anakin - who sought Sidious instead of him to help with his visions. Wasn’t Obi-Wan his brother? How could he think that he wouldn’t help? That Obi-Wan didn’t care?

Stop.

Obi-Wan wouldn’t think about this any longer. It wasn’t the point.

The point was that he couldn’t be Qui-Gon’s Padawan. He had been once and once was enough. Obi-Wan didn’t think he could stand being through that apprenticeship again. When all of this is finished, he would need years of seeing a mind healer to deal with everything and he would avoid situations that could trigger bad memories if he could.

That left him with the big question: if he wouldn’t be Qui-Gon’s Padawan, then who will be his Master?

When Obi-Wan joined the High Council, he discovered that his Grandmaster, Yoda, had meddled and that a few other Masters had given up on approaching him because of that. At the time, he was shocked enough to know that others had wanted him as a Padawan. Now he regretted never asking who they were, as it would really facilitate his quest to find a different Master.

--.--

The Tournament was actually very convenient for him. Fighting Bruck Chun was going to be difficult, yes, but the opportunity to look for signs of interested Masters was too great to pass.

Obi-Wan had learned as a General to multi-task so he wasn’t worried about fighting and paying attention to his surroundings. No, his problem would be how to make his abilities look like an Initiate’s.

He was very concerned about that. He had gained most of his experience in war - his abilities were honed to fight Sith and Darksiders. He had post traumatic reactions to weapons being raised against him. Bruck was entering a fight that was unfair from the start and he could be seriously hurt by Obi-Wan if he lost control or had a flashback.

But there was no other way - not easy at least, that could help him find a Master. And he was running out of time. He would age out in a few months, and he needed to go to Mandalore and-

Focus on the present, Padawan.

Obi-Wan hadn’t meditated today at all, being woken up early alongside his crechemates to go to the Tournament.

The arena was full of Knights and Masters - even the High Council was here today. Of course they were. Obi-Wan had forgotten that before the war it was common to see the counselors outside the Council chambers, that they were more personally involved with activities such as tournaments or teaching younglings. It was so strange for him to see them there, alive and well, not burdened by losses, that Obi-Wan’s heart ached.

He wouldn’t focus on that. Instead, he forced his eyes to the duel on the mat. Since his return here, Obi-Wan had been in his saber classes with his friends but it was easier to lose himself repeating katas and relearning his body - he avoided sparing with his friends and now he realized his mistake. Well, too late now. He tried to catalog the way his friends moved and the mistakes they made - he had to act like them after all, when his turn arrived.

--.--

Mace wasn’t the only one paying close attention to Initiate Kenobi. Plo and Dooku were too and the korun Master knew they wanted to solve the mystery involving the boy and his strange connection to the Force just as much as he did.

The boy seemed tense but Mace knew all the Initiates were like this when a lot of prospective Masters and Knights were present on a Tournament that had the objective to show their abilities.

It took a while and Mace had to keep a very stoic face through it all but he could feel his lip twitching upwards at Master Dooku’s impatience. He really wasn’t one for attending those types of events and even being one of the Order’s most accomplished diplomats, he still had difficulties in placing a mask of impassivity when surrounded by fellow Jedi.

Finally it was time. Initiate Chun would fight Kenobi and Mace was excited to see what abilities those boys would show.

The duel starts well, Initiate Chun is impatient and attacks as soon as the Master gives them a go. Kenobi falls on defensive and-

Is that a Soresu instance?

Beside him, Master Plo turns rigid. Mace prods him with the Force.

“He is using battle meditation.”

“What? That’s not possible.” They don’t teach that to Initiates. Actually, this technique is in disuse, and very few Masters know it, the older ones or the Shadows.

Mace stretches his senses and while he can’t feel almost nothing coming from Kenobi, a thin, quite undetectable sense surrounds the boy, and this is what a battle meditation would feel like in the Force but not this discreet. If he wasn’t looking for it, he’d never notice.

But where did he learn that?

“Not with his Masters.” Dooku answers his unspoken question. “It’s not taught anymore. And he is quite skilled with Form III even if he hides it well.”

The korun Master pays close attention to the fight and indeed, Initiate Kenobi is doing a formidable job of appearing to be losing ground and showing a shake defense. He would believe it if not for the way the Force backs up the boy’s instances with assuredness.

“He is diminishing his abilities.” Plo says, sounding thunderstruck.

“He’s doing more than that,” Dooku’s eyes have yet to blink from the duel, “he’s playing and baiting the other boy.”

“That is not the Jedi way.” Mace objects.

“No, but it’s obvious that his abilities are beyond this simple spar.”

Mace has nothing to reply to him. Turning his attention back to the Initiates, he sees the moment that Initiate Kenobi choses to lose, making a mistake, slowly so that Chun could hit his saber on his arm.

“Interesting.” Mace hears Plo murmuring.

The second round starts and this time Kenobi leaves his defense behind and attacks Chun. Mace keeps checking the Force around the boy and he can’t find a trace of anger there, only serenity. That and his perfectly executed battle meditation.

It seems that Kenobi slows his attacks so that Initiate Chun can keep up with him, which the other boy does.

They continue this until Chun makes a wrong movement because of his footwork and Kenobi disarms him, ending with the boy on the floor and a saber pointed towards his face.

Initiate Chun is a deep shade of red and Mace can feel the anger clouding the boy’s signature. Kenobi is still emanating serenity.

They start the last round, and now Chun is giving all he got, without finesse or calm. Kenobi falls back on his defense and it’s clear to Mace that he is trying very hard to not show his familiarity with Form III.

“That boy’s been practicing Soresu.” Plo comments.

“Hmm, it’s not a form preferred by the Initiates.”

“Who do you think taught him?” Dooku asks.

“Difficult to say. Very few Masters know the form.” Mace answers. “I want to know why he thinks he has to hide his abilities. If not for Plo, I wouldn’t see the battle meditation, and it’s not a thing you can hide easily in a room full of trained Force users.”

“I agree.” Plo said. “I suggest we talk to him after this.”

Dooku merely nods and they turn back to see what the outcome will be.

It’s clear that Chun is tired and his guard is open to attacks. Kenobi has noticed it too but the boy gives plenty of opportunities for his opponent to defeat him. Mace can almost see him as a Master teaching a Padawan - all of them eventually learn to let the Padawan win as an incentive.

Time passes and Kenobi decides to end the fight - it’s enough and the more he drags it on, the more angry Chun will be. He breaks his defense and in a brief show of real Djem So, executes a series of katas that disarm Chun and with both training sabers together, elevates them to his neck.

“Solah.” They can hear Initiate Chun’s speak.

The arena has fallen silent. That definitely weren’t moves that Initiates were taught.

Mace exchanges looks with his friends. Initiate Kenobi will have a lot to explain.

--.--

That was bad. Really bad.

Obi-Wan barely makes it out of the arena after his friends corner him to congratulate him for winning. He won, yes but he lost himself by the end - too many memories of fighting Ventress, Dooku, and even Maul and his brother enveloped him, suffocating his focus on the present and suddenly he wasn’t an Initiate anymore, he was General Kenobi and he had to end the fight-

Obi-Wan lets out a shaken breath. He gathers the Force around him and cloaks his signature, leaving the Tournament behind him.

He’ll apologize later to his friends for leaving them. He said he was only going to drink water but he needs to meditate and put order to his memories and center himself now. It can’t wait until night.

He passes the empty corridors and hides himself from the few Masters that weren’t on the Tournament, making a beeline for the Room of a Thousand Fountains. It’s blessed void of sentient life forms.

Obi-Wan goes to his favorite spot, hidden from view, and surrounded by high bushes. The Living Force is stronger here and he remembers always coming here when he was plagued by visions at night. It’s the first time in this life that he’s back here, and it brings tears to his eyes to be sitting here again. It’s so peaceful and full of Light. In the last days before the end of the war, being here was the only place on Coruscant that he could ground himself in the life surrounding him and forget about the suffocating, oppressive Darkness.

He quickly evens his breaths and enters a light meditation, reaching in the Force he brings his feelings forward and begins to untangle them from the memories and carefully sends them to the Force, to not overwhelm him anymore. It’s easy to lose himself in the Force while doing this, with his strong connection to the Cosmic Force, but with the plants here he is grounded to the present.

Obi-Wan is deeply in the Force when he feels three presences close to him. He recognizes them almost immediately, Master Plo and Mace, his friends, and Count Dooku - although the former is still with the Order, Obi-Wan is not eager to be introduced to his Grandmaster anytime soon. He still has fresh memories of the man who tortured and imprisoned him on Geonosis and every other fight since then. After becoming a Force ghost, his feelings about his sufferings became distant, unimportant. It’s funny how being flesh and bones again changed that perspective.

He has a pretty good idea of why these Masters are here instead of watching the Tournament - he noticed their interest in him from the moment he entered the arena with his crechemates. They put a good front on not paying attention to him specifically but Obi-Wan knows better, he is a General and he knows when someone is looking at him, when an enemy is analyzing his movements and studying his tactics.

That’s why he knows it’s bad when he senses them looking for him. They’ll have questions that Obi-Wan can’t answer. He really wishes he could but it’s probably for the best that he doesn’t.

The Force is unhelpfully quiet on this matter, he notices.

He’ll just have to not be spotted.

Obi-Wan starts to condense his signature with the Force surrounding him and lets it blur him. It’s the same technique he used to hide from Vader and the Empire on Tatooine and now that he uses it again, he thinks it’s awfully similar to joining the Force and becoming a ghost. It’s dangerous too, if he’s not careful, he can become too mixed up and couldn’t manage to untangle himself after, becoming part of the Force sooner than he wishes to.

It works, for now. He feels the Masters leaving and going to look for him in another place.

Obi-Wan wonders how long he can avoid them. Does he want to? Wouldn’t be easier to have-

No. He can’t.

And this isn’t the important question. He should be asking himself why they were interested in him. Is there a chance they were looking for potential Padawans and Obi-Wan caught their attention?

No. He knows that they were looking specifically for him in the arena - from the moment he stepped there, the three Masters were focused on him. But why? Have they felt something from him?

He checks his shields. Nothing, they are strong and his projection of a quiet Initiate is firmly in place. Which leaves only one other option…

Can they feel the way the Force clings to his signature?

Since the first night here Obi-Wan was careful to mute his presence to not draw attention to the Force’s unusual connection to him. So how could they have noticed?

Except…

What if- there was only one way they could’ve felt his altered signature. When he awoke in this body, he was in the middle of the afternoon and he didn’t have the time to build his shields. He was in contact with his friends, and they didn’t notice so he assumed nobody else had. But maybe they felt it, perhaps they passed through him that day and felt something different about him.

It doesn’t matter exactly how, he knows it could’ve only been in this brief period between his awakening and going to bed on that day. What matters is that now he has at least three Masters that suspect him and after his fight today, he is sure that number could be higher.

His plans of becoming a Padawan are on a knife’s edge. Obi-Wan has to, somehow, use these suspicions to draw a Master towards him while not letting it ruin his reputation.

Sweet Force, befriending a krayt dragon is easier than this.

--.--

He just vanished!

Initiate Kenobi isn’t anywhere on the Temple. His already muted signature is not even detectable anymore.

“I think that we can try to find him another time.” Master Plo says.

Dooku hmmfs.

“I can’t believe we were bested by an Initiate in a game of hide and seek.” Mace says.

Plo’s signature radiates concern but he feels a brief sparkle of amusement at his words.

“It’s not everyday that a youngling fools three Masters.” Dooku comments, he somewhat manages to not sound like he’s sulking.

“High Council Masters, my friend.” Plo adds.

“Indeed.” Dooku says. “I suggest a new approach to our current problem.”

“And what may that be?” Now Mace is curious. He’s open to suggestions too.

“Divide and conquer.”

Plo nods. “I believe we should try again tomorrow. It’s quite possible Initiate Kenobi won’t want to be found today.”

“Agreed.”

So the three Masters leave their chase in favor of going to their separate routines.

--.--

Obi-Wan is clever to keep his guard high the following days.

It helps that he knows his friends' (not at this time yet and certainly not Dooku's) signatures and every time he feels one of them close, he cloaks himself in the Force and walks to the opposite direction.

It’s fun. It didn’t start that way but now that he knows they can’t detect him (and he suspects that they don’t know the technique he’s using) it became a game. He can’t keep it going for too long but maybe he can turn this to his advantage. If Mace or Plo become interested in his abilities and potential, maybe one of them will be tempted to ask him to become their Padawan?

Obi-Wan would like that. It would be strange to treat them as Masters, superiors to him and not equals as he is used to. But he has a lot of experience in adapting.

“Initiate Kenobi.” Oops. Maybe he should daydream less and focus more on his classes (even though he already knows about galactic politics and he’s pretty sure he gave this same class when Anakin was still his Padawan).

“Sorry, Master.”

Master Shan doesn’t look very happy with his distracted posture. “You’ll stay after class today.”

“Yes, Master.” Obi-Wan pointedly ignored his friends’ looks of pity.

He spent the rest of the lecture dreading his punishment. But if he gained an assignment to the Archives, well, it would be less worse than having to help in the kitchens.

“We will speak of your lack of attention on a later date, Initiate Kenobi,” Master Shan said to him when they were finally alone, “but now I’m afraid you have been summoned.”

What?

“A Master wishes to speak with you, Obi-Wan.” She continued. “He left a message and asked me to inform you since it’s your last class of the day and you’ll be free this afternoon.”

“Oh.”

“Now you must hurry to meet him. He said he’d be at the meditation’s chambers.”

Ah, Obi-Wan doesn’t know how to feel about it.

“Who is he, Master?” He asked instead.

“Master Koon.”

Oh, well. The game is over apparently.

“Now go on. You mustn't keep him waiting.”

Obi-Wan nodded, bowed and left. Anxiety runs through his veins and a little bit of hope.

--.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Obi-Wan is cautious when he approaches the meditation’s chambers. There are a lot of rooms being used by other Masters and he checks before locating Master Plo’s signature. He is, thankfully, alone. Obi-Wan wouldn’t know how to react if he wasn’t. One Master is enough to make him jumpy, and three of them would be impossible for him to hide his nervous reactions - apparently, it’s more difficult for this teenager's body to be still and calm.

Master Plo, Obi-Wan decides, is the better option. He always liked the Master’s calm demeanor, his steady and warm presence in the Force were a source of comfort for him when he was first appointed at the High Council. Even before that, when he’d first taken Anakin as his Padawan, still raw with grief and sorrow, Plo had been there for him, a good friend, and an attentive ear for him.

Obi-Wan also trusts him, even more than Mace. He knows that the kel dor Master is a gentle soul and understanding. He was, as far as Obi-Wan remembers, one of the most progressive Masters sitting on the Council but he had a way of not imposing his views, preferring to listen to others and then kindly giving his own inputs. He and Obi-Wan had tried to change a lot during the war, never with much success though. Towards the end, before going to Utapau, Obi-Wan recalls that he and Plo were discussing deserting with their men so they could force the citizenship bill in the Senate since the war would be over. They never did it but they’d wanted to, and when he felt all of their deaths-

No, can’t go in there.

Well, needless to say, between Mace and Plo, Obi-Wan prefers to talk to someone more flexible, less stern. Someone that shares his progressive views.

Not that they would discuss anything remotely like it but it’s a consolation. Obi-Wan would probably flee the chambers if he felt Dooku behind those doors.

He takes a deep breath, checks his shields again (it doesn’t hurt to be prepared) and knocks the door, opening it.

“You wanted to see me, Master?”

“I did, young one.” Master Plo says encouraging. “Why don’t you sit down?”

Obi-Wan does, crossing his legs, mirroring the Master’s instance. When he doesn’t say anything, Master Plo continues and Obi-Wan can read a gentle smile through the Force from him.

“You left me quite impressed at the Tournament, Obi-Wan,” he says. “It’s been a long time since I’ve seen an Initiate maintain such control of their emotions in a duel.”

Obi-Wan bows his head, accepting the compliment. “I have great Masters.”

He doesn’t elaborate and he can feel that Master Plo wants to ask more questions, direct ones about his skills, but he doesn’t. In fact, his entire posture is intended to be not threatening, as if Obi-Wan is a scared animal, wanting to run away at the first opportunity.

He is.

He didn’t realize how painful it would be to speak with Plo again. Everyday is an ache in his chest when he wakes up in his dorm, inside the Temple, feeling it busting with the lives of his fellow Jedi. To talk again with his closest friends and having them not recognize him stirs a wound in his core.

Sometimes, Obi-Wan wonders why the Force brought him back. Infinite sadness was his destiny, he accepted it long ago but to be given the gift of living his life again only to have those he loves look at him as complete strangers just seems cruel.

Wasn’t one lifetime of infinite sadness and pain enough?

Must he go through it all again? Could he bear it?

Master Plo lets Obi-Wan rearrange his thoughts patiently. When he focuses on the Master again, he is still warm but a touch of concern passes through his shields.

“Obi-Wan,” he waits for him to look at the Master, “I’d like for you to be honest with me.”

Obi-Wan nods, a dread lumping in his throat.

“Your Masters didn’t teach you to fight like that, did they?”

He could tell Master Plo the truth, from a certain point of view. He could say that yes, they did, which is true if you consider that they did teach him, in the future and not exactly his creche Masters, but Master Plo didn’t specify the Masters, so…yes, he could say that, it would ring true in the Force and they both would know that he was, not lying outright, but not telling everything either.

Or he could tell the truth, but not all of it, and beg the Force that Master Plo accepts his half answer as something like the will of the Force. Because it is Plo, and not Mace or Force forbides, Dooku, Obi-Wan decides to trust him.

“No, Master.” Obi-Wan can feel the approval of the Force around him, encouraging but not prodding for more than this.

Master Plo must notice it too because the kel dor pauses and Obi-Wan can feel him gauging the Force around him. He can sense the Master’s curiosity but Plo opts for not trying to know more than what was freely given.

“Was it you that caused the disturbance in the Force a while ago?” If this was any other person, Obi-Wan would misdirect the question, pretend to not understand or even deny, but from Plo he feels nothing but openness and acceptance, no judgments.

“It wasn’t me, Master.” Because it truly wasn’t - Obi-Wan hadn’t planned to be sent back. “But it had to do with me.”

He can get away with that, he thinks.

Master Plo nods, pensive.

“Do you know why?”

“I don’t,” Obi-Wan wants so much to tell him everything, to cry and hug the Master, but he can’t. “I have a few theories about that...”

Master Plo looks at him expectantly.

“...but I can’t say anything until I’m certain. I’m following the Will of the Force, Master.”

For a moment, Master Plo looks at him - really looks at him. Trying to sense how much of that is the truth and how much is banthacrap. Fortunately for the Initiate, the Force is with him, and there’s no denying that Obi-Wan is being sincere.

“I see,” Master Plo says, still contemplating something, “if you are certain about this,” and at Obi-Wan’s nod, he continues, “then I will not ask for more, except this: how may I assist you, young one?”

What?

It couldn’t be that easy, right?

“I…” What should he say? It fits so perfectly for his plans that he hadn’t even considered the possibility of having someone helping him, without questioning him further - accepting that Obi-Wan can’t explain himself, not yet, maybe not for a long time.

Alright, Obi-Wan only has to ask without giving much away. But how does he ask for help in saving the Jedi Order and the Republic?

Not the future, mind the present, Padawan.

It’s a work in progress. He can’t ask for that kind of help, he has to ask for something else, something small that can make a difference and then build up from there.

Mandalore.

He needs to go to Mandalore. Find the Darksaber and help the Haat Mando'ade. Possibly gain allies against the Sith.

Yes, Mandalore - it’s a small thing he needs to do. Well, Obi-Wan realizes it’s not small for an Initiate but he is not exactly one, is he?

The Council would never allow an Initiate to go to Mandalorian territory alone. No, what he needs is-

“...I need you to take me as your Padawan, Master Plo.” He says and the Force rings true at his words but a sensation of incompleteness accompanies it.

Master Plo seems to consider his request.

Obi-Wan can feel the Force prodding him insistently, demanding. He wants to deny it, he can’t, it’s not done and-

And he doesn’t really have a choice, does he?

He lives to serve and he lets the Force guide him, in his past life and in this one too.

“And I fear not just you,” Obi-Wan amends. The Force is loud in his senses, still demanding but giving him strength to say the last part, “but Master Windu,” does he really have to ask this? Is it not enough to ask for one Master, and still insist for two? He can’t- He has nightmares- “and Master Dooku as well.” He finishes with gritted teeth, the words ripped from his mouth.

Obi-Wan can’t look at Master Plo in the eyes. He casts his eyes to the floor, breath heavy, his eyes suddenly full of tears. He can’t be Dooku’s Padawan, he can’t even be near the man and yet-

Yet.

He can’t, but he must.

Obi-Wan doesn’t realize he’s stuck in his head until a gentle touch on his shoulder jerks him back to reality.

Master Plo’s presence is like a hug, slowly enveloping him, careful to not suffocate, but firm to assure him that he’s not alone.

And Obi-Wan desperately wants to fall on that embrace, to let the tears fall, to share his burden. But he can’t.

This Master is not his dear friend Plo. He is just concerned about an Initiate, not with Obi-Wan Kenobi.

So he doesn’t accept the embrace, and doesn’t lower his shields. He does the opposite, flinching away from it and recoiling to himself, as if Master Plo was burning him - which, for Obi-Wan, is how his gentle touch feels.

“I’m sorry, Master Plo,” he says instead, composing himself, a loud heartbeat in his ears, “The Force is sometimes insistent with me.” He can tell the Master wants to say something but Obi-Wan doesn’t need gentle words or assurances. “Will you think of my request?”

“I will, young one.” Master Plo tells him, gaze concerned.

That’s enough of a guarantee for Obi-Wan and he trusts Master Plo to relay his request to the other Masters - they were looking for him together, after all. He rises, not quite managing to not look like he’s trying to run away.

“Thank you, Master.” Obi-Wan bows respectfully. “May the Force be with you.”

And he leaves, not even giving time for the kel dor Master to return the sentiment.

--.--

Later that evening found three Jedi Masters in Master Plo’s quarters. The kel dor Master had sent a comn asking for them to meet at the earliest convenience, privately, and they had agreed to take their evening meals at Plo’s kitchen.

The kel dor had a special mask on that allowed him to eat with his fellow counselors. Dooku initiated the conversation after they sat. He was picking his food when he said:

“I’m surprised you managed to talk to the boy. I must admit, I couldn’t find him since the Tournament.”

Mace nodded with his head.

“I had the same problem. Every time I thought I caught a sign of him, he just vanished.”

“For me it was much the same. But I had the distinct impression that, after the first few times, Obi-Wan was mostly enjoying hiding himself.”

“For him it could be just a game, but not even fully trained Shadow Masters can hide like he did.” Dooku said, gravely. “I didn’t sense not even a trace of him, and we know that there’s always a trace, even with Force-nulls. If I didn’t know he was within the Temple, I’d presume he wasn’t there at all or worse-”

“-that he was dead.” Mace completed.

Dooku nodded.

A silence fell upon them and the three Masters were left contemplating the implications of that conclusion.

“What had you contacting us, Plo?” Mace asked after a while.

“As you know, I managed to talk to Obi-Wan today after his classes.” The kel dor told them. “I left a note with his teacher, asking him to meet me in the meditation's chambers.”

“How did it go?”

“That is a strange story, my friends.” And Plo proceeded to tell Mace and Dooku of the strange conversation he had with Obi-Wan. He explained also, having had the chance to be close to the boy, how the Force seemed to wrap itself around him in a protective barrier. “I could tell he was surprised to have been offered help. I couldn’t feel anything from him, his shields are impressive for his age. But his face- I felt like he was used to doing things alone and he didn’t expect help from me.”

Mace frowned more and more as Plo recalled the events.

Finally, Plo told them about his request. “I was surprised, of course, but the Force was singing in approval,” he said, “and we know that sometimes it’s the Padawan that chooses the Master, so I was ready to accept him. But that wasn't all.” Plo made a pause there, gathering his thoughts. “He struggled after that and I feared he was simply embarrassed but he continued telling me that not just I, but you both should be his Masters as well.”

“What-”

Neither Master had the chance to question Plo because in that moment, just as he repeated the words, the Force rang just as true as it had with Obi-Wan, nugging them to the path it laid before them.

“Exactly like that, I’d say.” Plo said.

“But-” Mace couldn’t begin to arrange his thoughts. Plo saw his frown deepen and he imagined his friend would end their night with a headache.

“Interesting.” Dooku commented. “What did you say to him after?”

“I didn’t say anything. Obi-Wan looked terribly anxious and even if I couldn’t feel anything from him in the Force, I could see his distress. He was silently shaking and looking down. I tried to offer comfort for him through the Force but he was closed off and he got up, bowed, thanked me and left.”

Plo was deeply concerned by Obi-Wan’s behavior. Initiates weren’t afraid of a Master’s reaction. They could be disappointed if said Master didn’t accept the offer of Padawanship but not this level of distress the boy presented today.

What is happening with Initiate Kenobi? Plo had wondered, and what kind of Will of the Force is that that demands this level of mystery and secrecy?

“I just want to say, before we continue, that this whole karking thing is a shatterpoint,” Mace tells them, looking determined, “and I don’t care anymore, I want answers and if the only way to get them is by breaking the rules and following the Force, I’m in.”

Dooku grinned. Plo knew he’d been advocating for changes in the Order for years, and if three members of the High Council started showing disregard for the rules of one Master per Padawan, well, he was having the radical revolution he always wanted and as a bonus, nobody could actually stop them because the Force was loud and clear in that aspect - not even Grand Master Yoda could argue with the Will of the Force.

“We should inform him tomorrow and then present it to the Council.” Plo suggested.

“Hmm, I’m actually excited to see their reactions.” Dooku said. “Should we discuss living arrangements?”

--.--

Obi-Wan was found by them the next morning inside his bedroom, meditating deeply. He felt them and slowly retracted from the Force, his awareness still sharp and shields leaking nothing.

He took a moment to admit to himself that he was afraid of what was to come. He had lived his life once but by now he’d already changed things by asking Master Plo, and he couldn’t predict anymore what was to come. Obi-Wan could only hope it would change for the better and he would trust in the Force.

Obi-Wan opened his eyes and turned to the three Jedi Masters.

“Are your meditations always so deep?” Master Windu asked.

Obi-Wan nodded, “I ask the Force for guidance, Masters.”

He tried to not react to Dooku’s flash of curiosity, putting a mask of passivity on his face.

When it was clear that he wouldn’t say more, Master Plo decided to join the conversation:

“We’ve talked about your request, Obi-Wan,” his voice was gentle, “and we accept it.”

Obi-Wan couldn’t quite hide the surprise on his face.

“You understand that it’s not how things are usually done?” Master Windu asked him.

“I know, Master.” Obi-Wan answered. “But the Force was very insistent on this.”

“That it was, young one.”

“Then we ask you, Initiate Kenobi: will you be our Padawan?”

“I will, Master Windu.” And they all felt the Force sing in agreement.

“We should go if we want to present this to the Council.” Dooku said for the first time since their arrival at Obi-Wan’s bedroom.

To say that the Council was opposed to the idea was an understatement. Obi-Wan was quiet while Dooku explained - Master Dooku, he had to remember to call him that from now on - that the Force approved the Masters-Padawan bond. The High Council begrudgingly accepted.

They had to or they would be blatantly disregarding the Force’s direction. But that didn’t mean they couldn’t be annoying about it. They started inquiring about how the three Masters intended to plan for Obi-Wan’s training, what would his focus be in classes, which lightsaber form would he specialize in, where would he stay, and so on and on.

Obi-Wan took that opportunity to study the members sitting on the chairs. As a former member of the Council himself, he had experience in reading them, although some of them weren’t on the Council anymore by the time Obi-Wan had been invited to join. He tried to gauge who was supportive of them and who was outright against. His emotions took a turn to disappointment when he realized that most of them were against, including his Grandmaster, Yoda.

The old Master wasn’t saying much but his posture gave the disapproving signs all the same, and Obi-Wan knew, from experience, that usually where Master Yoda went, the rest of the Council followed.

The only one that appeared more amused with the whole thing was Master Yaddle. By the time of Obi-Wan’s nomination, she wasn’t on the Council anymore - she'd been on an extended mission on the Outer Rim regions and she never returned to the Temple after that. He hadn’t known her, only knew very few things about her, such as that she was older than Master Yoda, and that she had a sense of humor but nothing else.

Master Yaddle was quiet, observing but he could deduce she was in favor of changes. If she was older than Master Yoda, perhaps she remembered a time when the Order wasn’t so strict with their rules. Obi-Wan would store that information for later.

When they finished being interrogated, the artificial sun of Coruscant was high in the sky indicating the midday meal was being served on the commissary.

Obi-Wan’s Masters kindly pointed out that they had a Padawan to care for now, and that said Padawan required food at regular intervals to be healthy. Obi-Wan almost rolled his eyes at that - but his body did need food, even if feeling hungry was still a new concept to him in this life.

So together they went to grab their meals. Dooku led them to his quarters, where they could have privacy for now. It wouldn’t be long till the news spread and Obi-Wan became the Temple’s gossip subject. He didn’t mind, he was used to it, first with being publicly rejected by Qui-Gon, then leaving the Order for Melida/Daan, being a Sith-Slayer, earning his Knighthood through battle, gaining a Padawan on the same day, training the Chosen One...He didn’t care about a little scrutiny.

Obi-Wan had other things to worry about. The first of them was brought up by Dooku (Master Dooku).

“We should formalize your Padawanship with the bonds.”

Obi-Wan nodded. He expected that when he decided that his path lay in Knighthood. He would have to be more careful shielding three bonds at once but he had the experience, with his bond to Anakin that they never really closed after his braid was cut, and then when Anakin took Ahsoka as his Padawan, she also shared a bond with her Grandmaster since he and Anakin worked together so often, a bond between them all was logical and necessary.

“We can meditate together after our meal then.” Great, Obi-Wan couldn’t wait to share a part of his mind with Master Dooku. He sometimes doubted the Force’s wisdom.

Seeing that he wouldn’t say anything on the matter, Master Plo changed the conversation.

“Do you have preferences in the subjects you’d like to study, Obi-Wan?”

Does he have one? Obi-Wan doesn’t know what he’d like to study. He already knows more than many Jedi - he’s skilled and proficient in all saber forms, but he could always become a Master of Makashi, Vaapad or Djem So besides his preferred Soresu. He is an accomplished negotiator (for Sith’s sake he had even a star destroyed named after him), so he could in this life focus on a different path than being a politician for the Order, even though he knows his Masters would probably want him to learn diplomacy, he should choose something that would help on his mission of saving the galaxy and all of that. He should-

“Healing,” he says, surprising himself, but he feels in the Force that he’s on the correct path, “I’d like to study healing.”

His Masters are looking at him in a mix of surprise and incredulity - he doesn’t blame them, his scores with biology classes are that bad, but he’s confident that healing will be a needed skill for his future. He wished he’d known better during the Clone Wars. He learned the basics from the medics but never went beyond that.

“Healing is a noble path, Obi-Wan,” Master Dooku says, “and it requires a lot of dedication. Are you prepared to give what it takes to learn?”

“I am, Master.” He says because he has to, and Obi-Wan was nothing if not dedicated to his studies.

“Very well, I shall enroll you in the courses required.”

“Why healing, young one?” Master Plo asks him.

Obi-Wan takes his time to answer. How much can he say without telling them the truth?

“I sense darkness in the future,” he tells them, “and I want to be prepared for it.”

His words are true, from a certain point of view. He knows that if he succeeds, the darkness will never rise but it doesn’t hurt to be prepared for it. Obi-Wan ponders if he should tell them about Mandalore. It’s true that he’s still young and usually new Padawans spent more time on the Temple, adjusting to the bond and the new routine with the Master before receiving their first assignment or mission - and it wouldn’t be anything remotely close to dangerous. No, dangerous missions are given to Senior Padawans and Masters, or Padawans close to their Trials, but never Junior Padawans.

But Obi-Wan is a special case. He has not one, but three Masters, and all of them are on the High Council, which means they are a force to be reckoned with. So maybe he can get to accomplish what the Force asked him to do earlier than what he was expecting.

He’s brought back from his thoughts by Master Windu calling his name.

“Obi-Wan,” he says and Obi-Wan recognizes what Anakin once dubbed as a boring lesson voice in the korun Jedi’s tone, “you know that visions are difficult to interpret and even the most experienced Master cannot predict the future with certainty.”

“I’m aware Master,” he says and a little of his frustration, with his situation and with everything that’s happened and he couldn’t prevent the first time, leaks in his voice, “that the future is always in motion,” his voice is hard, cold, and he wonders inside the privacy of his shields the wisdom of that phrase, because then why would he be brought back - if not because the future was set in stone and only with someone with previous knowledge could change it? “but I do not intend to sit idly when I can use my time to prepare myself for the worst while I hope for the best.”

Obi-Wan can tell that none of the three know what to say to him after his little outburst. Some Jedi Master he claims to be, losing his calm like that. He needs to meditate - alone, preferably - but he’s aware that being alone will be one of the last things in today’s agenda.

“You are correct, Padawan. Preparing for the worst is sometimes the only thing a Jedi can do, but it doesn’t mean your apprenticeship should focus solely on that.” Master Dooku says to him. “We should always seek balance for all things in life and that involves choosing classes that are enjoyable to you.”

Obi-Wan resists the urge to huff. He doesn’t know this man in front of him - he only knows Count Dooku, a Sith Lord that betrayed the Order. He isn’t eager to know Master Dooku, but he concedes that this is as the Force wills it. And if he has to bowl to this man’s wisdom, he will - for now.

“As you say, Master.” His tone is perfectly calm, not a trace of the resentment that prompted his outburst.

The three Jedi Masters will soon realize that Obi-Wan, while a good Padawan, is not the type to offer his inner thoughts without some measure of coaxing. He is quiet, thoughtful and his shields hide a lonely, deeply wounded soul.

“Well then, besides healing, is there anything that would you be interested in learning?” Master Windu tries again.

Obi-Wan stares at him, thinking.

“No.” He decides to be difficult here. “But I shall abide by your wisdom, Masters.”

Master Plo coffs a little, a sound suspiciously like laughter escapes him. Obi-Wan feels his amusement through the Force.

“Are you sure, little one?” He asks before Master Windu can say more. “I’m afraid you’ll be resigned to courses of diplomacy if you don’t choose for yourself.”

“I am, Master. I don’t mind training for being a diplomat.”

Master Dooku raises an eyebrow at him. “It’s not an easy course.”

“No, but neither is healing.” Obi-Wan says. “I can learn what I want and it’s a fair compromise to divide my time between that and diplomatic lessons, don’t you think?”

“Indeed.” Dooku agrees but he’s frowning now. Obi-Wan doesn’t care.

“Since we’re talking about my education,” he proceeds as if nothing is happening, “what form do you plan to teach me?”

“You showed a high skill in the Tournament.” Master Windu says, looking intently at him. Obi-Wan can feel him prodding the Force, trying to gauge his emotions. He won’t feel anything, Obi-Wan is as invisible as he can be without alarming them, which means they can feel he is alive but nothing more. If he wants to read his feelings, he’ll have to rely on Obi-Wan’s body language - which in the moment is carefully not guarded, passing a message of openness and deliberate calm, making it impossible to read his true feelings.

The korun Master blinks as if he’s just came to the same conclusion, and Obi-Wan feels him sending his frustration to the Force. “You seemed to prefer Soresu.”

Obi-Wan doesn’t nod or protest. He waits.

Master Windu exhales and tries again.

“Not only Soresu, I think. You know Djem So too.”

“Is that a question, Master Windu?”

“Yes, Padawan.”

“I thought so.” Obi-Wan says, testing the waters. “I like to be able to defend myself and others.” That is true, even if at this point Obi-Wan is not fighting in a war anymore. “But sometimes, only defense is not enough and one must know how to strike back.” He lets that opinion settle and continues. “You didn’t answer my question, though.”

“Do you want to learn Makashi and Vaapad, Obi-Wan?” Master Dooku asks.

Obi-Wan raises an eyebrow. “What about Djem So? It’s Master Plo’s form, is it not?”

“We can work on that one too if you want.” Master Plo says.

“If you think you can manage it all.” Master Dooku says, laying the final terms of their agreement.

Obi-Wan allows a smirk in his lips. “I can, Master.”

“Then it’s settled. After we meditate, we’ll spar and see how far you are in your training.”

Obi-Wan nods, he’s finished with his food.

Meditating with three other Masters is difficult and Obi-Wan feels unbalanced. He creates space in his mind where he knows the bonds will be and constructs shields and raises them, until he’s certain nothing will pass except for what he actively projects.

Soon, he has three presences in his mind that are light and steady asking for entrance. He forgot how good it was to have a bond.

His years after Anakin’s Fall were a mess for his psych, more than once he wondered how much longer he’d survive, with part of his mind ripped and broken. He didn’t think he’d make that longer the second time. Qui-Gon’s ripped bond had been more than he could deal with and then his brother, his Padawan, had left him. But he did in the end, he endured.

He lets not a trace of that pass through. His Masters can’t know about his inner turmoils and blatantly attachments. He can tell they are concerned with his lack of openness on his side.

“You don’t need to be so closed off, Obi-Wan.” Master Plo gently prods his shields. “We’ll never invade your privacy unless invited.”

“I know.” He says, because in theory, Jedi don’t violate sentients' minds, even less a Padawan’s, but he can’t give access to his mind to them, specially not to Master Dooku - there’s a lot of unpacked feelings about the man’s methods of torture that he used in Obi-Wan in another life.

He feels extremely vulnerable just by having a bond with him, he’ll have flashbacks if he allows him unrestricted access to his mind, and worse, he could fight back if his post traumatic responses decide that he’s an enemy. That would be difficult to explain.

Obi-Wan feels their focus change and while they are building the foundations of the bonds connecting their minds together, he can also feel gentle touches in his hair, combing and selecting a few locks of hair that will form his Padawan braid.

The three combined touches are soothing and Obi-Wan allows himself to relax a little under their care. It's been so long since he was touched, and even longer since the touch was this gentle. He thinks that the last time was probably when Ahsoka was with him on a mission and he had to comfort her after a nightmare but then he wasn't on the receiving end of it.

His new Masters braid his hair, and they put his first bead at the top, a symbol of the start of his Padawanship. Obi-Wan will have to look in the mirror later to see if it has any special designs in the bead but for now he sits in peace, content in waiting for them to finish.

They do, after a while, and he gets up to look at his face in the mirror in the fresher. He didn't think he'd miss the weight of having a braid but he does. It's a strange concept to him, used to taking care of others now being the one to be looked after. He checks his bonds and finds that he doesn't mind much, Dooku on his mind is not as scary as he was expecting it to be. It's...good to be close to people again, even if he has to maintain a barrier between his mind and the bonds.

His bead is different, as he suspected. It's yellow as all first beads are, but it’s engraved with a symbol, a rune, that Obi-Wan has only seen in the walls in the older parts of the Temple, when the paintings are describing visions, in an old idiom, that used to mean that the Force choose the destiny of something. Obi-Wan decides that he likes it, it's certainly better circumstances than how he gained his first Padawan braid under Master Jinn, when he had just offered to blow himself up so his Master could escape with others and Qui-Gon was forced to review his previous harsh judgment of Obi-Wan.

He has, for the first time in a long while, a good feeling about his Padawanship. The Force quite agrees with him, singing in his ears with promises that makes Obi-Wan want to believe in it.

He exits the fresher and regards his Masters. They're looking at him with mixes of pride and concern and Obi-Wan can even sense amusement coming from Master Plo.

Without speaking, Obi-Wan feels a little tug coming from Master Windu’s bond and he turns to leave with them to the training sales. Obi-Wan finally has permission to have his lightsaber with him all the time now that he has Masters. It's a comforting weight on his hip. He intends to use it to learn from the best while he can.

They choose an empty dojo and without prompting, he goes through his katas, slowly and then picking up speed. His mind enters in a moving meditation, and he uses that time to think on his next steps. How much of his skills should he reveal?

He knows that logically, he can’t defeat any of them. He doesn’t have the muscles, nor the force necessary to do that. He has the energy, though. His body is younger and his reflexes are quick, he could probably if not outlast them, at least get them tired. But he has to remember that he’s barely a Padawan. None of his skills to duel these Masters are an Initiate’s. He knows they’re aware that he learnt things he’s not supposed to, but how much of that excuse will they believe?

Obi-Wan doesn’t reach a conclusion before he finishes with his katas. He’ll just have to take a page from Anakin’s book and wing it.

He positions himself in an opening Soresu instance and waits. Master Windu is the first to engage him, minding his strength, the korun Master is quick and doesn’t leave much time for Obi-Wan to breath between his blows. He thought that they would all come to him together but he can deal with one at a time.

Obi-Wan is calm through it all, not faltering but not daring to counter-attack either. He figures that, if he’ll not explain his saber skills, he’ll just stick to one form - to raise less questions, of course. The more he trades blows, the more he notices his saber is no longer fit for him. He frowns but doesn’t let that affect his performance. Many times before he had to use Anakin’s lightsaber in the middle of a battle - he can deal with a kyber out of tune with him for a simple spar.

Their spar doesn’t show signs of slowing anytime soon. At this rate, Obi-Wan thinks they’ll be here till tomorrow, if Master Windu is not planning on using more of his strength, then they’ll be evenly matched. Then, as if reading Obi-Wan’s mind, he retreats, a frown on his face - and Obi-Wan knows what this one means: he’s found something that doesn’t quite fit in a problem.

Obi-Wan bows, and leaves briefly to drink water. When he returns, he faces Master Plo’s Djem So.

He’s feeling tired by the end of it - he makes a mental note that he’s nowhere near his endurance as a Jedi Master, if he was in a real battle, his severe miscalculation would cost him greatly. But he thinks he’s doing well, considering he’s been defending himself from Vaapad and Djem So forms for the last hour and a half. He didn’t let their sabers hit him even once, determined to test his real resistance against them (and where did the plan of keeping a low profile go? He has no idea, he'll blame it on his overeager teenager body, full of energy and excitement and his lack of a proper meditation this morning).

Master Plo retreats too, and Obi-Wan once again uses the break to drink water and wash his face. His robes are sticking to his skin, drenched with sweat and his hair is no longer a vibrant red, instead is more of a muddy shade - and he’s thankful he wasn’t required to adhere to a traditional Padawan’s cut.

Obi-Wan is a little nervous to return to the mat and face Dooku.

I’m a Jedi Master,

Emotion, yet peace,

I am one with the Force and the Force is with me.

He repeats the words in his head and returns to them, and he's surprised to see that they are waiting for him to go back inside to the Temple.

“Are we not going to spar, Master Dooku?”

“No, Padawan.” Obi-Wan can’t, and doesn’t have the force to hide how his shoulders drop and his posture relaxes at that. He didn’t realize that he’s become more and more tense in the expectation of fighting against Dooku. He catches three pairs of eyes watching his reactions. “It was enough for today. We still have to take your things from the Initiate’s quarters.”

Obi-Wan nods and goes through his katas again, this time to relieve the remaining tension in his muscles and tendons. He is silent through it all, and trails after them when he finishes (he learned the hard way that not stretching after a spar can cause stiff muscles and pain the next day). Now that the tension has passed, he finds himself exhausted and hungry.

“Do you have a preference with whom you’ll stay, Padawan?” Master Plo asks.

“No, Master.” Although he would very much prefer not to end up having to share quarters with Dooku, he doesn’t say it.

“Well, then, I think you could stay with me for now. We can establish a schedule later.”

Obi-Wan finds that he likes the idea. He gathers his things from his bedroom and follows Master Plo to his new quarters. Later, he makes a mental note to himself, he'll tell his friends that he was chosen as a Padawan. They'll probably already know, considering that all Jedi are gossipers but he's sure they'll have a lot of questions about not having one but three Masters.

Inside Master Plo's quarters, he's shown his new bedroom and the fresher, and he excuses himself to shower and organize his things. He emerges half an hour later to find his Masters having tea. Obi-Wan sits quietly beside Master Windu and pours some tea for himself.

He eats and tells them he has to finish his homework, going to the privacy of his bedroom to study. When he finishes much later, it's evening and only Master Plo is present, and he and Obi-Wan go retrieve their food at the commissary, where they sit with his other Masters in a secluded corner. Obi-Wan decides to start the conversation this time.

“I would like to go to Jedha, Masters.” Obi-Wan tells them. “I noticed I’ve outgrown my lightsaber earlier in our spar.”

“Did you.” Master Windu says and Obi-Wan recognizes the dry humor. “Why not Ilum?”

Obi-Wan wants to answer that for the last twenty years of his previous life he lived in a Force-forsaken sand junk desert as Crazy Old Ben Kenobi and so even though he hates sand now, it’s also grown into his soul and therefore he thinks his crystal could no longer be acquired in an ice planet.

He doesn’t say any of this, of course.

“Because it sounds right in the Force.” He says instead.

It does.

“Alright, we can arrange a trip there.” Master Windu says, still eyeing him curiously.

Master Plo hmms. “It’s been a while since I’ve been to Jedha. A little vacation from the Council would be good, I think.”

Master Dooku doesn’t say anything but Obi-Wan knows he’s on board for their trip.

For his first day as a Padawan, Obi-Wan marks it as a success.

He meditates when he returns to Master Plo’s quarters - blessedly alone in the mat by the window on the living room. He can feel his Master’s eyes on him the entire time but thankfully Master Plo doesn’t comment on his desperation for a meditation. Obi-Wan retires to his bedroom and falls asleep peacefully - or perhaps it’s just his body being tired and not having the energy to be relentless for the night - for the first time in, well, decades if he’s only counting his years as a being of flesh and bone.

--.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Obi-Wan wonders if it’s really necessary that his three Masters accompany him to Jedha but he figures that they are coming for more than just showing support to him. It’s, as Master Plo put it, an excuse for a vacation. Force knows Obi-Wan needs one of those but he never got it - and watching over Luke in a desert for twenty years doesn’t count as a vacation.

He doesn’t comment on it and spends most part of their trip there studying and meditating. He's determined to not fail in his healing classes but he's afraid that if he wants to pass he'll have to ask Bant for help. His friend was always better at those subjects and if memory serves him, he knows she'll become a great Healer.

Their ship is big enough that it has a place where they can spar and Obi-Wan has to be coaxed out of his routine of the perfect Padawan to learn new katas (or refamiliarize himself, depending on the point of view).

Every day, he spends an hour on each form and steadily improves his endurance. He sleeps like a youngling without a care in the galaxy after each tiring day. He doesn’t remember a time felt so rested in his life.

“Do you know what design your lightsaber will have?” Master Windu asks him one day during breakfast.

Obi-Wan has an idea but he doesn’t want to share it. He's been having dreams of it ever since he said he wanted to go to Jedha and what he's seen is...well, let's just say he still isn’t ready to accept it.

“I have an idea, but I still need to meditate on it.” It’s vague enough and it’ll do.

“Obi-Wan, if you meditate more, you’ll beat Master Yoda’s score.” Master Plo jokes.

He shrugs.

“Well, at least we don’t need to put meditation on his schedule.” Master Windu says. “You must be the first Padawan in history to like meditation.”

Obi-Wan prefers not to comment. He can’t exactly explain that meditation was sometimes the only way to feel connected to something after the Purge.

His Masters must’ve talked between themselves because they never push him for answers - they know Obi-Wan is keeping secrets but they know that the Force is insistent that it’s not the time to share it with them. It's a relief for him to not have to talk about his other life and traumas.

Obi-Wan also notices that Master Dooku teaches him the katas but never engages in a spar with him. He wonders if they’ve noticed his less than pleased reactions with the Master. He doesn’t know and sometimes he stresses that he doesn’t and then he has to stop because it’s just his paranoia talking.

When they arrive, Obi-Wan marvels at the Temple and his mind stays in the present without problems. He doesn’t have bad memories of this planet. He hopes he'll never have. His Masters wish for the Force to be with him and advise him to be careful with whatever vision he has inside the caves.

The Jedi here guide him to the kyber caves and he enters alone, searching for his crystals.

The Force is different here than on Ilum, it sings of desert tales, more intense and louder. Obi-Wan feels it resonate within his soul. He lets the songs guide him, closing his eyes and trusting the Force.

Just before he can touch his crystals, Obi-Wan has a vision - he expected it obviously, but not anything quite like this. He sees himself, older than he is now but still not an adult, wearing armor and commanding people, giving orders. He looks like…a younger version of who he used to be in the Clone Wars, a young General Kenobi. He looks fierce, determined.

No. It can’t be.

Obi-Wan was sent back to change the future, was he not?

He can’t be a General again. Is that what happens if he takes these crystals with him? Is that the future he’ll walk into?

Obi-Wan hates war. He doesn’t think he can live through another one again. Losing people he loves, ordering people to their deaths, sensing so much death and choosing the Light every time - it’s miserable, it took everything from him once. How can he willingly choose this path again?

There are tears in his eyes, his breaths are shallow and his chest hurts. Why can’t he get a nice future? Why is he always destined to infinite sadness?

Why is the Force so cruel with him?

He doesn’t really have a choice, does he. He won’t use the Darkside to get rid of this vision - he’s been through worse things and didn’t Fall. Obi-Wan learned a long time ago that his path never strayed from the Light. If it is pain and war that his future holds, he’ll endure as he always did. He’ll survive again and again.

Until he is the only one left standing.

Obi-Wan was given a mission, a gift. He’ll do everything in his power to make out the best with what he has. That’s why he pushes through the vision, accepting his destiny and taking what is his - three little crystals that fit perfectly in his hand. He has a small, sorrowful smile. He feels melancholic, being able to feel the Force like this again. The humming song of his new crystals is beautiful but the burdens that come with them don’t make this a joyful occasion for him.

His Masters are more excited for him than he is with the perspective of building his new lightsaber. He is more quiet than on the way here, the vision having shaken him more than he realized, and he is hesitant to build his lightsaber.

His Masters try to cheer him up, but Obi-Wan insists they don’t have the materials he needs here, even though they took one of the ships that makes trips with the younglings clans to Ilum. They are intrigued by that, but Obi-Wan only smirks and allows himself a small laugh when Master Windu frowns - he hopes his attempt at not showing his concerns about his vision are enough to convince them (they can’t know the whirlwind of emotions that are inside him now).

“Padawan,” he says, “are you sure the materials you need are not on this ship?”

“I am, Master.” Obi-Wan says. “Have a little patience. I’ll construct my saber...eventually.”

Master Windu, he learns, has very little patience. He thinks that the counselor Obi-Wan knew was still the same man, he could only hide it better. Master Dooku is the same but where Master Windu questions, he observes.

Master Plo is the opposite. He is good humored and patient, and Obi-Wan thinks it’s because he loves younglings and is frequently on the Search, having to deal with parents and explain that the Jedi are not baby thieves.

He’s immediately urged to build his lightsaber when they arrive at the Temple on Coruscant. Obi-Wan, just because he is still feeling unbalanced, insists on showering and unpacking. Then he eats a meal and lets his mind wander in meditation. At some point during that, his Masters had given up on him and returned to the Council (they still had duties, being adults and Masters, after all), which is exactly what he was aiming for.

His feelings on this don’t matter, he tells himself more than once as he meditates. When he is feeling more or less confident in going forward, he puts his plan into action to build his lightsaber.

He knows exactly where he’ll find materials to build his lightsaber. It’s not in a part of the Temple that Padawans have access to, no. And he suspects that not all Knights and Masters know about its existence.

He hides himself in the Force, becoming indetectable, and goes on his search. Obi-Wan knew of this part of the Temple because during the war, he came here many times to store away Sith artifacts. What he’s looking for is not in those chambers but it’s close to them.

In the lower levels he goes, using Master Nu’s codes, figuring that an access coming from her wouldn’t raise any alarms. It doesn’t and Obi-Wan breathes in relief. This is the most secure part of the Temple and he can’t be seen here - not if he doesn’t want to give explanations.

Passing through where the Sith vault is, Obi-Wan continues till he finds the other vault he’s looking for.

It’s mandalorian and Obi-Wan hacks into it with no difficulties. He did pay attention to Anakin’s methods.

He enters and he can feel that the Force is content with him. He follows its directions until he finds a box in a corner, looking almost forgotten and full of dust. It’s simple and doesn’t have locks. He opens it and finds beskar iron inside it. Obi-Wan does not think of the implications of having a lightsaber hilt made of beskar.

He takes what he needs and sits on the floor, enjoying the peace to build his saber. He spends hours on it, having to mold the iron to the shape of a hilt using nothing but the Force.

It was a delicate process, and he doesn't remember ever having spent so much time building a lightsaber before. Once he finishes, he puts the three kyber crystals inside it and unites all the parts together. When he opens his eyes, the Force is a melody inside his mind, a hopeful song that is powerful and Obi-Wan is smiling, a small, honest smile that illuminates his entire face, and he is ready to accept his fate.

He puts everything back in its place and is turning to leave when something catches his eye. Paint. Of course there would be paint in the mandalorian vault. Well, it’s a good thing that he has a design in mind for his new hilt.

Obi-Wan finishes much later, satisfied with his work, and locks the vault again when he leaves. He returns to the higher levels and is surprised to find that the nocturnal Jedi are awake. Kriff, his Masters are going to be mad at him for disappearing for so many hours and not telling them. Well, it’s not his fault that building a mandalorian lightsaber is complicated.

Since he’s already in trouble, he’ll enjoy the rest of his night by first eating something. When he finishes, he goes to the private spar rooms. His presence is still invisible and he enjoys not being stopped and reported by the Sentinels.

Oh, if only Anakin could see him now, he wouldn’t be able to say that his Master was a perfect Jedi. Anakin never understood but Obi-Wan had always enjoyed a little mischief here and there. He had to, or he’d never make it as Qui-Gon’s Padawan.

He is apprehensive to turn it on. He knows that it’s not going to be blue or green, no, not even purple. It’s very different from all the previous sabers Obi-Wan’s had. He is a different person, and it would only be fair but sometimes he still doubts his purpose, his strength.

Obi-Wan gasps when he ignites it for the first time and when he falters, the Force is there, sustaining him, murmuring gentle whispers in his ears, assuring him that it’s alright, there’s nothing wrong with his lightsaber’s color.

It’s red.

His lightsaber is red with a black core.

It’s frighteningly beautiful and when Obi-Wan inspects it with the Force, he finds his crystals’ song in his mind and only Light. There’s not a single trace of Dark here, and he lets himself admire his new weapon.

He finds that he’s not so conflicted as he was before. It’s part of who he is, and he’ll accept that, as he will with the responsibilities that come with having this weapon.

Now, he cannot wait for his Masters to see it - and be, once again, the subject of the Temple’s gossip.

--.--

Obi-Wan receives two lectures (Dooku and Windu) and a stern expression (Plo) from his Masters when he joins them for lunch the next day, since he broke into his own quarters at Master Windu’s to retrieve his holopads for class - he didn’t want a lecture first thing in the morning, so he left a note informing that he was going to class and would meet them for midday meal as was their schedule.

When Master Dooku and Windu finish reprimanding him, Master Plo asks:

“Do you have an explanation for vanishing yesterday, Obi-Wan?”

“I have.” He says. His Masters wait for him to tell but he only smirks. “I’d prefer to show you, if I’m allowed, at the training sales.”

They agree and then follow Obi-Wan there. He can feel through the bonds the questions but he ignores them. They’ll understand when they see.

In their usual dojo, he assumes his Soresu stance, pulling from his robes his hidden new lightsaber. His Masters seem unimpressed, that is, until he ignites the blade.

A deep, crimson red blade, with black core in beskar iron hilt painted in orange with black stripes representing his lust for life and desire for justice, with the Jedi insignia in green for duty.

It fits Obi-Wan perfectly but what he likes the most is perhaps the way he feels waves of shock coming from not only his Masters but every other Jedi present on the dojos (because it’s only fair that the shock he’d felt is shared by others, right?).

--.--

He doesn’t get to test his new lightsaber in a spar against his Masters, but Obi-Wan already expected that. He extinguishes the blade and goes to them for an inspection. Extending his hand, he offers his saber for them.

Obi-Wan feels insistent prods coming from them in his bonds and he allows them to see him, sitting on the floor, deeply immersed in the Force constructing his lightsaber, never feeling the call of the Darkside.

The Force is with him, as always, and it vouches for him silently. There is no darkness in Obi-Wan Kenobi, his path is firmly rooted in Light and he is its Chosen One-

Wait, what?!

He is absolutely not! But it doesn’t listen to him and now it is really not the time to argue semantics and ancient prophecies.

When his Masters are satisfied, they return his lightsaber back to him. Inscrutable looks on their faces and it’s the first time that Obi-Wan ever felt their presences turn cold, and locked behind their shields.

He doesn’t panic because of his many years facing impossible situations in missions, but he feels his stomach turn itself into knots, his smugness forgotten. Will they turn him to the Council? Demand him to lower his shields, and when he refuses, break into his mind?

Obi-Wan can’t have that. He can’t-

He hides his distress inside his shields and fights to keep his breaths even, controlled.

“Come with us, Padawan.” Count Dooku’s voice breaks his internal crisis.

Obi-Wan follows, quietly. He knows, rationally, that he’d done nothing wrong, but there’s a misunderstanding between his reason and his sentiments and his rational mind is not winning at the moment. It’s dread he feels because it was the same he felt when Anakin closed off his end of their bond after Cody and the rest of his men shot him from the cliff in Utapau.

Their bonds aren’t severed but the emptiness there is similar enough for him.

They reach Master Windu’s quarters and his Masters silently sit on the floor, Obi-Wan doing the same, his expression now a controlled mask of serenity despite his inner turmoil.

“Meditate with us, Obi-Wan.” Master Windu says and this time it’s not a request.

He closes his eyes and follows into the Force, keeping the mess inside his mind aside, for later. Three presences join him and Obi-Wan waits.

Then, there’s a moment where Obi-Wan feels Master Plo going through his own feelings of confusion and fear at seeing Obi-Wan’s lightsaber. The Master untangles his feelings and then shares them with the Force. Obi-Wan feels Master Windu and Master Dooku doing the same. They finish and wait for him to do the same.

Obi-Wan slowly gathers the messy knots that are his emotions at the present and lets his Masters see them: all his joy at finishing his saber, his conflicting emotions at the color of the blade, accepting it, then his plans to surprise them and being afraid in return when he felt them closing off their ends of their bonds with him. Obi-Wan can’t help but let his memories of his panic escape when Anakin did the same to him, his confusion, then anguish and despair at the betrayal.

He shares it all with the Force and feels only a little better after. Master Plo gently coaxes Obi-Wan out of his trance, and he returns to the real world with a heavy heart.

“I’m sorry Masters,” he says, eyes downcast in shame, “I didn’t mean to scare you.”

“We were surprised, Obi-Wan. But you must understand why.” Master Windu says and it’s the most soft he ever heard the man sound. “Red lightsabers aren’t exactly common.”

“I know.”

“We had to make sure you weren’t using the Darkside while building it.” Master Dooku tells him. “That’s why we wanted to supervise the construction.”

And now Obi-Wan knows that. It never even passed through his mind to use the Darkside to build it. But his Masters didn’t know it. They don’t know Obi-Wan. Not yet. Maybe not ever, not completely.

“I’m sorry,” he repeats, “I just wanted to surprise you.”

“Oh, we’re definitely surprised, Padawan.” Master Plo says lightly. “Tell us, where did you find beskar?”

Obi-Wan can’t lie and after their reactions today, he suspects he can't tell a half truth either.

“I went to the mandalorian vault, Master Plo.”

He can feel Master Windu frowning.

“Padawans aren’t told about that place.” Master Dooku says. “How did you know about it?”

“I-” Obi-Wan doesn’t have time to prepare ahead of himself an answer. “I knew where the vault was and I knew there’s a Sith vault in there too. I...I’ve been there before.” Now he can feel the Masters questions in his bonds, prompting him to talk. “Not recently though. I used to have access to them once...a lifetime ago. So I knew where to look for parts for my saber and constructed it there.”

“You had access to the vaults?” Master Windu asks. Obi-Wan can’t quite decipher the man’s tone.

“Yes.” Obi-Wan doesn’t try to elaborate. He knows they can tell by the Force that he’s not lying, but he can’t say more either.

Master Dooku looks at him critically.

“It’s difficult to believe in you, Padawan. You won’t let us feel more through the bond, and you know of secret vaults that are forbidden to enter. Only members of the High Council have access there and even so, we have to fill a request and usually we don’t go in there alone.”

Obi-Wan knows all of this because these protocols were explained to him once, too.

“Whose codes did you steal from to enter down there?” Master Dooku asks.

“No one's, Master Dooku.” It’s true. Obi-Wan didn’t need to steal Master Nu’s codes because he was given them once and it’s just convenient that he has a good memory even after all these years.

“Obi-Wan, if you are afraid of being reprimanded-”

“I’m not afraid, Master Plo. I’m simply telling the truth.” Obi-Wan says, nerves getting the best of him. “I have access, I know the codes and I didn’t steal them from any of you! I didn’t go in there to look for things that are forbidden, the Force guided me there to build my lightsaber and that's all I’ve done. Sith artifacts don’t interest me. They never have and never will.” He’s sure his face is red by the time he pauses, but he isn’t finished. “Why can’t you believe me? I’m not falling to the Darkside!”

Obi-Wan can feel tears threatening to fall from his eyes and he checks his shields as a habit. They are still in place but he should spend time reinforcing them when he finishes here.

He can’t stand the notion of going through his entire Padawanship again being silently judged, receiving inscrutable looks believing he is destined to Fall. He swore to himself to never live again in the shadows of Xanatos.

It doesn’t help that he built his saber knowing that in his path he will fight the Darkside constantly.

“Breathe, Obi-Wan,” a voice says.

“Breathe with me,” it’s soft and calm, and Obi-Wan feels warmth around him but not pressing against his own signature, not suffocating him - it’s just there, a silent offer of comfort if he wants to take it.

He flinches away from it, tries to breathe and it hurts, but the voice urges him to keep going, to keep breathing. It hurts and his mind is a mess and his lungs are slow to receive the oxygen he needs but he continues even though it hurts-

Tears are falling now, he notices, strangely disconnected from his body. He shouldn’t cry, it’s not how a Jedi behaves and-

“In and out, Obi-Wan. Breathe.”

He does and his vision is still murched with tears but now the black spots are slowly disappearing and he feels the beginnings of a migraine forming in his skull-

And it just makes him want to cry more and his control is still in tatters and he’s not strong enough to stop them from falling.

“I’m sorry, I’m sorry, I’m-” he says brokenly, between hiccups.

“It’s alright, young one.” The voice- Master Plo, says to him. “May I touch you, Obi-Wan?”

He nods.

Master Plo slowly embraces him, loosely to not overwhelm him and it’s enough for the tension in Obi-Wan’s body to dissipate.

He manages to stop the tears, feeling exhausted. He didn’t notice Master Dooku getting up and making tea but he gratefully accepts when it’s offered to him with shaken hands. He gains awareness of his surroundings gradually, and in other circumstances he would feel embarrassed to be practically in Master Plo’s lap, but he feels detached, empty and all his energies are focused on not spilling any tea on his robes.

Master Windu returns with a blanket and they cover Obi-Wan with it. He finishes his tea, almost entirely asleep. Obi-Wan is so tired.

“Sleep, Padawan.” Master Dooku says to him, taking the cup from his hands, and for the first time since arriving at this time, Obi-Wan doesn’t feel afraid of him. “We’ll be here when you wake up.”

Obi-Wan sleeps.

--.--

With Obi-Wan curled up sleeping against Plo’s chest, Mace finally allows himself a shaken breath. What was that? What did they do wrong?

He looks up from the small boy in his friend’s chest, and he sees his own questions reflected back at him. Dooku is frowning, displeased - Mace is too. How did they end up with their Padawan crying and having a panic attack?

“I’m not sure we have answers for that.” Plo says. “But there are other things we can discuss.”

Dooku nods. “We’ll have to reassure him that we don’t think he’s turning to the Darkside.”

“And avoid pressing for answers regarding the codes.” Mace continues.

Plo’s incredulity is almost palpable.

“Not those things. Those should be obvious.” He says, while his hand brushes Obi-Wan’s hair. He gives his feelings to the Force and continues, “we need to talk about how our Padawan is clearly afraid of having the end of our bonds closed. Did you even notice that he was holding his tears ever since we left the sales?”

Mace hadn’t caught that, but he noticed Obi-Wan avoided looking at their faces and his posture went from excited to closed off in an instant when he felt their disapproval.

“Plo, if he can’t stand being reprimanded, then he’s not fit for Knighthood.” Dooku says.

“It’s not just that. You missed my point.” Plo replies. “It’s a series of behaviors that aren’t right for someone of his age. He reacted very badly to closing the bond where other younglings would just ask for forgiveness or look sorry. If it was only that, I’d not be insisting on talking as we all know that children learn and grow up eventually.”

“What else has you worried?”

“He rejects comfort.” He said, letting them process that. “Obi-Wan is a twelve year old boy, he grew up in the creche since he was a baby.”

“Yes, we read his file.” Dooku says.

“He grew up in an environment that is loving and caring. I’m not talking about attachment. I’m talking about physical contact that is necessary for sentient species to develop without emotional problems.” Plo explains, slowly. “Have you noticed how he shrinks from us? When I talked to him in the meditation chambers, he was shocked to sense my presence brushing against his. He recoils from touch. We had an entire trip to Jedha and not even once he let us touch him.”

“And he just came from an environment where he was supposedly cared for.” Mace concludes. “I didn’t read anything that could indicate mistreatment in his records.”

“Neither did I.” Plo agrees. “His attitude suggests mistreatment and trauma. That’s why he reacted so badly to being questioned. And that’s not all.” He says. “We all felt how tense he was when he thought he would spar with you, Yan.”

“He does avoid me if he can, I’ve noticed.” Dooku said. “Why, is what I don’t understand.”

“I have no theories about that.” Plo said while Obi-Wan was still blissfully unaware in his arms.

“Now we know why the Force wanted him to have three Masters.” Mace says. “I don’t think only one of us would be enough for him.”

“I wish that wasn’t the case but we’ll have a lot of work to do ahead of us with him.”

“He should see a mind healer.” Dooku says after a moment in consideration.

“No.”

“Why not? He needs one and he’s beyond our help in these matters.”

“I know.” Plo says and Mace can feel his friend's emotions of pain and heartbreaking. “But he doesn’t trust us, and if he doesn’t and we send him to a mind healer what do you think it’ll happen?”

They would have to tell why they were requesting a mind healer to their Padawan, and then explain the situation with the vaults, and the panic attack. Obi-Wan would go to his sessions but he probably wouldn’t say more than what he told them, and when Obi-Wan has another panic attack because of that and the healers evaluate him a danger to himself they’d-

“They’ll break his shields.” Mace says.

“Yes.” Plo agrees. “And Obi-Wan has layers upon layers of shields. We don’t know how he learned to make them but they’re strong enough to not lower even when he’s sleeping.”

Mace checks, and he finds them all intact.

“I suspect that even when unconscious his shields will hold.” Plo says. “Can you imagine what it would take to break past his defenses?”

“It would shatter his mind.” Dooku answers, though they all know by this point the severity of the situation.

“So he can’t go to a mind healer. Not yet. But we can help him by beginning to gain his trust.”

Mace doesn’t know how to do that. He’s never heard of Masters having to gain their Padawan’s trust before. More than once, he asks himself what happened to his Padawan for him to be like that.

The Force is mournful around Obi-Wan and Mace shivers with the implications of that.

--.--

Obi-Wan wakes a few hours later with no idea of where he is and what time it is. He continues to breathe deeply and doesn't give signs that he's awake, it's better if his captors think him defenseless.

His first instinct is to check his shields and he's glad that they're intact. Then he makes a mental map of injuries and... nothing, he appears to not be hurt. The Force is flowing through him too so no collars.

That makes no sense. Who would capture a Force sensitive and leave them unrestrained?

He dares to sense the room he's in and...oh.

Master Windu is there, so is Master Plo and...Dooku. No, that's not right. He's not Count. He's Obi-Wan's Master. They all are.

He's not been captured, he's in the Temple.

His memory is fuzzy but he remembers showing them his lightsaber and their cold reactions and then questioning him. Obi-Wan had panicked.

Shame floods in his mind when he recalls how he clinged to Master Plo's embrace. He shouldn't have done that.

Worse, now they'll ask more questions and he'll be sent to a mind healer.

Obi-Wan's been through more dire situations than this but something about being in a twelve year old body is messing with his emotional responses. He can't wait to get through puberty again and be finished with this.

Well, he's going to have to meditate (and isn't that the solution to all of his problems?). For now, he'll settle on assuring his Masters that he's fine (he really isn't, but his outburst from earlier was enough for one day, he doesn't need to be coddled).

He wakes properly this time, blinking the warm feeling of sleep away. His Masters' attention are immediately on him but they don't try to get closer to him.

For a moment, neither part knows how to proceed.

"Come sit with us, Obi-Wan." Master Dooku's voice is calm and he goes to them.

They wait until he sits between Master Windu and Master Plo. Obi-Wan can sense the smile from Master Plo in the Force. The kel dor offers him a hand and Obi-Wan debates if he should take it.

He's not a youngling and frivolous contact is usually frowned upon. Master Jinn never offered to touch him much except for when cleaning his wounds after a difficult mission and even then he usually sent him to the Healers to be taken care of.

He was not the most affectionate Master either to Anakin, but he tried to hug the boy after a nightmare. Even with his Grandpadawan, touches were minimal. His only source of touches were the crechelings, when he had the time, between teaching Anakin, his own responsibilities and missions they were sent to. He didn't realize until now that he misses being in the creche, taking care of the babies there. It's so full of Light and it's almost like a bubble of joy.

He almost didn't come any longer to the creche after the war started and he became a General. Then seeing the bodies-

No.

Still, it's free contact, offered to him by someone he wants to trust and regards as a friend. He prodes the Force and he doesn't feel judgment from them. His Masters are projecting only safety and Obi-Wan wants to believe in that, he wants to-

Why can't he have nice things in life?

Obi-Wan plasters an upward curl in his lips but his eyes stay serious. He doesn't take Master Plo's offered hand.

"I'm sorry for earlier," he tells them, it's difficult to look at their eyes but Obi-Wan stays firm, "I promise I'll meditate to not let my emotions affect me like that again." He was going to say more but Master Dooku interrupted him.

"Padawan, we're not concerned about you meditating." He wants to argue but his Master's tone leaves no room for it. "We want to make sure you're feeling better."

Oh.

"Oh." He hadn't taken that into account.

"How are you feeling, Obi-Wan?" Master Windu asks.

"I'm…" he doesn't know, has no idea how he feels. The mess of emotions inside him are difficult to sort and process. "I-"

His palms are closed and his knuckles are turning white and he doesn't notice that because he still doesn't know how he feels about crying in front of them and being hugged.

"It's alright, Obi-Wan, you don't need to answer if you don't feel comfortable."

"I'm sorry, Master." Because he doesn't know what else to say.

"There's nothing to apologize for."

He nods and he feels the migraine still there inside his skull, reduced to a light headache starting to pound again.

“And how are you physically?” Master Dooku asks.

“I have a headache but it’s not strong.” He feels exhausted too. Emotions leave him tired. He won’t complain about that though. He’s more interested in what his punishment will be for being rude to his Masters. He can only hope it’s something related with the Archives.

“I’ll make some tea for you.” Master Plo says. Obi-Wan doesn’t know what else he can say. Are his Masters disappointed with him? Are they going to send him to a mind healer?

“What are you thinking, Obi-Wan?” Master Dooku says.

“I’m thinking about my punishment.” He says and he doesn’t have the energy to project emotions in his voice. “I’m hoping for something related to the Archives.”

“Why do you think we would punish you?” Master Dooku asks him. “I think that you showed you were genuinely sorry earlier. A punishment is only necessary if you haven't learnt the lesson.”

“Oh. I didn’t- I just assumed-”

“We know. What did you learn from this?”

“Some things I’ll have to do under supervision and I shouldn’t go to the vaults.”

“Yes, very well.” Master Dooku says. “I think we can put this behind us, then.”

Obi-Wan is careful to not show his surprise at that but he thinks he fails. Master Plo brings the tea and serves them. It’s herbal and Obi-Wan feels his tense body relaxing as he drinks, his headache is fading and his eyes are slow to open.

“You would like that, wouldn’t you?” Master Windu says to him, a hint of humor in his voice. “Punishment on the Archives.”

Obi-Wan doesn’t bother hiding his smile. “I like it there.”

“Why? What do you like to search about?”

“Mandalore.” Oops. Obi-Wan immediately stiffens. He hadn’t meant to say that. Herbal tea and his tiredness aren’t a good combination.

“Mandalore?” Master Dooku asks curiously.

“Yes, Master.”

“Is that because of your lightsaber?” Master Windu asks.

Obi-Wan ponders what he should tell them. “Yes and no,” maybe it’s better if he speaks now, when his lips are loose than to wait for another opportunity, “I like to research and before I became a Padawan, the Force guided me to search about Mandalore. When I found my crystals, I knew my saber would be different, and the materials were in the vault. I think it fits.”

“Fits?”

“Yes. Mandalorians, or at least the Haat Mando'ade, have a Code very similar to ours.” Obi-Wan says. “That’s why I painted my saber.”

“I didn’t know the painting had meaning.” Master Windu says.

“I can show you, if you’d like.” Obi-Wan says. “Where’s my saber?”

Master Dooku retrieves it from where they’d put it when Obi-Wan had fallen asleep.

“Mandalorians paint their armors. They can paint their House symbol, or simply messages about who they are. You can know a lot about a mandalorian by looking at their armor.” Obi-Wan explains to them. “I chose orange for life and black for justice. The Jedi symbol I painted in green to represent my duty. So if a mandalorian sees my lightsaber, he’ll know I care for fulfilling my duty with justice and preserving life.”

He doesn’t tell them that his hilt is impossible to destruct by another lightsaber attack, or that the shape will allow him to not need adjustments as he grows up, that it’s a special model that will allow him to switch between forms without problems, nor that it has three kyber crystals, traditionally used by the Sith, allowing more power and a retractable blade which means he can surprise his enemies during a fight. He doesn’t mention any of it.

“It’s a good message.” Master Dooku says, bringing his thoughts back to the present.

“That it is,” Master Plo agreed, “and the colors of your crystals are very...flash.”

Obi-Wan allows his lips to form a small smile. “Yeah, they are. After I finished painting, I went to the private dojos to turn it on. I was a little shocked too.”

“Were you.” Master Windu says dryly.

“I was afraid for a moment but I trust in the Force and it wouldn’t let me use the Darkside to build it.” Of that, Obi-Wan is sure of. “But I think it’s time to have a red lightsaber in the Order. I mean, the last different lightsaber we had was Tarre Vizsla’s Darksaber. Besides, mine isn’t totally red, it has black too.”

Master Plo chuckled. “Are you planning on becoming the second mandalorian Jedi?”

“I don’t know, Master.” Obi-Wan answers. “If that’s what the Force wills, then yes.”

They do notice his serious tone.

“Can you tell us more?” Master Plo asks.

“I-” Obi-Wan wants to. It feels right. “Will you listen to me?”

“We will, Padawan.” Master Dooku promises, his lips are curved up in a small, encouraging, smile.

“Alright, I’ll tell you then.” He is nervous but not afraid, the Force feels calm and he figures a better chance he won’t have than this. “I’ve been having visions,” if one could say visions when in reality he lived through it, “about the return of the Sith.”

The air around him stills. The Force rings true but the incredulity coming from his Masters is heavy.

“I know that it seems impossible but please,” he prays to the Force that they’ll believe in him, “the Sith are alive, they’re just hiding and planning. I’ve seen it and I know that sometimes visions are self-fulfilling and that the future can change, but Masters,” he knows all of that - suffered because of it more than once. “I’m certain that it’s only a matter of when they’ll return and not if. The Force showed me Mandalore because in the past we were enemies. We still are, coming to think of it.” Obi-Wan says the last part more to himself than to them. “But we can change that. We have time to, and if we have the mandalorians by our side, the Sith will never win.”

“It’s a very interesting explanation, Obi-Wan.” Master Windu says diplomatically. Obi-Wan recognizes that tone. He used it a lot during diplomatic negotiations when he was not in agreement but still had to be polite with others.

“Please, you have to believe me.” Obi-Wan implores.

Suddenly, he’s not tired anymore. Instead he feels desperate for them to believe in him - this quiet, sorrowful feeling that’s been eating away his bones and at the same time it makes him want to believe he’ll see the galaxy free of darkness, but in the essence of his soul, he knows it’s just a stupid hope, a thing he made up just so he could face another day. And their reactions only made him sure that he’ll be more than tired when this conversation ends.

“Obi-Wan-”

“I’m not crazy,” he says, “I’m aware that you are trying to gain my trust and that eventually I’ll have to go to a mind healer.” He does want to see one but not now, when he has so much to do. “But I can’t, don’t you see? I-”

What can he do to make them believe? To make them see?

“If I lower my shields,” he doesn’t want to but maybe that’s the only option left, “and show you, will you help me?”

It’s an enormous gamble. He’s putting at risk everything - the entire future of the galaxy for the next few decades. The Force feels oddly silent here and he wonders if Master Windu is seeing a shatterpoint for this moment, their decision.

“Obi-Wan,” Master Dooku says after a moment passes, “that’s not necessary. It’s your mind and only when you’re ready, not before, that you can lower your shields.”

He knows that but- perhaps it’s not him, but they, that aren't ready for that yet.

Where’s Anakin and Cody when he needs a strategic retreat?

“Of course, Masters.” He too can be neutral in his tone. “I’m sorry for imposing on your evening.”

“Padawan-” Master Plo tries.

“I’d like permission to eat with my friends this evening.” His body reveals nothing and his mind even less. Obi-Wan is a blank face, emotions locked tightly, shoved so deep inside himself that they’re unknown even to him.

He feels they are having a silent conversation about letting him go through the Force and he knows the conclusion before they finish.

“Of course, Padawan. You may go.” Master Dooku says.

Obi-Wan doesn’t want to spend the evening surrounded by people, least of all his friends but he makes his strategic retreat and goes to eat with them. If he doesn’t, who else does he have to go to?

He curses himself, his lack of patience. How could he be so naive?

Yes, they are Jedi, his Masters, his family - the only one he’s ever known in his life. But they can’t help him. This is his mission, and his alone.

His friends are happy for him - he’s been distant these last few weeks, and he barely had the time to tell them about being chosen as a Padawan or his trip to Jedha. They ask him a million questions and he’s less than excited to tell them about all the rumors surrounding his Masters and his new lightsaber - but privately, he’s a little amused by the knowledge that he has his saber for less than a day and already the entire Temple knows about it. He wonders if he’ll be summoned to the High Council with his Masters to explain it.

Before he leaves, Obi-Wan remembers to ask Bant for help with his classes and he laughs when they tell him he’s crazy to try to learn healing when everyone knows it’s not his forte. His smiles never reach his eyes though, because he wished he didn’t have to learn it, he knows he was never meant to heal wounds, just to destroy, and disappoint-

But his friends don’t notice it, they are still young, unscarred by the horrors Obi-Wan lived through, and if they don’t realize that he's wearing a facade, well, that’s no one’s concern but Obi-Wan’s.

--.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Obi-Wan’s thirteenth life day comes and goes very differently than in his first life. For once, his friends throw him a surprise party in Quinlan’s quarters. He makes an effort to appear happy and grateful, and he thinks he even manages to, by the way his friends seem content with him.

They complain that now he’s never around anymore, and how dedicated Obi-Wan is in his studies, that his Masters must demand only the best from him - Obi-Wan laughs it off and tells them that he’ll be the best Jedi Knight in the entire Order, that’s why he’s so busy all the time.

He tries to help to clean the apartment when the party's over but Quin sends him away, telling him to enjoy his evening with his Masters. Master Tholme, who was “supervising” the party, wishes him a good night and ruffles his hair.

The truth is that lately, Obi-Wan tries to spend most of his time away from his Masters. His excuses vary from studying with his friends to meditating, and they pass from the most distinct places in the Temple, such as the creche, where he spends his free time helping and playing with the younglings, to the gardens where he grounds his mind in the Living Force and helps the members of the Agricorps to cultivate the seeds.

He’s only in his quarters sharing space with his Masters when it’s the end of the week and he has to present his progress for them. In those days, they dine together, Obi-Wan tells them about his week, his classes, his lessons and his progress regarding his healing lessons in the Halls of Healing. He’s always brief, just as if he were giving a report to the High Council between battles.

Obi-Wan can tell his Masters are worried about him. Since the Incident (as he decided to label it), whatever progress he made with them was crushed and is now back to square one.

He doesn’t speak again about his visions (his old life, really) although Master Windu tried more than once to talk to him about it, he even used various approaches, changing his tactics but Obi-Wan hadn’t earned the title of Negotiator for naught, he knows his way around words and he can talk around circles better than Master Yoda, and he is a professional when it comes to misdirect the focus of the conversation, which he does, unashamedly with Master Windu.

Master Plo is another case entirely. While Master Windu is worried about his visions, Master Plo is worried about his issues, he’s constantly offering (and he thinks he’s been inconspicuous about it but he’s really not) comfort to him, physical or through the Force. It pains Obi-Wan to reject both but he knows that he can’t afford to repeat the Incident again. He doesn’t think he’d survive it - quite literally. At night, when he’s wide awake in his bed, he feels the creature inside him, like a krayt dragon, starved for touch, crying and roaring loud in his bones. If he lets that part of him out, he’ll never get anything done in this life.

There’s a reason Obi-Wan avoids touch. He is too attached, too emotional and unbalanced to enjoy affections from others. Jedi Masters aren’t like that, they can comfort each other and don’t feel deeply about it. He does, and that’s why he avoids it.

Last, there’s Master Dooku. Obi-Wan isn’t afraid of him any longer and he doesn’t become anxious about having to spend his week sharing space with him. They still haven't spared and which is a source of relief to him. He knows in his mind he’ll only be able to see Count Dooku and the outcome wouldn’t be pretty (Obi-Wan’s trying really hard not to be sent to a mind healer).

Master Dooku is quiet but so is Obi-Wan. He makes an effort to communicate more with him and to be empathic but Obi-Wan can clearly see the trait all in Yoda’s lineage share: difficulty in expressing their feelings and having misunderstandings because they can’t convey in words what they are thinking. Yes, both Master Dooku and him are diplomats but when it comes to their fellow Jedi, words fail them more than what they care to admit.

What should he do? The Force’s been silent lately, since the Incident. He’s not of age yet to go to Mandalore.

Wait. He’s thirteen.

In his other life, he was being shipped off to Bandomeer. That means...Xanatos…

…and Bruck Chun.

He doesn’t hate Xanatos because it’s not the path of a Jedi to hate but oh, it’s a close thing. In a scale of his enemies, Maul is at the top, followed by Sidious and then there’s Xanatos. Maul, because he killed-

No, he can’t go in there.

Sidious because he’s taken everything from Obi-Wan, his friends, his men, his family, and worst of all, his brother, turning him against everything he held dear and condemning Obi-Wan to a life of twenty years wasting away in the deserts while the galaxy screamed in pain.

Xanatos is a special case. He wasn’t an enemy and Obi-Wan recognizes that the boy suffered just as much as he had under Qui-Gon’s tutelage. No, he earned that place in Obi-Wan’s mental list because after Xanatos, Obi-Wan was used as a pawn in an attempt to heal a soul deep wound in a Master. Then he started his apprenticeship under said Master because of pity, and proceeded to live the rest of his Padawan days in the shadows of a Fallen boy, never being good enough, never being seeing as his own person, until he was cast away for another apprentice, who was exactly like the Fallen one.

Obi-Wan has so many issues.

He’s thankful his legs take him to his quarters at Master Plo’s because he’s spiraling and not actively conscious enough to guide himself there.

Emptiness greets him, because he was supposed to be at Master Windu’s this week and he knows his Masters were planning a small celebration for him (really, they can be great Jedi Masters but it seems that secrets are not a thing Jedi are used to keep) but he can’t bring himself to attend - not another one. It’s his life day, doesn’t he have the right to spend it as he pleases? Well, he fancies quiet and not pretending happiness.

He ran away from his first topic, as usual.

Sitting on the mat by the window, he lets his signature mix with the Force. Feeling part of the Force is comforting for him. Obi-Wan misses not being this crude matter, as Master Yoda put it, he misses being a luminous being. He allows himself to be more part of the Force than being flesh and bone. He enters the Cosmic Force and lets himself wander.

Bandomeer.

He should alert someone about Xanatos. It’s a terrible idea but he can’t let him attack the Temple. Who would even listen to him?

No one.

It fits, he thinks ironically, his name means No-One Child-of-Nobody in Stewjon, and it does translate in his reality - people won't listen to No-One.

Obi-Wan has to do something about it, it’s not optional. Even if he has to take the matter into his own hands, he’ll prevent innocent lives from being taken. He’s a Jedi, it’s what he does, no matter if people tell him no, or refuse to listen to his warnings.

So, Obi-Wan plots. He has an idea of when he can expect Xanatos to make his return to the Temple. Better yet, he knows where he’ll plant the bombs. It’s simple, come to think about it. He can deal with it alone. He just has to avoid a face to face confrontation with Xanatos and stop him from coming in contact with Bruck.

While he knows more than the failed Padawan, he doesn’t have the strength yet to defeat him. He knows he has to be more clever if he wants to defeat him. Bruck is another matter entirely. The boy still doesn’t have a Master and time is running out for him, which makes him even more angry. Obi-Wan isn’t sure if approaching him would do more harm than good. He might resent Obi-Wan more and this makes things difficult. How can he help Bruck, and avoid his death?

Obi-Wan is so concentrated in formulating his plan that he doesn’t notice his Masters entering the quarters, probably looking for him since he failed to show up on time for their not-so-secret party.

It’s too late now to try to become more material - his Masters will have questions about how his Force signature is non-existent. He knows the feeling - he feels like he died and joined the Force. It took him time to get used to it when he first learned the technique on Tatooine. But it was the only way to connect to the Force without drawing attention to himself and he needed to meditate, badly.

“Hello, Masters.” He says, calmly.

“Obi-Wan,” Master Plo says, a hint of something in his Force signature that Obi-Wan can’t identify.

“You shouldn’t go so deeply into the Force, Padawan.” Master Dooku’s voice is hard - not angry but displeased. “It’s dangerous. You could become lost and join the Force permanently.”

Obi-Wan nods but he doesn’t offer more. He’s incredibly aware of that. He’s trained for that for twenty long years - even if he loses himself in the Force, Obi-Wan is confident he could find his way back or, at least, become a ghost again (wouldn’t that be ironic).

Master Windu signs.

“You’re not going to listen to us, are you?”

“I’m sorry.” He doesn’t feel like he should apologize but he has manners. He changes the subject. “Why are you here, Masters?”

“We were looking for you, young one.” Master Plo says, accepting for now the lost battle. “It’s your life day and we had agreed to meet at Master Windu’s.”

“And you didn’t show up.” Said Master continues. “So we had to look for you.”

“Ah.” As if he didn’t know. “You planned a celebration, didn’t you?”

Master Dooku snorts - Obi-Wan never knew snorts could be dignified but in his Master they are.

“Please, Padawan. Let’s not pretend that you didn’t know about it.” He says, with good humor. “It’s apparent that we can’t hide much from you. Quite the opposite, I’d think. It’s we that are in the dark about you.”

“I-”

Master Dooku raises his hand, cutting him. “I’m not saying it's a bad thing, Obi-Wan. No, you make the challenge much more interesting.”

He has a smile on his face and Obi-Wan relaxes a little.

“He’s right, Padawan. It’s not every day that a thirteen year old can fool three counselors.” Master Windu says. “We used to have a reputation before you, you know? Now we have to compete for our titles of Masters.”

“Well, it’s not my fault.” Obi-Wan says, the mood lighter than it has been since the incident. “A great teacher a Padawan makes.” He quotes, smiling.

“My, my, that you do.” Master Plo says. “How about you reveal your secrets to us, then? I think I’d like to know how to hide myself like you do. It’d make my life better when we have to avoid the Council.”

“Our lives,” Master Windu corrects with a twitch of lips, “you’re not the only one that wants to avoid them sometimes.”

“What do you think, Obi-Wan? Would you teach us?” Master Dooku asks.

That’s...not what he was expecting. At all.

“If I teach you, can we skip the party?”

“Are you sure you want to skip it? We made cake.” Master Windu says seriously. “It’s a secret recipe and one of the best in Coruscant, if I do say so.”

“I’m sure.” There was a time when Obi-Wan used to have a sweet tooth. That was before his year-long mission on Mandalore. After that, his cravings with food were related to spicy - the spicier, the better. “I don’t like sweets much. I…” his Masters look genuinely curious at him, so he decides to continue, “I prefer spicy food, actually.”

“Spicy?” Master Dooku is intrigued, he can tell.

“Yes.” He won’t say Mandalorian food because he has learned his lesson. Then, he has an idea, “I propose a trade.”

“What kind of trade?” Master Windu is interested.

“I teach you to hide in the Force and every time one of you doesn’t make progress,” and Obi-Wan (conveniently) doesn’t mention that it took him twenty years to learn this technique, “you have to treat me with dinner at a place of my choice. Beforehand, I promise to not choose an expensive place to eat.”

“You drive a hard bargain, Padawan.” Master Dooku says, amused.

“Well, you are Jedi Masters, aren’t you? It shouldn’t be too difficult for you to learn...unless you’re afraid your skills aren’t that...how should I put it? That advanced.”

Master Windu laughs - it’s not a full belly laugh but it’s a sound he never heard from him before. “Oh, Obi-Wan. You’ll regret saying that about us.”

“So, we have a trade?”

“Yes, Padawan, we have.”

--.--

Plo is frustrated. Beside him, he can feel Mace and Yan releasing their own frustrations to the Force as well.

In contrast, Obi-Wan is the perfect picture of a serene Jedi. He is physically there, as Plo’s eyes confirm but he can’t feel even a nuance of his signature in the Force. It’s frightening to not be able to sense his Padawan. Even the bonds feel as if they didn’t exist.

To be able to hide, you have to be prepared to let go, Masters. He hears through the Force - not the bond. It’s the strangest thing Plo ever felt.

How does Obi-Wan do it?

As if sensing their discomfort, his Padawan slowly returns and they follow him out of their joint meditation.

“How?” Mace asks him, he is looking intently at Obi-Wan.

Obi-Wan smiles. Plo feels like it’s a combination of smugness and sadness. Why his Padawan looks like an old man in a boy’s body he doesn’t know. It’s one more mystery of Obi-Wan Kenobi that only time will reveal to them.

“I told you, you have to let go.” Obi-Wan repeats. “It’s what we’re taught to do since the creche. But few of us are really able to.” He says with solemnity. “I like to think of it as death, yet the Force as we used to have in our Code. Only in perfect union to the Force, you can join it, becoming the Force, instead of simply using it for meditating. If you can let go, you’ll see what Master Yoda always teaches us, that its energy surrounds us and binds us. Luminous beings are we, not this crude matter.”

At that moment, Obi-Wan doesn’t look like a Padawan in Master Plo’s eyes. He is wise and experienced beyond his age, he is-

“There’s a balance, though.” Obi-Wan continues, unaware that he has three Jedi Masters speechless sitting in front of him. “Let go completely and you’ll really join the Force. No, what a Jedi should strive to achieve is balance in all things. By letting go of our material reality, we prove that we are at peace, but when we reach that state, we have to gather all that makes us and retain it instead of releasing it to the Force as we’re taught to do. Then you’ll have your union to the Force, and like me, you’ll be impossible to tell apart, because there’ll be no difference between you and the Force.”

Plo is more than speechless. He wants to know where, exactly, did Obi-Wan learn that. He is sure that knowledge like this would be only accessible to Masters or members of the High Council. But he knows that his Padawan knew this as an Initiate - and he never had access to their codes.

“You do know how to explain the concept, Obi-Wan,” Yan says to him, “I don’t suppose you’ll share with us how you learned it?”

Again that sad smile.

“Maybe one day I’ll tell you,” their Padawan says, “perhaps after you can replicate the technique, I’ll tell you who taught me.”

“You, young man,” Mace tells him, “will have a lot to explain and I look forward to hearing it.”

“As you say, Master.” Obi-Wan agrees. “I should warn you, though: don’t try to replicate this alone. It’s...well, dangerous.”

“You don’t tell me.” Mace says. “Should we assume you tried alone?”

Obi-Wan shrugs. “I had...someone to guide me.”

Yan raises an eyebrow at him.

“It was a long time ago, Masters.”

He doesn’t say more and neither did they expect him to.

Plo didn't know what he expected but he should have learned that Obi-Wan is always a step ahead of them. Suffice to say, they'll have many dinners outside the Temple in the following days.

His modest savings will suffer but as he looks to his friends and sees their determination to master the technique, he knows it'll be for a good cause. Nonetheless, he's curious about where Obi-Wan will take them to eat.

For now, they opt to eat the cake together. It wouldn’t be right to throw away perfectly good food. Obi-Wan eats but Plo notices he has a smug expression the entire time on his face. Their Padawan is a little brat, he’s learning. He knew they wouldn’t be able to learn it and Plo wonders how many times they will try before succeeding.

“You were right, Master Windu,” their Padawan breaks the silence after tasting the cake.

“About what?”

“It is the best on Coruscant.”

Mace gives a sharp smile to Obi-Wan in response. “I’ll teach you the recipe.”

“Really?”

“Of course, it’s a lineage tradition, Padawan.”

“Alright, but I’m not a good cook.”

“You don’t have to be, trust me.”

And Plo can see that Obi-Wan’s curiosity has been sparked by that. Hmm, who would know that bribes can work both ways with their Padawan? By the looks of Yan, he’s aware of that too.

Well, Obi-Wan will find out that he’s not the only one who can negotiate and bargain for things he wants.

-–.--

His lesson with his Masters give Obi-Wan an idea. He knows he shouldn’t use the Force like this but he is feeling a little desperate with his lack of options. Xanatos is coming and Bruck is still an Initiate. If he allows things to run its course, Xanatos will feed the boy lies and convince him to help in destroying the Temple.

Obi-Wan will be forced to stop them both, and while Xanatos can be held accountable for his actions, Bruck is too young and naive to understand the consequences of his doings. The Jedi Council will punish the boy, at best with sentencing him to the Corps and at worse with death - they can’t allow a rogue Force user running free in the galaxy with potential to turn to the Darkside because of resentment (Obi-Wan doesn’t like it and he’s aware the Masters on the Council won’t either, but what other choice do they have with their beliefs as they are?).

So, to prevent Bruck’s death, he will do something that he knows it’s wrong and a great misuse of the Force.

When he is alone at night in his bedroom, Obi-Wan slips into the Force and looks for Bruck’s signature in the Initiates’ dorms. It’s easy to find him, anger and bitterness surrounds the boy and Obi-Wan shudders to think about the potential those feelings have to turn him to the Darkside. But he firmly believes it is a choice to Fall, and for now, Bruck still hasn’t made that choice, there’s still good in him and Obi-Wan intends to augment that.

Carefully, he surrounds the boy’s signature with his own. He could manipulate Bruck’s thoughts, invade his mind with little trouble and completely change his personality, but this is a barrier he won’t cross. What he intends to do is subtler than that.

Like a corrupted kyber crystal can be cleaned from darkness if exposed and bombarded with Light, Obi-Wan will pour his own Light and positive feelings into Bruck’s own signature.

He does it slowly, gradually, to not wake him up. It’s almost like a meditation, and the negative feelings that aren’t his own, he untagles them and releases them to the Force, like a Master would do to help their Padawan meditate.

By the end of the night, Obi-Wan is done and there’s nothing else he can do to help Bruck that’s less invasive than this. It’s in his hands now, the boy will wake up feeling lighter than he has in perhaps years - his fears and disappointments will still be there but they won’t cloud his personality and actions anymore - and he will have a choice to make, be free of it and return to be the good person Obi-Wan once knew he was or return to his old habits and let himself be consumed by resentment.

If Bruck chooses to stray from the Light after that, Obi-Wan will have no other choice but to stop him if the boy allies himself with Xanatos. He hopes he won’t be forced to fight him because Obi-Wan knows that there’s very little he won’t do to make sure the Temple is safe.

--.--

Xanatos' attack on the Temple surprises everyone.

Everyone except their Padawan.

Obi-Wan is the one to stop Xanatos from blowing the Room of a Thousand Fountains. He even captured the former Padawan.

Mace, Plo and Yan hear about it after the incident. They were in the middle of a Council discussion about assignments when a Master - Vokara Che - enters the chambers and gives them the news.

As she explains what du Crion had planned, they tense immediately. What would’ve happened if he wasn’t stopped?

“Who arrested him?” Master Tiin asks her when she finishes her report.

“Padawan Kenobi did.” She tells them. “He disarmed the bombs and fought Xanatos. We found them when Kenobi had already cuffed him with a Force-suppressing cuff. Outside from a mild burn from Xanatos’ lightsaber on his arm he is otherwise unharmed. Obi-Wan is not even shaken from the experience but I insisted he stayed in the Halls of Healing until one of his Masters could go to see him.”

Plo exchanges looks with Yan and Mace. Of course their Padawan was somehow involved in this. Obi-Wan has a lot of secrets and acts strange for the most part, it is no surprise to hear that.

“If it’s not too much, I’d like to go and see him, Masters.” Plo says to the rest of them.

“Of course, Master Koon.” Master Rancisis tells him. “You can join us tomorrow.”

Plo nods. Mace and Yan will come to see Obi-Wan later.

When he arrives at the Halls, Obi-Wan is sitting on his assigned bed, meditating. He feels Plo and returns from the Force.

“Hello, Master Plo.” He has a timid smile on, as if he knows he’s in trouble.

“My Padawan,” he says exasperated, “why is that, when there’s trouble, I know I’ll hear your name involved?”

Obi-Wan blushes.

“Let’s go to our quarters, shall we? You have much to explain.” His tone is soft, and although Plo is worried, he’s decided to not focus on that for now.

Upon entering, he asks, “do you prefer to finish your meditation or tell me about what happened today first?”

“I can tell you about it.”

He sits and Plo goes to the kitchen, to make a cup of tea for them both. He returns and Obi-Wan drinks from it gratefully. Plo lets him gather his thoughts.

“I...” he says, unsure of himself, “I knew Xanatos would attack the Temple, Master.”

That doesn’t surprise Plo. Obi-Wan had told them about having visions before.

“Did you have a vision?” He asks neutrally.

“You could say that.” The way Obi-Wan says that gives Plo the impression that there’s a lot more involved than a mere vision but he doesn’t interrupt the boy to point that out. “So I’ve prepared for it. And I…” This time his Padawan looks sheepish. “I went to the vaults again, Master.”

Plo signs deeply and doesn’t let himself even feel, he just releases it to the Force. “Why did you go there, Padawan?”

Obi-Wan doesn’t flinch but Plo can see the aborted movement. “I needed Force-suppressing cuffs.”

He nods, because what else can he say to his Padawan?

“Did you touch anything else down there?”

“No, Master.” Without prompting, Obi-Wan sends his memories of going to the vaults. He’s telling the truth but it doesn’t change the fact that he disobeyed them and went to a forbidden place without informing them.

“Why didn’t you ask for help, Obi-Wan?” Plo asks, because he genuinely thought that the three of them were making progress with gaining their Padawan’s trust, but it seems that they aren’t.

Obi-Wan looks down. “You wouldn’t believe me, Master.”

“You don’t know that, Padawan.”

“But I do.” He insists. “You didn’t listen to me before, why would you listen now?”

Obi-Wan sounds- Plo wouldn’t describe it as sad, no, but resigned. The same as he looks like since day one of becoming their Padawan. There are moments when Plo thinks they are managing to making him happy, even laugh, but then, for the most part, Obi-Wan returns to be distant and quiet, a shadow in his blue-grayish eyes that Plo can’t name, and a sad expression in the few moments his Padawan thinks he’s not being observed. A resigned sort of acceptance that breaks Plo’s heart. This expression shouldn’t be on one so young.

Plo vows to take that expression and turn it into a happy one even if he has to spend his entire Padawanship trying to understand Obi-Wan.

“Obi-Wan-”

“No, Master Plo. It’s true, don’t you see?” He sounds sad, so, so sad. “I told you about the Sith and you didn’t believe me. Of course you didn’t, there’s no darkness in the galaxy. But you are wrong, Master. The return of the Sith doesn’t happen from one day to night. It’s slow and raises no alarms and when we notice, it’ll be too late. Darkness covers the Light bit by bit until we can no longer see the daylight. Xanatos was just the beginning.”

Plo takes a moment to think about what Obi-Wan said.

“And if I say I believe in you, Obi-Wan?”

“You don’t,” his Padawan replies, “but it hardly matters. I intend to do my duty as a Jedi even if I have to be punished for it.”

“Padawan,” he tries to say but Obi-Wan shakes his head.

“You’ll punish me Master. I went to the vaults and I knew it was wrong. It was my choice and I’ll accept whatever you decide.” He says. “I’m not sorry, though. Our Temple should be a safe place for us, and if Xanatos had succeeded, it wouldn’t be anymore.”

In all his years as a Master, Plo never had to deal with that. He's prepared for teenager fits and tantrums, he knows how important it is to be open for communication, where to look for if his Padawan needs a mind healer, how to provide comfort and keep them physically well. But he doesn't know how to argue with his Padawan. Obi-Wan acts very differently from what they would expect from a typical teenage stewjoni boy and yet, sometimes when he says things like that Plo wonders if his Padawan wasn't abducted by an old, tired soul.

“I’ll discuss with your Masters your punishments later, Padawan. You may go to your room.” He says after a pause. He sounds more curt but at the moment he really doesn't have the mind to say it in a gentle voice.

Thankfully, Obi-Wan bows and goes. Plo feels that this is far from being over.

When he tells Mace and Yan about it, Yan surprises them all with an idea for Obi-Wan’s punishment. He shares his idea and explains why he thinks it’s a good idea, although a little unconventional.

“Our Padawan already spends more time at the Archives than any of us thinks it’s healthy. He has an obsession with whatever it is that he researches, and asking him to make a report on a subject is a waste of time.” He tells them. “Obi-Wan is organized and clean, so chores are out of the question. What he lacks is spending time with others of his age but that we can’t interfere directly or he’ll notice and it could backfire on us.”

“So your solution to that is this punishment?” Mace asks.

“Yes, I think it can be good for him and Plo said he’s starved for touch, although he won’t ask for it, we can actually provide it without upsetting him.”

“You’re right. I like it. Plo?”

“I agree, but I still think his access to the vaults will become a problem in the future.” And they couldn’t report it to the Council either for obvious reasons so they had this potentially dangerous problem on their hands to deal with.

“We’ll see how he reacts to his punishment first. We can talk to him about it after, perhaps ask Obi-Wan to talk through his plans with us before acting.”

“Do you think he’ll do it?” Plo asks.

“If we show him we are here to support him on the condition he speaks to us first, I think he will.” Yan answers.

“Alright, let’s tell him then.”

--.--

Obi-Wan’s punishment is the best he could ever hope for. If all his punishments were like this, he’ll be sure to misbehave a lot more.

Creche duty for a month. And not just any part of the creche: he has to help in the nursery.

When he was a Padawan in his last life, he was awkward with Initiates and terrible with babies. Now, he just sinks into their Force signatures, like a man who just found a safe place in Tatooine after being caught in a sand storm without shelter.

He loves being there. It’s the only place he relaxes and lets his shields loosen, projecting good feelings for the little ones. It’s peaceful, even when they all cry, Obi-Wan couldn’t feel more at home than there.

His Masters notice, of course. He knows they sent him there because of it. He feels...grateful. They didn’t need to but it’s nice to be cared for.

When his month is up, he asks them if he can continue helping in the creche. Obi-Wan doesn’t notice but his emotions are leaking in the Force, and he projects his contentment onto them. There’s always the deep sorrow and sadness that are present (and by this point in his life, they are part of his signature, part of him) but he's the happiest since his arrival here.

His Masters agree but they don’t mention his shields. It is only at night when Obi-Wan notices and after a long meditation, he decides to leave them like that, for now.

In one of his visits to the creche, he encounters Bruck.

Obi-Wan had kept a close eye on the boy ever since that night when he tried to change his signature a little. From what he observed, it had a positive effect on him.

For a moment, neither knows what to say to the other. Obi-Wan decides to break the ice.

“Would you like to help me, Bruck?” He asks gently. “You see, today the babies are going to their swimming lessons and it’s always a wet mess and an extra pair of hands would be nice.”

Obi-Wan projects calm and forgiveness, and his stance is relaxed.

“I’m not the best with babies, Oafy-Wan.” Bruck replies and immediately winces at the cruel nickname he used to call Obi-Wan coming out of his mouth automatically.

Obi-Wan lets it slide off and laughs softly. “I’m not either, Bruck. But this is one of the few opportunities I have to make a mess and not be reprimanded by anyone because I can throw the blame on the babies.”

“Ah.”

“So, would you like to help me?”

“Alright. But if anything goes wrong I’m blaming you.”

“I wouldn’t expect anything less.”

And they go together to the Room of a Thousand Fountains to help the swimming lessons. It’s a good morning, and Obi-Wan feels a spark of hope in his chest that maybe, with time, Bruck and him can be friends again.

When helping in the nursery becomes routine for both boys, Obi-Wan notices that Bruck’s signature almost has no trace of darkness in it - there will always be potential, no one’s perfect - and he sees more than once a Master or two looking curiously in their direction (in Bruck’s direction).

Obi-Wan smiles. It won’t be long till his new not-quite-friend-yet will be chosen as a Padawan.

-–.--

By the time of their next dinner together, Obi-Wan is feeling hopeful enough to try talking to them about his plans again. Maybe all his time spent on the creche when he’s not studying, searching about Mandalore or Palpatine, learning katas or teaching his Masters how to hide in the Force, has made him more open than before.

“I have a request for you, Masters.” He says after they moved to the floor and are playing chess. Obi-Wan is playing against Master Dooku and he is proud (although not the Jedi way) to see that his Master is finding it difficult to penetrate Obi-Wan’s defenses.

When he feels their attention on him, he continues.

“I wish to go to Melida and Daan.”

“Where’s that?”

“Outer Rim, Master Dooku.”

“Can you tell us why you want to go there?”

“The planet is being destroyed by war for generations, Masters.” He explains. “There are two factions: the Melida and the Daan and they’ve been fighting each other for so long that neither remembers why. They simply continue to kill each other.” He lets his sorrow surround his Force signature as he remembers the mission where he first became a General of child soldiers. “Their children became tired of seeing their parents fighting and killing each other, so they united themselves in a third faction, the Young.” Obi-Wan feels grief when he remembers Cerasi, bleeding to death in his arms. “They are fighting their own parents so that they can stop them from continuing the war. The Young are inexperienced children, and they want a better world to grow up into. I wish to help them, Masters.”

They take a moment to think about it. Then, Master Plo asks:

“Is this like the Xanatos' incident, Obi-Wan?”

He nods and observes the silent conversation between his Masters.

“We’ll help you, Padawan.” Master Dooku says. “On one condition, though.”

He braces himself for it.

“You have to include us in your plans.”

Obi-Wan feels relief at that. He can do that.

He senses Master Plo’s signature there, offering acceptance and warmth. Obi-Wan doesn’t touch it, still doesn’t think it’s wise to, but he gives his hand to Master Plo and his Master holds it while he finishes his chess game with Master Dooku, laughing by the end of it when Master Windu was cheating and helping him - to no avail, since Obi-Wan still won.

And if, by the end of the night, he ends up asleep in Master Plo’s arms, without knowing how he ended there, it’s not that embarrassing as he thought it would be in the morning after.

--.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Convincing the High Council of their mission is surprisingly easier than they initially thought. Yan presents the petition to the counselors, explaining that their Padawan had a vision about it and they have good reasons for believing the Force was pushing Obi-Wan to help Melida and Daan. It's agreed that they would depart as soon as possible, which is arranged between them for the next day. 

It does help their cause that Master Yoda has a soft spot for Yan and he does like to favor his lineage if he can. There’s their own Padawan too, who Mace is convinced Yoda himself would take on the boy if not for his advanced age. And lastly, but no less important, is the fact that the news of one Jedi being stranded on the planet just arrived for them, and this gives the perfect opportunity to investigate the situation better - if it is as badly as Obi-Wan said it was, then the Jedi in question, Master Tahl, might need help.

Obi-Wan packs diligently but Mace notices he carries boxes upon boxes of supplies of food, water and medicine. He raises an eyebrow at him.

"We're going to a war zone, Master." His Padawan answers the unvoiced question. "If we want to save lives, we have to be prepared."

He doesn't interfere with him, instead he helps and is joined by Dooku and Plo.

They exchange looks but say nothing. Obi-Wan is doing things openly, as they requested. He still hasn't said what exactly his plans are for when they arrive at the planet but they'll have plenty of time to talk about that during their trip. 

"Where did you get all of this, Padawan?" Dooku asks because the supplies seem endless and they are loading the transport for the better part of the afternoon. Not counting that Obi-Wan skipped his classes in the morning and started before them.

"Learning healing has its advantages, Master." Then Obi-Wan turns sheepish. "I may have been preparing for this mission for a while too."

"Ah." That explains a lot. Once again, they exchange looks. Obi-Wan must be the most mysterious Padawan in all Jedi history.

Next morning comes and goes as they rise and meet at their loaded transport. Obi-Wan insists on just observing their take off from the ground, assuming the co-pilot chair. 

"I hate flying, Masters." Is what he offers as an explanation and again, Mace doesn't know how he can hate it if his only experiences are his two trips to collect kyber crystals. 

When they are finally able to jump to lightspeed, they join Obi-Wan in meditation. His Padawan has been more open with his shields in these last few days and Mace is in an agreement with Dooku and Plo to not prod the boy about it. They'll let him come to them at his own pace. He can only hope that this mission strengthens their connection to Obi-Wan. 

Obi-Wan is quiet when he finishes meditating and tells them about his plans.

"The Young must be our priority. They are children and need food and medical care." His voice is small but Mace can feel the determination behind it. "I can lead you there when we land but I would recommend not leaving the ship too close to their base to not draw attention." 

"What else?" Dooku asks.

"I'll contact the Young first since they'll be more receptive to me. Then I'll call you and we can take the supplies to them." He says, confident. "Depending on their situation and data, we plan accordingly."

Mace has the feeling in his gut that Obi-Wan had already planned - even without accessing the situation first - their next steps on aiding the Young. He doesn't mention it because his Padawan is including them and there is trust being built between them and they won't break it. 

Privately, Mace wishes he knew what passed through Obi-Wan's head. It would be a lot easier to help him. As it were, the mission was a shatterpoint, he could see it even now, centered in his Padawan. He can only hope they're making the right decision by taking this mission.

--.--

Plo is horrified.

When Obi-Wan explained why he wanted to come here and help children, he didn't imagine the situation was so dire.

He flinches when the feelings of pain, misery, sickness and death bombard his senses. Mace and Yan are equally distressed. 

A planet completely torn by war is an understatement. How could the Jedi have not heard of it before?

"It's very far from the Core," Obi-Wan says to him. His Padawan is sitting across from him, meditating after having spent the day distributing supplies to the children and cleaning wounds, tending the sick. 

He didn't flinch even once, his eyes remained clear and his hands stable. Obi-Wan was the picture of serenity the Jedi can only hope to achieve during stressful situations. As it were, Plo wonders what exactly he saw in his visions that made him prepared for these horrors.

"The Republic is corrupt, Master Plo. We serve a Senate that most of the time sends us to useless missions and people who really need our help, especially outside the Core, are left to themselves." His Padawan continues, voice empty. "I'm not against the Republic. It's necessary for keeping the galaxy stable and if it functioned as it should, the reality would be very different. But I disagree with the Jedi receiving orders from them." 

"That's an interesting point of view, Obi-Wan." 

"Master Dooku, we are Jedi. Shouldn't we serve the Force?" He asks instead. "We let corruption take heart in the Republic, let them assign us missions and dictate how we should proceed on them. Instead, we should be freeing slaves, stopping organized crime lords, ending wars and fighting for the better good of the galaxy. But how can we do that if we're bound to the Senate?" Obi-Wan makes a pause there, as if he suddenly remembered he wasn't fighting his point of view through an argument. "I'm sorry, Masters. I just have strong opinions about it."

"Good opinions, I'd say." Mace tells him. "You're not wrong, Obi-Wan. But changes like that take time."

"Yes, I'm aware." His voice was hard. "I'm a Jedi though, and I'll serve the Light wherever it'll take me. I'll do my duty."

It rings like a promise in the Force and Plo has to take a moment to fully comprehend what his Padawan just vowed to do. 

Obi-Wan will follow the Force against the orders of the Council, the Republic and even against their better judgment. 

Plo would be proud - it is, after all, what every Master hopes that their Padawan learns: to follow the Light and let it guide their path - if he wasn't so worried about what that would entail for Obi-Wan's future.

--.--

Obi-Wan plans and commands the Young as if he was born to do it. 

He can see, from the corner of his eye, his Masters' inquisitive gazes, fishing for answers - about how he can know so much from strategy, leading and facing the enemy. Questions he can't answer. 

Instead, he ignores them, and focuses on winning the war and ending the violence. It doesn't escape him the irony of being here again. In his first life, this was where he first learned how cruel life could be, where he learned how to fight and survive, where he became a General. It did not stop after that. The Clone Wars gave him the terrible opportunity to develop further his abilities. 

Obi-Wan learned then that he was good at war . He had the cunning mind to see ahead of the enemy and his strategies were ruthless when needed. 

It was difficult to accept that. His Jedi brothers and sisters were dying across the galaxy while Obi-Wan thrived . He was given command of the better part of the entire Republic fleet and his victories were almost always guaranteed.

He doesn't like what that tells about him. At the present moment, he neither cares about it either. No, instead he uses his sharp mind to assure them quick victories and few casualties. 

Obi-Wan murmurs more than once about following the warnings the Force provides him, or even using visions as excuses for his precise guesses about the attacks planned by the other two factions. 

Finding Master Tahl was easy this time, although Obi-Wan wishes he had managed to convince his Masters to come here earlier and prevent her suffering. Nothing is ever perfect though, and when they finally are able to rescue her, he fears for a moment that her condition is as gravely as in his previous life. 

Using what he has learned so far with the guidance of Master Che, he scans Master Tahl for internal injuries. She is in a rough shape, dehydrated, and with a few broken ribs - nothing he can’t clean and apply bacta. What worries Obi-Wan are her eyes. Last time, she was blinded by her captors. Now, Obi-Wan is confident the damage her sight suffered is not so extensive but it’s still concerning. 

He still isn’t skilled enough to try by himself to use the Force to heal her as he would like to and he won’t risk making her condition worse than what already is. When he finishes treating her to the best of his abilities, he informs her and his Masters about it.

“You need to return to the Temple, Master Tahl.” He explains to them. “I can’t risk healing your eyes and I fear if you remain here, the damage could become permanent.”

“I’m not leaving while there’s still children suffering, Padawan.” 

“Master Tahl-”

“I can wait.” She interrupts him. “Ending this war is a priority. I won’t stand in the way of that.”

“Tahl, are you sure?” Master Windu asks. “One of us can take you back to the Temple.”

“I stand by my decision.” 

Obi-Wan exchanges worried looks with his Masters. They can’t go against her explicit wishes, can they? 

Master Dooku imperceptibly shakes his head, confirming Obi-Wan’s suspicions. If Master Tahl says she can wait, they will respect her decision. Obi-Wan’s heart beats heavily in his chest. Is there nothing he can do to turn the tides to their favor?

Thinking hard about it, he concludes that there isn’t. What he can do to help Master Tahl is to bring an end to this war as quickly as possible without losing more children to it - so he strengthens his resolve and gets to plan. 

He sees in everyone’s eyes the doubts about his strategies. Fortunately, Obi-Wan knows not to endanger the Young and instead focuses on riskier assaults performed by his Masters and himself. It does pay off when, after four weeks since their arrival here, they finally take the Halls of Evidence. 

If that were the extension of Obi-Wan’s concerns, he would be happy. He is racing against time for Master Tahl and he is on high alert for danger when Cerasi and Nield announce to the other factions that they would be negotiating peace in the Halls. 

His dreams of Cerasi dying in his arms have been constant - he doesn’t know if they are nightmares caused by memories or if they are visions, doesn’t know what’s the worse alternative - and he spends most nights lying awake, meditating to calm himself. He can't lose her again. 

It makes him a terrible Jedi, knowing he isn't ready to let her go but if he does, why then was he sent back here? 

-–.--

He prevents her death but at a heavy expense of himself. The slugthrower that was aimed at her hits him instead. Obi-Wan doesn't give in to shock or panic, even when he feels it coming from his three bonds. 

He sends his Masters calm and peace, to their great shock. Obi-Wan suffered worse injuries and kept going, why should a minor shot slow him down? He has a mission and he intends to fulfill it. 

Obi-Wan ensures that the members of all factions are there to discuss a peace treaty and he looks disapprovingly at Nield who was looking ready to avenge him because of his injury. It’s only when the boy relents and everything is going according to the original plan that Obi-Wan allows himself to be pulled off from the Halls of Evidence by Master Dooku.

His Master helps him get to their ship (Obi-Wan isn’t proud to admit that he may have misjudged his ability to keep going on with a wound like this). Arriving there, he is forced to open himself to the Force, to enter a healing trance, and trust that his Masters will finish things here and take care of him and Master Tahl.

Obi-Wan hopes he made a difference in Melida and Daan this time around. At least he won't return to the Temple as a disgraced Padawan, nor will he be put on probation, living the humiliation of having made the right decision but being seen as a disobedient, insolent child. 

When he opens his eyes again, he has to take a moment to remember where he is, when he is.

He doesn't panic but it's a near thing. Obi-Wan still isn't used to waking up surrounded by Light and it always brings tears to his eyes.

He feels three presences by his side and he deduces it must be night time if his Masters are here and not taking care of Council matters. He turns his head and looks at them. In the Force, they feel tired but unharmed and that eases a weight that Obi-Wan didn't know he was carrying in his heart.

Deciding that they needed the rest, he finds a comfortable position on his bed and lets sleep claim him again.

When he wakes again, more time has passed and he blames the hooked IV on his arm for his sluggish thoughts. He finds Master Windu by his side, reading on a holopad.

"Hello, Master," his voice is scratched from disuse and his Master is quick to offer him a glass of water with a straw for him to drink. 

Master Windu is...well, he's whatever expression that his face does and looks like he's not frowning. Obi-Wan will interpret that as an almost-smile. 

"How're you feeling, Obi-Wan?"

"Tired. A little sluggish."

"That's the medicine. In a few days you'll be able to leave here and the feeling will pass." Obi-Wan nods because he knew that already. It wouldn't be his first time with a serious injury on the Halls. Sometimes, he felt as if he spent all of his time divided between the battlefields and the infirmary.

"Melida and Daan?" He can't ask the whole question, it takes too much energy but Master Windu understands him anyway.

"They signed a peace treaty and when we left, another team of Jedi were arriving. We sent word for the Agricorps too so they can start restoring their planet." Master Windu tells him. "We promised your friend Cerasi that when you woke up you'd call her."

“Master Tahl?” He asks next, because he needs to know if she will recover, if he has done all he could.

“She is well, Padawan. Recovering in her own quarters, actually. She came by to see you earlier today. I believe she will return tomorrow and you can see her if you’re awake.”

He nods, glad that Master Tahl is alright. A strange feeling overtakes Obi-Wan. It's not happiness but it makes his chest lighter, a burden he didn't know he was carrying is lifted from his shoulders and Obi-Wan shallows back a lump on his throat. He is so glad things worked out for this mission. It gives him hope that he can still change more.

"Obi-Wan?" His Master's voice is soft and that's when he feels tears running down on his cheeks.

"I'm sorry- I-"

"It's okay, Padawan," his Master says, "you can let it out. You did a good job and I'm proud of you, we all are."

Now that he has permission, it seems that his floodgates are open and Obi-Wan cries freely, all his anxieties being washed from his soul. 

Master Windu offers him a hand, and in a moment of not caring about anything more than the present, Obi-Wan allows himself to give in to his weakness. 

"Please," he says and his Master understands without him having to voice the words.

He leaves his holopad on the chair and sits on the bed with Obi-Wan, enveloping him in his arms. Obi-Wan is surrounded by strong arms and he feels protected, comforted. That strange feeling in his chest easing little by little as he lets out his tears.

At some point, he must've fallen asleep because the next he wakes up, Master Dooku is with him, holding his hand. Obi-Wan squeezes it back and turns to sleep again.

--.--

He leaves the Halls of Healing after a week of bed rest, on strict orders to take it easy for the next few days. 

He gained new scars on his back and when he arrives at his quarters, he goes to the fresher to inspect them. Obi-Wan isn’t vain by any means - Jedi value their connection to the Force and their physical capacity, not appearances - but he is pleased to see that is not as terrible as some of his old scars were. His body by the end of the Clone Wars was a map of scars in full detail. Perhaps this life will be more kind to him and not transform him into an old man too early.

Obi-Wan isn't worried about his missed classes but he does spend his time catching up with his friends (surprisingly, even Bruck was happy to see him and they spent time talking about Obi-Wan’s mission and Bruck’s new Master while they were playing hide and seek with the crechelings). His Masters dote on him and Obi-Wan feels embarrassed. He turns pink every time they touch him but he doesn't avoid contact. 

When their weekly dinner arrives, his Masters have a surprise planned for him.

"Put on civilian clothes, Padawan. You are taking us to dinner." Master Dooku tells him.

Oh, that is nice. Obi-Wan is torned between taking them to Little Keldabe or to Dex. He ends up deciding on Dex. He misses his besalisk friend even if he doesn't know Obi-Wan yet.

It's strange to see his Masters with clothes that aren't Jedi robes but he likes the change of pace for once. It's also very amusing to see them growing tense the more levels they go down on Coruscant. 

"Obi-Wan, are you sure we're going to the right place?" Master Plo asks him, a little concerned.

"Oh, Master, this is definitely the right place." He says and lets his amusement leak through his bonds. "Dex’s is the best dinner around here."

"Should we ask about how you know him?" Master Windu asks but his tone is resigned.

"You can, but I'll leave it to your imagination to guess."

He introduces himself and his Masters to the besalisk cook. He doesn't receive a hug and for a moment he misses it, the familiarity that there was between them. He doesn't let it show, instead he tells himself that he'll have plenty of time to make friends with Dex again. 

They sit and Obi-Wan forgets himself for a moment and orders without even looking at the menu. He receives four pairs of questioning eyes and blushes. 

His Masters ignore it and opt instead to order their own food.

"This is an... interesting choice of a place." Master Dooku says. Obi-Wan can't hold back his lips and he smiles, all teeth showing. 

"Is it not to your tastes, Master Dooku?" He says jokingly. 

His Master doesn't reply. 

"I promise that the food makes up for the environment, Master." Obi-Wan's having too much fun to stop himself.

When their food arrives, they eat. Obi-Wan may have issues with food but Dex's are an exception. He doesn't know how he survived on Tatooine for as long as he had without his food and then, as a ghost - he doesn't ever want to be without Dex's food ever again.

His Masters notice his appetite but they say nothing about it - they too are more focused on eating than being intrigued by his behavior. Dex's food has that power.

"Although the place is not what I expected," Master Plo comments, "the food is good."

"I'm glad you liked it."

They are eating at a more moderate pace now and conversation flows fluidly.

"The Council was impressed with your actions, Padawan." Master Windu comments.

Obi-Wan raises an eyebrow. "My actions, Master?"

"Yes. The way you conducted yourself during the mission showed great maturity. You acted as a Jedi should, helped others and let the Force guide you and ended a violent conflict that lasted for generations. That's no small deed, Obi-Wan."

"Oh. I couldn’t have done it without your help." He is disconcerted. He didn't expect to receive praise for simply helping where it was needed. "I was just following the Will of the Force, Masters."

"That you were, young one." Master Plo says. "Doesn't mean we can't feel proud of you."

"Usually, after showing this type of accomplishments on a mission, a Padawan is promoted." Master Dooku says. "But you just finished your first mission, and there's still a lot more to accomplish before you reach the rank of a Senior Padawan." 

He nods. Obi-Wan thinks that this time around he would like to not reach twenty-five and still be a Padawan but at the same time, he has much to learn from his three Masters and his Padawanship is already vastly different than his last one with Master Jinn, so maybe he wouldn’t mind to be a Padawan for many years.

He could cheat, of course. Beat Anakin’s record and be knighted before his nineteenth, but...he doesn’t feel that urge. He is finally starting to feel what a true Padawanship is - his bonds are firmly rooted in his mind, he doesn’t feel in debt with his Masters and he feels...cared for. He wouldn’t mind having that for the next decade. 

After all, he doesn’t know how the future will unravel, nor his exact feelings on the matter but he still wishes to at least find Anakin and ensure he has training. He still hasn’t decided if he’ll leave him for Master Jinn to train but if not, he knows he’s the only other option. He wasn’t the best Master for the boy but now that he has the knowledge, he knows exactly what Anakin needs and it’s a completely different approach to the Code - Jedi can be flexible in their interpretation but what Obi-Wan has in mind could be labeled as heresy.

Since he won’t have much time as a solo Knight because of the possibility of Anakin, he’ll do his best to enjoy his years as a Padawan. 

When they return to Master Dooku’s quarters, his Masters sit with him and together they rebraid his Padawan braid. They add a white and a green bead, for healing and following the Force. He feels how proud they are of him. Maybe returning to the past can be better than he thought. 

He goes to sleep that night with a smile on his face.

--.--

Obi-Wan goes on more missions with his Masters as the time passes and he grows up. 

Master Dooku couldn’t be considered a Shadow but he takes some investigative missions that makes Obi-Wan remember Quinlan’s stories about his own Shadow missions with Master Tholme. Obi-Wan tags along and learns why his Master, in another time, left the Order. They see the worse in the galaxy, the scum, the villainy, the slavery, and above all, the people who have the means but are too comfortable with things as they are to change the system. 

But his Master is nothing if not versatile. He can be an accomplished diplomat when the situation demands and he teaches Obi-Wan how to read between the lines of political dinners and how to turn the tides to their favor - sometimes by using sweet words and others by making underline threats. These missions always leave Obi-Wan with an unsettled feeling in his gut. He sees more of Count Dooku than Master Dooku in the Jedi, and he is forced to understand why so many planets joined the Confederacy of Independent Systems. 

If Obi-Wan is the Negotiator, Master Dooku is the Master of Bargains. Obi-Wan can’t imagine he learnt all of this with Grandmaster Yoda. They never fail to reach an agreement and differently from his own diplomatic missions with Master Jinn, where something always went wrong - usually because of his Master’s lack of patience or his insistence on having things done on his way - his missions alongside Master Dooku almost never go wrong and when they do, Master Dooku always has a card up his sleeve to turn things into a peaceful disagreement. 

Obi-Wan learns so much from him.

When he wants a little bit of action, he asks Master Windu for missions together, though. He knows exactly how to sniff a mystery in a mission request. Obi-Wan never imagined this side of his fellow counselor friend but it’s exciting to have field missions where he has to survive on jungles and run from angry animals. It reminds him of his own missions with Anakin. It’s refreshing to not worry about the fate of the galaxy while he’s by Master Windu’s side. 

But perhaps what he loves the most is going on Search with Master Plo. His Master doesn’t feel the call more frequently now that he has a Padawan, but when he does, if Obi-Wan is on Coruscant, he goes with him. Compared to his other Masters, his missions with Master Plo could be considered boring but there’s just something about going freely on the galaxy, looking for children that one day may be part of  the next generation of Jedi that fills his heart with bright hope. 

Just as his Master, Obi-Wan shares his love for younglings. When Master Plo realized that, he started leaving the foundlings to his care on the trip back to Coruscant - Obi-Wan is so happy when he returns from those missions. If he could have vacation days, he would spend them with Master Plo on his Search missions. 

Obi-Wan continues to train as a Healer - although he knows that he’ll never be as good as Bant, he thinks his knowledge is progressing steadily. His Masters try to help him when he is studying for exams but neither of them knows a thing about healing. It’s fun though. Master Dooku is especially amusing to watch since he refuses to be anything but the best in whatever subject he’s learning and seeing him frowning over Obi-Wan’s textbooks and holopads is entertaining. 

He continues to draw attention to himself whenever he goes to the training sales. He can hear Jedi whispering about him and his saber. Sometimes he hears the most absurd theories about his lightsaber color (this week is about how Master Windu’s teaching him Vaapad turned him to the Darkside).

Obi-Wan listens just because he likes to keep up with rumors and also when he’s dining with his Masters, he can tell them about it (they like to pretend to be serious counselors but deep down they all enjoy a good gossip just like any other Jedi). 

On his second time teaching his Masters how to hide in the Force, Obi-Wan spends the better part of the lesson arguing with Master Windu about the Code. He is aware that, if he were a counselor, his opinions would be more than heretical - he would probably be expelled by his views. Funny to think that in that future, it was Master Yoda himself who gave him the mission to learn how to retain his conscience after death, one of the most conservative Masters in the Order.

“I think that you’re just trying to find an excuse to not let me choose where our next dinner will be, Master,” Obi-Wan says, enjoying a little too much the look Master Windu gives him. 

He is sure, by the way his eyes twitch almost imperceptibly, that his Master is frustrated with his own lack of progress.

“One day Padawan…”

“Yes, I know, I’ll tell you all about my secrets.” He says, mirth in his face, “but for now, I’ll be satisfied with dinner. Shall we?”

Master Plo is more amused than anything. Master Dooku is still intrigued but he isn't as frustrated as Master Windu about Obi-Wan’s lessons. Obi-Wan thinks he’s been generous, all things considered. When he had to learn, he had to first contact Master Jinn's ghost - and he spent years trying to do just that. Then he had to translate his former Master’s cryptic words into actual basic (more years passed). After that, when he finally understood, he had to put the theory into actual practical knowledge (he managed it by the end of his life), and that taught him more than the different ways his connection to the Force could take.

It taught him patience. It taught him how to be at peace.

So when he sees Master Windu complaining, he feels...a little sorry for him, because Obi-Wan used to be just like that when he started, and now, looking back at it, if he just had been patient, he would have overcome his struggles faster and his training wouldn’t have taken that long to complete.

“All right Padawan,” he’s brought back to the present by Master Dooku’s voice, “where shall you take us tonight?”

Obi-Wan smiles sweetly at him. He is dying for mandalorian food - and he knows just the place to get it.

Once again, his Masters are tense during their way there. It’s a dangerous part of the district for Jedi. Little Keldabe is where a few mandalorians established themselves in Coruscant. Very few that aren’t mandalorians, bounty hunters or actual inhabitants of the district dare to venture through the place. Even the Coruscant Guard prefers to leave the place to its own rules of justice than to interfere. 

Obi-Wan doesn’t put on civilian clothes and his Masters had followed his lead. Suffice to say, four Jedi walking to the heart of a mandalorian district causes a commotion. Obi-Wan can feel the Force tensing around him. 

He doesn’t care - they won’t harm him nor his Masters. He has two goals by coming here as a Jedi. One, the most important at the moment, is to get food. The second, and this will take a while to fulfill, is to make friends with the community. 

He used to come to this part of Coruscant a lot after his mission protecting Satine, but he always came as a civilian. It took a while but he made nice friends here. He gained a lot of contacts too - during the war, more than once he relied on his bounty hunter’s network to find separatist information.

Obi-Wan thinks that he should have come here as a Jedi in his other life - maybe that future could have been better. 

Now, when he knows his mission to Mandalore is approaching, he has to reestablish his old network, make friends among those people and at the same time, introduce his Masters to this new view of the galaxy: that the Jedi and mandalorians don’t have to see each other as enemies. 

He directs them to an unassuming establishment, entering and ignoring the looks he attracts. Obi-Wan goes directly to the cashier.

“Su cuy'gar. Liser gar dinuir ni te menu? ” The surprise on the woman attending is enough to convince Obi-Wan that he made the right choice to come here.

“'lek. ”

“Vor entye, ” he says. 

He sits on the corner and his Masters reluctantly join him.

“You know Mandalorian?” Master Windu asks after checking on the Force for threats.

“It’s Mando’a , and yes, I know the language.” He answers. “Do you want me to translate the menu or do you prefer me to order for you?”

“I’d like to know what my options are, Padawan.” 

“Alright.” 

He spends the next minutes explaining the food options and saying what he recommends - something more bland, without a lot of spice would be ideal for them to start.

Obi-Wan calls the waiter after and orders in Mando’a . He’s enjoying the experience more than he thought he would, having missed the language he spent the better part of the Clone Wars speaking with his men.

He feels the doubt coming from his bonds but he opts to not say anything. Instead, Obi-Wan decides to ask for their opinions after they’ve eaten.

“It’s very different from what I’m used to.” Master Plo says. “I don’t know how you manage to eat that much spice, Padawan.”

“Practice, Master.” He says but doesn’t elaborate. Obi-Wan had barely said a word after his order arrived, too hungry to care that he’s not being polite. 

Mandalorian food is the best. 

Their dinner is short, his Masters are too much on high alert for danger to enjoy it properly. As it is, Obi-Wan counts their trip here as a win. There will be plenty more opportunities to come here and explore the other shops. 

Obi-Wan goes to pay and he seizes the moment to chat with the attendant. He asks for her name and compliments the food. She’s emanating confusion through the Force but the hostile feelings he felt from when he arrived are mostly gone. That is good progress.

-–.--

When they arrive later at the Temple, Obi-Wan is convinced to play cards with his Masters. It’s Master Plo’s turn to choose and he enters them in a game of sabacc. Obi-Wan is shocked.

Master Plo only chuckles. 

“Master Plo, I didn’t know you played sabacc.”

“Young one, there’s a lot of things you don’t know about me.” He says, enigmatic.

Obi-Wan is still in disbelief as he accepts his cards. 

“You know how to play, don’t you?” 

“Yes, Master Windu.” Obi-Wan honed his skills in sabacc in Tatooine. He is not proud to say that he sometimes had the displeasure of playing against hutts and toydarians, both species impossible to read in the Force. 

He is not looking for a victory here though. He only plays to win at chess. Sabacc with his Masters turn into them betting on Council duties and lightsaber lessons. Obi-Wan bets on access to Masters’ sections on the Archives and more of his lessons about the Force. 

The night ends with Obi-Wan losing alongside Master Dooku and Master Plo. Master Windu would deny it but Obi-Wan knows he’s smug about his victory. 

It’s a good night and Obi-Wan isn’t ready yet to leave their company, and he doesn’t have to sleep early because tomorrow is his day off, so he suggests a holomovie. 

“What should we watch?” Master Windu asks them.

“I don’t have a preference.” Obi-Wan says. He just wants their company, whatever they watch is irrelevant to him.

“Hmm , why not some classic?” Master Dooku asks.

“No,” Master Windu says firmly, “I want to watch it, not sleep in the first ten minutes, Yan.”

“Why not see the Downtown Coruscant?” Master Plo asks. “It’s a period holodrama but I hear it has a good plot and the actors are really good.”

“Alright.” He turns to Obi-Wan and says, “bring us a blanket, Obi-Wan.”

His confusion must show on his face because Master Plo clarifies, “it’s a movie night, without blankets and snacks it’s not done right.” 

“Oh.” 

Master Dooku is already in the kitchen looking for snacks and juices. Obi-Wan goes to Master Windu’s bedroom to retrieve a blanket. When they are all comfortable, Master Windu starts it. 

It’s fascinating. Obi-Wan is hooked after the first twenty minutes. He’s leaning his body on Master Windu and his eyes don’t stray from the screen even for a second. He feels gentle fingers playing with his hair and his body relaxes more. 

Later, when Obi-Wan wished a goodnight to Master Dooku and Master Plo, he thinks that he doesn’t remember when was the last time he had some lineage time with Anakin or Ahsoka. He vows that when he finds Anakin, he’ll make time for them to spend just playing cards or watching silly holos. Just enjoying each other’s company.

“What’s that smile on for?” Master Windu interrupts his thoughts. They are cleaning the living room and washing dishes before going to bed.

“I...” Obi-Wan doesn’t have a name yet for the feeling on his chest but he knows it makes him warm. “I think I’m happy, Master.”

Master Windu pauses his chore to look at him. Obi-Wan feels his signature brushing against his own and he doesn’t panic or recoils. He feels...safe.

His Master’s eyes are kind and Obi-Wan wants to hug him. 

His thoughts must have leaked through his shields because in the next moment, Master Windu is in front of him and opening his arms. 

It’s the best hug Obi-Wan could ever ask for.

--.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Obi-Wan decides it’s time for him to start looking for the Darksaber. He is well on his way to become a Senior Padawan and the missions he’s allowed to go now can be more...exciting. In the Senate, Palpatine is quickly gaining power and influence. Obi-Wan dreads the confrontation he will have with the Sith Lord. 

If it was up to him, he would face him now, consequences be damned, but he knows that by this time Palpatine is still training in secret his apprentice, Maul, and he has a very much alive Sith Master somewhere around the galaxy.

If Palpatine was an opponent too strong for even Master Yoda, Obi-Wan can’t even begin to imagine how dangerous his Sith Master is. Worse, he doesn’t know his species, his age, or even in what part of the galaxy he could possibly be. 

Going to Mandalore for now is a step gained in the chess board game he is playing against the Sith. He has to be careful to not reveal himself either, making his moves in the shadows to avoid drawing attention to himself. He doesn’t want a Sith’s interest in him - more so because he remembers about the rumors reaching Tatooine during the Empire that experiments were made with Force-sensitive children. 

He knows that these were more than mere rumors. Sith alchemy is not taught in Padawan’s classes but Obi-Wan accessed the Archives with his Masters' codes. There is a lot about the subject and all of it makes Obi-Wan sick. With that, he knows for certain that Sidious learned it from his Master and he can’t imagine what they would do to him if he was captured and the truth of his life was revealed. 

In one of their dinner nights, Obi-Wan decides to propose the mission. It’s time - he checked the requests for missions that arrived through the Senate and the governor of Galidraan requested a team of Knights to be sent there to stop a massacre of civilians. Banthashit was it, Obi-Wan knew. 

He didn’t know much about the mission itself but he was aware that it had been a turning point in the relations with the Order and the mandalorians - after that, they went from ignoring each other to once again enemies. The New Mandalorians had risen to power after that and around the same time Master Dooku had left the Order (not officially on the records though, but he did start taking missions and being away from the Temple for months, even years at times, the last one being after Master Jinn had died) - Obi-Wan suspected he had gone on that mission, the timing was too close for the events to not be related.

Thinking more about it, it was probably the reason why Jango had allied himself with Darth Tyranus, Count Dooku, later in his life in a plot to destroy the entire Jedi Order. 

Obi-Wan couldn’t have known what happened on Galidraan but the Force whispered to him that it was important enough that he couldn’t afford to ignore it. 

He suspected it was one shatterpoint that would cause Master Windu a migraine.

Waiting for his Masters to finish eating, Obi-Wan thinks carefully about what he is going to say to convince them of the importance of this mission. 

“What’s in your mind, Padawan?” Master Dooku breaks the silence.

“We should take a mission together, Masters.” 

“It’s been a while since our last one, hasn’t it?” Master Plo says. “What do you have in mind?”

“Galidraan.” 

“Galidraan? Obi-Wan, have you been reading the Council's paperwork again?” Master Windu has a frown on and a tug of disappointment flows through his bond with him.

“Yes, but you knew that already, Master. It’s not like I go around the Temple telling everyone about it. I can keep a secret.”

His Masters don’t even try to hide their exasperation with him. 

“You’re incorrigible and we’ll talk more about this later.” Master Dooku says and Obi-Wan knows he’ll have extra duties for months to come. “Now tell us why do you want us to go to Thanium sector when it was requested a team of Knights to lead the mission.”

“It’s a trap.” Obi-Wan answers directly. 

“We’re going to need more if you wish to convince us, Padawan.”

“I have motives to believe that the request sent to us by the Senate has ulterior motives.” He says calmly. “The Force is very insistent that I go there. I researched about it and it is a suspicious request. The governor of Galidraan has allied himself to the Kyr'tsad. ”

“Who are they?” Master Plo asks. 

“The Kyr'tsad, or the Death Watch in basic, is a terrorist group. They used to be mandalorians but they were considered too extremists to be part of the Haat Mando'ade .” Obi-Wan pauses and gathers his thoughts. He has to remember that, apart from being aware that he knows the language and likes the food, his Masters don’t know that he is practically an expert in mandalorian culture by this point. “Let me explain: there are three political factions in Mandalore currently, Masters. The New Mandalorians, the Haat Mando'ade or the True Mandalorians and the Kyr'tsad.

“The New Mandalorians are still new and they have little power yet. They are pacifists and believe that mandalorians should leave behind their weapons, their beskar'gam, language and warrior culture behind.

“The Kyr'tsad are the opposite, they think Mandalore should return to their conqueror days and begin a new empire. They kidnap children and brainwash them to fight for their cause. Their leader is a man named Pre Vizsla and if you search for the governor of Galidraan, you’ll see that he has ties with him.

“The last political group is the Haat Mando'ade . They believe in the Supercommando Codex . It’s similar to our own Code, actually. A guideline for mandalorians to act with honor. They are mostly bounty hunters but they have families and they feel strongly about child care.”

Obi-Wan pauses, letting the background information sink in. Then, he presents his suspicions:

“When I read the mission request, I noticed that they asked specifically for a team of Knights to stop a massacre. What massacre, I asked myself? The governor had already contracted the services of the Haat Mando'ade to do the job, so why was he requesting Jedi help?”

“And you said he is allied with the terrorist faction?” Master Dooku asked.

“Yes, Master.” Obi-Wan says. “I thought it strange, because mandalorian bounty hunters are very effective in dealing with problems.”

At some point during his explanation, Master Windu had gotten a holopad and now he was reading the mission request himself.

“Do you think the Senate has overlooked the request before sending it to us?” He asked Master Dooku.

“It is possible and has occurred in the past.”

Obi-Wan knew exactly who had helped to pass along that request to the Order, but he chooses to keep quiet for now. One battle per time and he will win the war.

“Obi-Wan,” Master Plo says after getting the holopad from Master Windu and making a quick reading, “what exactly are you proposing us to do?”

“I think we have no other option but to fulfill the mission, since we are bound to the Senate, in any case. What I’m proposing is that we do it on our own terms.” He says, not letting the displeasure of his opinion about the Senate affect his focus. “We don’t take a team of Knights there - it’ll pass the wrong message. With just us four, we can actually investigate the situation and if necessary, take actions. It’s a solid strategy.”  

“You said the Force was being adamant with you?” Master Windu asks.

“I’ve never seen a shatterpoint Master, but I feel that this mission is one of them.” 

His Master’s eyes twitch. “That it is.”

“Alright Padawan. We’ll discuss it more and then decide if we’ll take the mission.” Master Dooku tells him and Obi-Wan recognizes he’s being dismissed to bed. “You presented your case well, Obi-Wan.”

Coming from Master Dooku, it is high praise. 

“Thank you Master.” He bows and leaves them to discuss the matter.

Now, Obi-Wan has done all he could, he has to trust in the Force that it wasn’t in vain.

--.--

While he waits for his Masters to decide what they will do, Obi-Wan trains. 

He is daily at the dojos, determined to master his Masters forms. Surprisingly, Vaapad comes more naturally to him than he thought it would. Obi-Wan doesn’t want to think about what that says about him - his other life, full of negative emotions, trials and encounters with the Darkside definitely left a profound mark in his spirit that allows him to tread between the Light and the Dark in balance and conduct his emotions in an aggressive way. 

Every time he uses it, he hears murmurs of other Masters and Knights. Combined with his lightsaber color, Obi-Wan is labeled (unofficially) as the next one to Fall. They all think of him as a tickling bomb of emotions (they aren’t exactly wrong about it) and he is treated carefully.

His friends know the truth though and remain faithfully by his side (Obi-Wan doesn’t deserve them).

Djem So is easier to learn - he already knew it because of Anakin, since he had to learn it at first to teach it to his Padawan. He is not as good as his former Padawan was but he is confident he’ll master it. 

Makashi is difficult but Obi-Wan has the advantage of having been building his stamina in the last few years of his apprenticeship through his practice of his own preferred form, Soresu. Makashi is about facing an opponent that uses a lightsaber - Obi-Wan has to master this form if he wants any chance of facing Sidious. He is more comfortable now with dueling Master Dooku and he uses every opportunity to improve when it’s his Master turn to have a go with him at the training sales.

–.--

He remembers the first time he tried to fight against his Master and he’s embarrassed to say it wasn’t one of his best moments. 

Master Dooku had been correcting his form as usual, without engaging him or getting too close. Obi-Wan was feeling frustrated with it because he knew - they both did - that the only way to perfect his instance would be by sparring and building muscle memory from it. But he was still afraid of facing his Master, so much that he always felt unbalanced and shaken after training with him at the dojos. 

No matter how much he meditated before and after, he usually was plagued by memories in his dreams when he stayed with Master Dooku, to the point where he was aware that Master Windu and Master Plo had switched their schedule with him so that after his week with Master Dooku was over, he would go to Master Plo, instead of Master Windu.

But on that day Obi-Wan was disappointed in himself, for his lack of progress, his lack of balance, his fears, for not being able to will them away as a Jedi Master would. So, even though he knew it was a terrible idea, he let his emotions get the better of him. 

Master Dooku was demonstrating, again, the correct position and Obi-Wan had had enough . He raised his lightsaber towards his Master, in a Makashi opening and waited. His face remained a mask of serenity and he closed off his bonds to not leak his inner turmoil and anxiety to any of his Masters accidentally.  

His Master paused and raised an eyebrow to Obi-Wan. He didn’t ask if he was alright, if he was sure, but Obi-Wan did see concern in his eyes. He ignored it. He had to face him, or else he would be stuck in this eternal limbo of fear and dread and would never just get over it .

When Master Dooku hesitantly raised his own lightsaber in challenge, Obi-Wan didn’t give him time to think, he attacked.

Brutally, without mercy, and relentlessly. 

He used what he had learned so far but he also mixed his own knowledge into the fight. Obi-Wan didn’t have the luxury of a full body strength yet so he had to compensate with his quick wit and his experience to win this, to overcome his feelings, and to finally have some measure of peace from his nightmares.

Master Dooku was, as he expected, a formidable opponent. He did grow up under Master Yoda’s training and no one in the Order fought like the green troll. Although Obi-Wan was fast and skilled, he was nowhere near Master Dooku’s level. 

As in the Clone Wars, Master Dooku met him blow for blow, with fancy moves, provoking and daring. He kept the cool, detached calm expression on his face, making Obi-Wan more and more desperate to win. 

It was clear that he wouldn’t. 

Obi-Wan switched forms then, to his Soresu, and regained some balance from his early outburst. He swore to himself he would endure. He wouldn’t lose to this man in front of him. Not again.

Dooku was forced to switch too, going from defensive to offensive with grace, and that’s when Obi-Wan was assaulted by a flashback, or perhaps it was a memory, he couldn’t distinguish one from the other.

When he blinked again, he saw only Count Dooku . His red bleeding blade, his black clothes, and his Sith eyes, cruel and evil, laughing at him, mocking Obi-Wan’s pitiful attempts to deter him.

Obi-Wan lost all sense of the present then. Suddenly he was General Kenobi, and he had to fight this enemy at all costs. 

He called and the Force obeyed his will, and he used it to augment his form, launching himself in a series of attacks, breaking his Soresu for a Djem So, surprising his enemy, putting all of his focus on being fast to not give time for a counter-attack coming from the Count. He landed blow after blow, a perfect mirror of Anakin, and he found himself disarming him and with his own lightsaber pointing it back at the Count’s neck.

Obi-Wan was hardly breathing. He wasn’t seeing anything but the man who had helped destroy the Republic, who betrayed the Order and everything that was dear to him. 

“Obi-Wan.” Someone called him. He didn’t dare to turn his head, to let his eyes stray from the Sith and allow him to escape again.

“ Padawan ,” the voice insisted, worried, “calm down.”

A hand laid on his shoulder, carefully. 

His reaction was instantly, he turned to kill whoever was trying to stop him from fulfilling his duty. 

He was expecting to see Ventress or even Grievous-

Mace. 

His eyes widened. What was Mace doing here? Where was Anakin? 

“Stand down, Padawan.” His voice was hard, strained, as if it pained him to say those words.

Obi-Wan blinked, then he looked around himself.

The training dojos. He was at the Temple. There were other Jedi there, looking over, expressions concerned. Even Master Yoda was there, ears dropped, in a sad expression Obi-Wan was intimately familiar with the more time the war lasted on.

He didn’t understand, didn’t they see? Count Dooku was there, at the Temple! They had to stop him!

What was wrong with them? Why weren’t they moving?

“Padawan, do you know where you are?” Mace asked, looking cautious with a lightsaber pointed at his face.

Of course Obi-Wan knew where he was. He was at the Temple, he was a General, there was a war-

Oh , Mace called him Padawan, didn’t he?

This wasn’t the Clone Wars. He was in the past. There was no threat.

Obi-Wan turned off his saber, defeated. He would be in big trouble for this, wouldn’t he.

When Master Windu took his lightsaber from his hand carefully, Obi-Wan didn’t fight him back. He stayed still, eyes downcast to the floor. His heart beating too fast, his breaths shallow. To his mortification, he felt tears threatening to fall. 

“I’m sorry, Masters.” He said, and it pained every cell of his body to address Dooku as his Master in that moment. “May I be excused?” 

“I think not Padawan, but you may come with us.” Master Windu said, voice gentle.

He nodded and followed them out of the dojos, where gossip would certainly spread to the entire Temple until dinner time.

They went to Master Windu’s quarters, and Obi-Wan desperately wished for solitude. When they arrived, Master Dooku made them tea. Obi-Wan let the cup warm his hands but he didn’t drink it, and didn't think he would bear to stomach it in this state.  

“Will you talk to us, Padawan?” Master Windu sounded concerned but Obi-Wan still couldn’t force himself to meet their eyes.

He shook his head, “I’m sorry.”

“You know there’ll be consequences,” his Master said, his voice strangely calm for such a concerning situation, “we want to help you but if you don’t talk to us, your training at the dojos will have to take a break indefinitely.”

“I know, Master.” He wouldn’t cry in front of them. “May I go now?”

“Yes, Obi-Wan. But you’re not allowed to leave this apartment before we talk, understand?”

Obi-Wan nodded and vanished to his room. He washed himself in the fresher but he avoided them until he couldn’t. He tried to meditate, to connect himself to the Force, all in vain. His eyes were red, as if he had a breakdown but Obi-Wan remained firm in not spilling any tears because of his foolish mistake.

At dinner, he was feeling no less agitated than before and he knew from experience that if he didn’t exhaust himself soon, he would be like this for days. 

Master Dooku, his favorite person in the galaxy at the moment, was still there and he gestured for him to sit on the floor with him. Great. Meditation. He didn’t say a word but he sat down and tried to calm himself. It felt like he was Force deprived, his connection out of his grasp. 

His Master gently took hold of him and guided him. Obi-Wan knew it was pointless to resist and let himself be pulled along, he brought down some walls in his bond to allow communication with him. Feeling the Force respond to him again was a relief. 

I am sorry, Obi-Wan, his Master said.

His confusion was clear in the Force.

I shouldn’t let you attempt to spar with me , he continued. I knew you’ve been avoiding it for a reason and I should have stopped you.

It wasn’t your fault, Master. I was the one who-

No , he said firmly, I am your Master and it is my responsibility to ensure your well-being. I failed you, Padawan. I hope one day you may be able to forgive my mistake .

I…I forgive you, Master , Obi-Wan said lightly, still a little surprised that Master Dooku would ask for forgiveness. This man was so different from his Grandmaster in his past life, that Obi-Wan realized his own prejudices against him were unfounded and unfair. His Master had been nothing but attentive and respectful of his boundaries. He tried his best for Obi-Wan and supported him even with his limited knowledge of the big picture. I’m sorry too, I was impatient with my lack of progress and let my feelings get the better of me. I…also think I judged you too harshly .

He didn’t elaborate but Master Dooku didn’t ask for clarification. Obi-Wan wanted to fight a person that no longer existed instead of letting his memories bury themselves and be forgotten.

It’s all behind us , Padawan. He told him. I hope we can still train together, but let’s pace ourselves next time. I would hate for Plo to arrive from his mission and reprimand Mace and I for not taking care of you .

Obi-Wan projected his tentative smile at him. Master Plo would definitely be angry at them if he thought they had done something to upset his Padawan. 

I agree, Master. I would hate to see you grumpy with extra Council assignments.   

I do not get grumpy, Padawan . He retorted, somewhat amused. I just prefer to avoid meaningless tasks if possible .

When they finished their meditation, Obi-Wan didn’t feel suffocated anymore. His memories were still there but for the first time, he felt as if he had conquered them. It would be difficult to spar with Master Dooku again but he had a good feeling about it, that he would be able to stay more anchored to reality and distinguish both men from each other.

Master Windu is content with their progress after that. He returns Obi-Wan’s lightsaber but makes a point to be present for their spars. The first few times, Obi-Wan slips a little, becoming more aggressive but when Master Windu tugs at his bond to ground him, he stops and remembers where he is, with who. Then, they start again, until he is tired.

His Masters make a point to buy Dex’s food or even mandalorian food after so that Obi-Wan is distracted from his thoughts and can focus on here and now. Soon, his brain starts to associate sparring with Master Dooku with takeout food. It’s a good association, he’d say. 

He doesn’t dread it anymore, Master Windu doesn’t need to chaperone them any longer and sometimes, when they’re not too tired, Master Dooku will actually take him to Little Keldabe to eat. Obi-Wan enjoys going there even if he feels his Master’s discomfort about it, because he’s making friends there and he can actually speak the language he loves without minding his audience.

Master Dooku makes a point to always send him through the bond his pride, and Obi-Wan isn’t shy to answer with a small smile of his own.

–.--

When Obi-Wan is sleepless - which isn’t often lately (and he is thankful for not having his insomnia following him in this life) he escapes from his bedroom and goes to a private dojo to rid himself of the nervous energy. He uses these moments to open himself fully to the Force, letting his body become an almost perfect vessel for it to guide his movements. 

After a few first times doing that, he became aware that he is...well, he is not sure yet about what he is doing, exactly, but he is almost sure he is creating something new, something unique . He is using all the katas he has learned and is combining them together in a new lightsaber form. 

For now, it’s still a little rough and the pieces aren’t quite fitting together as they should but Obi-Wan feels in the Force around him the air of possibilities. He is on the right path to unite Makashi, Vaapad and Soresu in a style that will allow him to duel Force-users by channeling his emotions and protect himself and others while maintaining his instance for a long time. 

He thinks that if he creates it, his oddness among his fellow Jedi will reach a new level. As a plus, he’s sure his Masters and friends will be proud of him.

Tonight, Obi-Wan was woken up because of his dreams. He dreamt of Sidious and Maul as chess players pulling strings on the Kyr'tsad , laughing while Obi-Wan watched, helpless as Mandalore burned and the Darksaber was used to kill and destroy.

He couldn’t fall asleep after that. 

He is surprised to see Master Plo in the kitchen, a cup of tea in his hands, deep in thought. 

“Are you alright, Master?”

“Ah, Padawan, couldn’t sleep too?”

“No, I had a…bad dream.” He cringes at his choice of words and it doesn't help that his voice is cracking (Force, he hates being a teenager again), but his Master doesn’t notice.

“Do you want to talk about it?”

“No, it was just a nightmare.” He says. “What about you?”

“I am thinking about what you said about Galidraan.” Master Plo drinks from his tea again. “We still haven’t decided what to do about it but it made me question how many other mission requests we receive are to use the Jedi as pawns.”

Obi-Wan doesn’t have an answer for that. With the Sith pulling their strings, it could be a lot - and Obi-Wan doesn’t want to think about that.

“But enough of my brooding,” Master Plo says, “what do you do when you can’t fall asleep? I know you sneak from our quarters, young one.”

Obi-Wan blushes. No need to lie now. “I usually go to the dojos to train.”

“ Hmm . That’s a good way to calm down. Shall we go there?”

“What- Really?”

“Of course. I won’t sleep anytime soon and I think it’ll do us both good to spend some energy.”   

They grab their lightsabers and go.

There are a few Jedi using the dojos and they find an empty place to go through their katas. 

His Master isn’t stretching, instead he is watching him intently. 

“Would you like to learn a new technique, Obi-Wan?” 

“What technique, Master Plo?” He is curious.

“It’ll be our secret if you agree to learn it because it’s forbidden.” Oh , if that isn’t interesting he doesn’t know what is. “I’d teach you how to throw Force Lightning.”

“What?”

“It’s different from a Sith Lightning. For starters, its color is not blue nor white. It can be yellow, orange or green and it’s difficult to learn the balance to produce it since you have to use strong emotions to be able to cast lightning. It also requires control because you can seriously harm yourself and others when using the technique.”

Wow . Obi-Wan is dumbstruck. He wasn't aware that Master Plo could use Force Lightning - the more time he spends with his Masters, the more secrets he unravels about them.

“Is it tiring?”

“The first few times? Yes, but with practice, it becomes easier to channel the Force that way. However, I would advise against using it at the beginning of a battle you know it’ll be long.”

Ah, so that’s why the Wolf Pack was so tight lipped about their General. He imagines it wasn’t a thing Master Plo used lightly.

“I want to learn it, Master.” Because, at this point in his life, Obi-Wan will do just about anything to have a chance against the Sith - he’s aware of his fear but after the annihilation of the Jedi, he wants to know who wouldn’t live in constant fear of seeing the genocide of billions upon billions of sentient lives again, if they knew they had a second chance to prevent it and failing would mean losing everything.

Master Plo nods as if he already expected this answer. 

“Well then, let’s find a private place to practice, Padawan.”

--.--

The Council allows them to investigate. Finally .

Obi-Wan tries to not show his impatience but he can feel his Masters' amusement through the bonds. He packs and prays to the Force or whatever gods are out there that he can help prevent the tragedy of Galidraan before it happens and that, hopefully, the creation of the clone army is avoided.

He can't train to cast Lightning inside their ship but he spends a lot of time meditating with Master Plo to be able to when they have space to practice. When he asks why, his Master tells him that to make Lightning like this, you have to be in the right frame of mind or else the risk of Falling is high.

So Obi-Wan meditates more than he ever did in this life.

Eventually, Master Dooku and Master Windu join them.

"Emerald Lighting, Plo? Really?" Master Windu asks when he discovers why Obi-Wan is spending his days deeply immersed in the Force. 

Ah, so that's the name of it. It's better than just Lightning or something with Sith on it.

"I think Obi-Wan has the potential to do it." It warms something in his chest to hear Master Plo's speaking of his faith in him. "He is already deeply attuned to the Light and he doesn't have trouble meditating. Besides, I have a feeling that he'll succeed." 

Obi-Wan can see the frown intensifying. 

"It's forbidden to teach it," Master Windu says instead of agreeing, "and you only studied it because the High Council approved. It was an exception."

"It was," Master Plo replies, "and I've decided to pass along the technique to my Padawan so he can continue what I initiated."

By this point, Obi-Wan has already given up the pretense of meditating and is fully paying attention to the conversation happening. He exchanges a look with Master Dooku, who looks…well, his Master isn't the most expressive human but Obi-Wan learned how to read him well after a few years of training under him. He is pretty sure his Master is enjoying seeing the debate (he secretly loves a heated discussion).

Do you think they'd notice if we make tea to watch? He asks him through the bond.

His Master smiles sharply. 

Obi-Wan goes to make tea.

Master Dooku leaves his side of the bond open so he can listen to the conversation. It's more bickering than anything but he is still amused. That is a side of his Masters that never fails to bring a small curl of lips in his face.

When he finishes and returns, they are still listing the possible outcomes of not informing the High Council about this new development in Obi-Wan's training.

What about you, Master? He asks.

Master Dooku raises an eyebrow at him.

Don't you have opinions about me learning Emerald Lighting? 

Oh, I have, he says, but mostly that you should have started learning earlier.

Why?

Because you are a prodigy, Obi-Wan, and shouldn't be limited by what the Council deems to be acceptable to teach.

Obi-Wan has concerns about the implications of that. It reminds him too much of a Master that once chose to leave the Jedi Order because of his disagreements with the Order's teachings. Some of his feelings must cross through Master Dooku because he explains:

There are rules to be followed, Padawan, he tells him, but a Master should be able to judge if the student is ready for more and how much is more. I've never met anyone so shredded in Light as you are, Obi-Wan. It doesn't mean that the risk of you Falling doesn't exist, but I firmly believe that you can learn it and use it for the greater good. Not only Emerald Lighting, but a lot of other Force techniques. I want you to become the best version of yourself, it's what every Master hopes to achieve before they let go of their Padawans.

Oh, that's…

Words fail Obi-Wan, and he only sends his thankfulness-happiness-determination to Master Dooku. He knows his Master will understand.

--.--

They review their plan. Many times. But as his dear Commander Cody used to say, no plan ever survives the first encounter with the enemy.

What they find when they land is a calmness that doesn't feel right.

Obi-Wan expands his awareness through the field, trying to gauge more but he feels they just walked into a trap.

I have a bad feeling about this, Masters. 

He feels their agreement but they can't do anything about it now. The only path for them is forward and so they scout the area. Not hiding but not taking any chances either.

Obi-Wan has little more than a bad feeling about this. 

It doesn't help that beskar'gam muffles the Force and is difficult to sense anyone approaching. That's why they are taken by surprise when a group of verde surrounds them. Obi-Wan is quick to look for their armor painting. Who are they? The Kyr'tsad or the Haat Mando'ade?

Although the Force warns him, he doesn't feel threatened or that his life is in immediate danger. Good. Tha means these are the mandalorians they are looking for. 

He doesn't fight the blasters that are pointed to his head and ends up with heavy cuffs of beskar iron that make his Jedi abilities useless. His Masters follow his lead and beside him, they are cuffed without resisting, their lightsabers taken from them. The feeling passing through their bonds is that letting themselves be captured could be used to their advantage in a negotiation later - a moment later, Obi-Wan can't feel them anymore in his mind.

They are taken from there to some place - Obi-Wan would judge it as some kind of fortress. Obi-Wan can't count the number of verde in there, but he knows they are many. They pass through them, none of them without their buy’ce off making it impossible to know their emotions, and are thrown into a cell. 

As far as prisons go, this one is nice, judging by the cleaness. 

His connection to the Force is muffled but he knows it's worse for his Masters. He can feel their uneasy feelings leaking through the Force. Obi-Wan wonders if it's their first time being cut off from the Force. It is not a good sensation and his own first time was filled with panic (it didn't help that he was being tortured too at the time). 

Master Dooku seems to be handling it better, it doesn't come as a surprise to Obi-Wan, considering his previous missions with his Master, the people they dealt with, that he had had experience with Force-suppressants before Obi-Wan became his Padawan.

He remains calm now, steady. He spent so much time captured and being tortured during the Clone Wars that he learned his way around these kinds of cuffs. It's not the worst he had ever faced. 

No, the worst was being hanged in the middle of nowhere, without water or food, deprived from the Force and with a Sith mask on his face, torturing him, forcing him to relieve his worse nightmares and twisting them with the Darkside. Knowing that nobody would come looking for him, with the Jedi being stretched thin across the galaxy, he was declared dead and Ventress had left him behind, his madness his only constant companion.

But this ? This is a child's play. He actually enjoys being cuffed like this.

(He doesn't mention beforehand that one of the applications of being able to become part of the Force is to manage to still use the Force even though being technically deprived of it. He would know, since that's very similar to how he escaped Ventress that time).

He waits, of course, because it won't do anything good to them if he escapes now. He sincerely missed this, springing the trap. He and Anakin did it all the time. With his Masters, they rarely found themselves in a situation that required being captured. The adrenaline that involves these kind of situations is comforting (and Obi-Wan is totally aware that that's not how normal Jedi should feel and that maybe, through his years as a Master himself, he became somewhat of an adrenaline junkie - not healthy but he is leaving that for his mind healer to help him with in the future).

They are left alone for a few moments in one of the cells, before the Mand’alor - and Obi-Wan hopes he won't hear Cody's voice through the helmet because he is not ready to confront that part of his past life yet - opens the door and stops in front of them. 

"What are you doing here, Jetti? " Obi-Wan doesn't recognize the voice. Thank the Force.

"We are investigating a petition sent to the Senate by the governor of Galidraan." Master Dooku replies. Of the three, he looks the more composed one. He is also following Obi-Wan's advice to be direct and not hide anything, as the quickest way of gaining their trust. "He claims the people here were being massacred by a group of bounty hunters and requested a team of Jedi Knights to deal with it."

He doesn't need to elaborate what deal with it means, nor who the bounty hunters are.

Obi-Wan feels the tension in the room escalating.

"There is no massacre, Jetti ." The Mand'alor spats out. "Your information is wrong."

Master Dooku nods slowly. "Indeed." He says diplomatically. "We found it odd that a group of bounty hunters would shed blood without a good reason."

"Then why are you here?"

"To investigate, of course. A request was made to the Jedi Order, but instead of a team of Knights, we four came to verify what was really happening." Master Dooku is calm and his face is a mask of serenity. "It is our hope that we can clarify the situation and correct any misgivings if there are any." 

"We would appreciate it if you could tell us what is happening here." Master Windu says, and he is not the authoritative figure that is the Head of the Order here, no, he is a Jedi Master doing his job and asking, instead of demanding (or frowning them into submission, as Obi-Wan learned he usually does).

A minute passes and Obi-Wan is starting to feel that the Mand'alor won't be of any help to them.

He hears a faint noise coming from the buy’ce and then two others verde join them on the cell. They carry the symbol of the Mand'alor and their armors are painted green and blue for duty and reliability.

"How can we know that you aren't planning to ally yourselves with the governor?" The Mand'alor insists. "You Jetti don't care about matters outside the Core."

Obi-Wan decides to answer this time. The Force is nudging him to speak and so he will. 

"You are right, Mand'alor ," Obi-Wan feels their surprise at being recognized as the leader of the Haat Mando'ade , "and for a long time we have been neglecting the better part of the galaxy and became tools for politicians." 

He doesn't feel the bonds but he knows his Masters disapprove of his opinion being expressed like this to strangers. He goes on anyway.

"But I had a vision, and the Ka'ra showed me a massacre," he says slowly, "the Jedi and the Haat Mando'ade faced each other and only one of you survived the encounter."

He turns his head in Jango Fett's direction. His armor painting in a future that could be different, meaning vengeance and grief, but Obi-Wan would recognize him anywhere in the galaxy.

"Behind them, a man, wearing beskar'gam and carrying a black lightsaber, laughed, mocking the lives taken." He can feel the moment they recognize what he is talking about, who he is talking about, and the weapon - for so long believed lost.

"I know our people were enemies, but I also know that we don't have reasons to kill each other now. And I know that Haat Mando'ade carry themselves with honor and they don't go around the galaxy killing innocents." Obi-Wan decides to press more. "I know you are bound to a Code and would never betray your vows, just as we are. That's why I knew my Masters and I had to come here. Because if there is a chance that you were betrayed by your employee, then there is a chance that the Jedi were too."

--.--

Obi-Wan doesn't know if his words had an effect or not. He said them in earnest, letting raw emotion be seen in his eyes. With their beskar'gam , he couldn't read if he was being taken seriously or not.

They had been left alone after Obi-Wan spoke. 

Now he is here, his Masters' emotions leaking through the Force - not entirely disapproval but it is a close thing. The silence between them is deafening to Obi-Wan and he wishes-

No, he is a Jedi and he is on a mission. His personal emotions and feelings will only disrupt it.

He put the entire mission in jeopardy when he decided to say he had a vision. He doesn't know how much these mandalorians believe in the Ka'ra , or the Force in basic, but he is oddly confident that spilling out the truth was better than talking around it.  

When one verde comes back, the same one as before, he takes off the buy’ce and Obi-Wan can’t quite control his flinch at seeing that face again after so many years. Cody’s face, Rex’s, Kix’s, Fives’ and so many others, his men, his friends, his-

Obi-Wan sees them all, and he still sees Jango Fett’s face, staring back at him, expression severe, a hard shielding in his mind, not letting a trace of emotion pass through it. His chest aches, at the yearning for his men who he’ll never see again, never know what really happened during their betrayal, and hurting for this man that must’ve lost everything to be that desperate to the point of conceding permission to create an entire army using his DNA as a template.

Obi-Wan mourns a future that he hopes to prevent at the cost of his dear friends that will never exist. 

His men would say he was doing what is right, that the war should never happen if it could be avoided - how many of them had died fighting in it? But he will forever miss his friends, his brothers in arms, the easy camaraderie in which they lived.

“Come with me, Jetti .” Jango says, thankfully ignoring his misplaced display of emotions. 

They follow him through the corridors, until they enter a meeting room. It’s already occupied with the Mand'alor and others. They sit and the Mand'alor takes off his buy’ce - and that’s a good sign in their favor, showing less hostility is progress Obi-Wan didn’t expect to achieve so soon. Obi-Wan doesn’t recognize the Mand'alor - he probably died along with others in Galidraan in his other life.

“You recognize my son,” he says, eyes locked with Obi-Wan’s, “but you didn’t recognize me, although you know who I am.”

It’s not a question but Obi-Wan answers all the same.

“Yes, Mand'alor . I know Jango Fett.” He says. It’s an understatement. He fought the man and saw him being killed by Mace on Geonosis. “I saw him standing alone in my vision.” 

Obi-Wan can’t be sure of that exactly. But if the Force is telling him anything right now is that he is on the right path - trusting these men is the right choice.

The Mand'alor nods. “You also said you saw the Darksaber. Do you know who has it?”

“No, it didn’t show me the person.” Obi-Wan says, treading carefully, “but I know their armor is different from yours and they have no ijaa. I believe they call themselves the Kyr’tsad. ”

The tension when he mentions the terrorist group is palpabe.

“Why are you doing this?” The Mand'alor asks him a few moments later. “You said yourself, our people have no love for each other, we are enemies.”

“Because I’ve seen the future, and I wish I didn’t.” Obi-Wan says with all honesty he can pour into his voice. “The Jedi kill the Haat Mando’ade and then the New Mandalorians rise to power, erasing millennia of culture and history. Your people become weak and there are constant wars between the Houses but none of them had the strength to inspire loyalty for long.” It was worse, but Obi-Wan doesn’t say that, doesn’t mention that neither the Jedi nor the mandalorians noticed that they played right into the Sith’s hands. “When there was little resistance an ancient enemy claimed Mandalore and ruled, while the galaxy fell into Darkness, and the Jedi with it.”

It’s the raw truth, although with little details, that Obi-Wan tells them. He never spoke about the future like this before and he can feel his Masters silently asking questions about it. Questions he doesn’t dare to voice, much less answer.

More important at the moment is the shock that takes everyone present in the room - the Force making itself known and felt to all, whispering that his words were the truth, that Obi-Wan spoke from his own painful knowledge, assuring that there was no deceive in him nor desire to bring harm upon them. 

Urging them to believe in him, to follow him. 

He can feel their astonishment but he can offer no more than his tired, sad old eyes, that had seen too much, felt too much and cried too little for all grief they’ve been through. 

“My hope,” he says slowly, “is to avoid that future. It is not an easy task, and my path is harder than most, I will face more trials than many but I don’t intend to give up when I can still fight.” Obi-Wan can feel the Force gathering around him, powering his words, turning his promises into vows of truth. He locks eyes with the Mand'alor . “We have so much in common and very little that separates us - our history as enemies should not be forgotten, but I believe we can leave that behind and learn to be allies, because we have more to gain together than apart. We will fall apart, but together, we can stand strong.”

“These are pretty words, verd’ika ,” the Mand'alor says, “but they are nothing without a plan. What do you intend to do?”

His eyes are seeking the depths of Obi-Wan’s emotions, looking for something.

“I would recommend looking for the Darksaber first.” He answers diplomatically. “It was once a symbol of the Mand'alor , used to unite the Houses and it can be that once again. I have a feeling that the Darksaber lies with your enemies, who plotted this against you and us. Using the Darksaber after winning it over in an honest fight could guarantee the support of most Houses.”

“It’s a good strategy, but you still didn’t say what you will do.”

That is a tricky question and everyone present knows it. Until now, the Mand'alor is letting him lead the conversation, although they are well aware Obi-Wan is just a Padawan and his promises of aid could be easily overridden by his Masters. There’s the matter that they are enemies and the Mand'alor hasn’t promised anything regarding them nor expressed that he would accept Jedi help in mandalorian business. 

It is tricky. But Obi-Wan is used to dealing with more than tricky - he is used to impossible odds working against him. This is not even close to what he would label as a difficult situation. 

“I don’t know, Mand'alor ,” he says, voice innocent. He could flirt but it would be weird considering his age (it was easier to flirt, but he has to wait a few more years until he can employ that to his list of competencies). His eyes remain firmly on the man sitting in front of him. “What do you plan to do? We are, as you can see, still your prisoners, and although I’m entitled to have my own opinions about what should happen, at the end of the day, I’d still be bound by your chains, incapable of doing anything.” 

A minute passes. Then two. 

Obi-Wan never had problems holding eye contact like this. He dares to raise an eyebrow, expecting a reaction.

The Mand'alor laughs, good natured. 

“Oh, you are good, verd’ika .” He says, a smile still gracing his lips. The lines on his face show Obi-Wan that this man is used to laughing a lot. “I believe in you and that’s why I agree with your proposition. And even if I didn’t, I’d not be a fool to ignore the Ka’ra ’s blessing in this partnership.” He states, surprising Obi-Wan and his Masters. Then, he raises his dominant hand to his chest, “My name is Jaster Mereel, of House Mereel.”

“I’m Obi-Wan Kenobi, Padawan learner, and these are Ba’ji Koon, Windu and Dooku.” He says, making the same gesture, raising his hand to his chest. 

He nods to them. “Let’s take these cuffs off you and talk business.”

Obi-Wan smiles sharply. This is what he has been waiting for ever since he arrived here three years ago.

-–.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Dealing with Jaster is…it feels like Obi-Wan is negotiating with his Masters about something he wants and he knows they will eventually let him have it - and they know it too. He is being tested by the Mand'alor and he is sure it’s only happening because they view him as a kid. Sure, he is older than thirteen, an age where children can be considered adults in their culture, but his appearance is still quite…well, he looks like he’s thirteen. Worse, he knows that until he can properly grow a beard he’ll always look like a teenager. 

But on the bright side, they listen to him - although he can feel their amusement and indulgence, he knows they are a little intrigued by him. Obi-Wan can feel their questions about who exactly is him and how a teenager, a Jedi Padawan, can know so much about their culture, political conflicts, and language. 

He won’t answer, of course. Just like he won’t answer his Masters' many questions. 

“It’s settled then,” the Mand’alor says, Jango and Miles agreeing from his side with curt nods of their heads. “We make way for the governor’s castle at first sunlight.”

Obi-Wan feels a tiny spark of hope in his chest that maybe this plan will come along well.

“We’ll be ready.” Master Windu tells them.  

They managed to form a tentative alliance with the Haat Mando’ade . The Mand’alor agreed to let Obi-Wan and his Masters come with them to investigate the governor. Obi-Wan has the distinct impression that if the man is found guilty, he’ll pay for his crimes most thoroughly. The mandalorians agreed to let the man and whatever others involved that can be captured be interrogated by them as proof to send to the Senate though. By agreeing to this, all parties win and have their justice.

Obi-Wan feels confident that this will be just the beginning. Jaster Mereel is a great leader and, more importantly, he is open to changes. That means Obi-Wan has a good chance of managing an alliance more detailed with them and the Jedi specifically, if the mission is a success. And it will be - Obi-Wan will make sure of it.

There’s only one detail that Obi-Wan remembers - an important one - before standing up from his chair.

“Are there civilians close by or that work inside the castle?”

“No, and that’s the strange part of all this,” Jango answers him, Obi-Wan can hear Cody’s voice in the way he expresses himself and he’s momentaly overtaken by memories of long nights awake alongside his second in command sitting in his quarters at the Negotiator, planning and trying to gauge their enemy’s intentions. “Ever since we arrived here, the city’s been deserted.”

“We were making our way to the castle when we crossed paths.” Miles comments. 

“When did you arrive?” Master Plo inquires.

“Two days ago.” 

His Masters exchange looks. Obi-Wan knows what they’re thinking although they don’t include him in the mental conversation.

“This is most definitely a trap.” Master Windu concludes.

Jaster nods. “Now we know what trap it was. They were waiting for you to arrive.”

Obi-Wan feels the tension in the room - he can imagine the massacre it would have been between them. It could still happen if they weren’t careful. This tentative alliance is just that - tentative. He is not expecting deception from the mandalorians but he knows how a few well placed words in the right ears can cause distrust and spread seeds of discord. 

If the mandalorians feel betrayed by them in any way, they won’t hesitate in getting revenge for it. 

“Well then,” Obi-Wan says when the silence is becoming heavy, “it’s a good thing we managed to solve this peacefully. I quite prefer it like this to uncivilized ways of resolving conflicts.” He puts emphasis on uncivilized because Obi-Wan truly despises when negotiations end up in messy affairs. Why can’t people solve things by talking instead of killing each other, he’ll never understand. “Now, Mand’alor , I don’t suppose you have rooms available to us? It’s a long way back to our ship and we wouldn’t want to attract attention from the wrong people.”

–.--

Spending the night surrounded by mandalorians is funny (for Obi-Wan, and only him). His Masters are tense, although they were given a comfortable room with a fresher attached, they don’t seem to share Obi-Wan’s sense of humor. 

Of course not. How many times again has Obi-Wan spent being held as prisoner in worse conditions? They’re not even being held against their will. Still, he’s aware that if they choose to violate their alliance, it would be quite difficult to escape (not impossible though. Since arriving here, Obi-Wan has counted at least a dozen different ways to distract, diverge and possible course of actions to access routes in order to escape. But he doesn’t tell his Masters that, there’s no need to have their questions poking at him through his bonds).

When his Masters sit on the floor and look expectantly at him, Obi-Wan remembers that he still has to clarify some things about his behavior to them. Right, the vision he made up.

He enters a meditation and reinforces his shields in the places where they’re holding his memories before joining them and opening his bonds again. 

Is there anything you’ve forgotten to mention to us, Padawan? Master Windu asks.

Obi-Wan sends his embarrassment to them as an answer. But he doesn’t feel sorry and they all feel it.

Why did you lie, Obi-Wan? Master Dooku insists. You know what’s at stake here. If there’s no enemy, what do you think it’ll happen?

I assure you Master, I may have made up a vision but I didn’t lie about anything else. The Kyr'tsad are out there, and the sooner we stop them, the better.

He doesn’t mention his suspicions of the possibility of them finding even more than the Kyr’tsad to face. No need to worry them about his concerns. 

Padawan- 

Besides , he continues, interrupting Master Plo, the Force agrees with me. If I was truly lying, would it make itself known? You see, I told them the truth…from a certain point of view.

Is it unbecoming of a Jedi to feel smug about his abilities of winning arguments with his Master? Yes. Does Obi-Wan enjoy it anyway? Absolutely.

Still, this line of thinking is dangerous. Master Dooku reprimands him. We expect better from you. It’s still a lie you told and this time it may not have consequences but you can’t be lucky forever. 

It’s not an appropriate behavior for a Jedi, Obi-Wan. You’ll meditate on this and we’ll decide a punishment for you when we get back to the Temple. Master Windu says - as if Obi-Wan expects anything different from this.

Yes, Masters.

They leave Obi-Wan to meditate alone after that and he does - but not about his telling the truth from a certain point of view. He has lived enough to know that it can and will backfire on him - but sometimes it’s the only option available at the moment and sometimes the Force doesn’t provide , as Master Jinn used to say to him. He lost count of the times he had to make do with what he had with him, deprived of the Force. 

Obi-Wan trusts in it completely. But he learned - painfully so - that sometimes the Force isn’t enough.

Wasn’t enough for the Jedi, in any case. He doubts he would’ve survived for so long without the Empire hunting him if he wasn’t used to living without the Force.

So he spends the time he has on sorting out his memories, which means he shoves them deep down in his mind, away from conscious thoughts and erects walls upon walls of shields to not be forced to remember, especially tomorrow. He isn’t allowed to falter tomorrow. 

The future that he desperately wants to avoid is there, and he can’t be distracted by Jango’s voice or even the way the mandalorians will fight. 

When Obi-Wan goes to sleep that night, he is numb. Somehow, he managed to guard his memories so well that even a part of what makes him himself is missing. He doesn’t feel any emotion (and that is troubling, he never achieved this level of dissociation before, but he will deal with it later. What matters is his ability to fight tomorrow and nothing else).

–.--  

Finding the governor is easy. It was a trap as they strongly suspected, obviously. They don’t even make it to the castle. Instead, the Kyr’tsad are waiting for them and have them surrounded in minutes.

What neither of them counted on was the numbers of the Kyr'tsad . An army, to be more precise. Well, Obi-Wan didn’t have a vision but his guess was as good as any about them. He wonders, while waving his fingers to deflect the blaster shots aimed at him and some of the verde , if even in his original timeline they were present, as a backup plan, in case not everyone managed to kill themselves. 

He thinks the answer was yes. 

There are too many of them but not all of them are well trained warriors, seasoned by other battles as the Haat Mando’ade are. Their methods rely more on great attacks and explosives but not on hand to hand combat, and they don’t have the experience in leading and coordinating battles. More importantly, they don’t work as a single unit.

This is an important detail: it tells much about them to Obi-Wan. He can deduce these people aren’t close with each other, which means that the probability of extracting information from individuals is high and that’s good for their goals. 

It also means that defeating them is much easier than anticipated by him. They aren’t the Kyr’tsad that ruled Mandalore with Maul. These people are still green in their tactics. 

Obi-Wan quickly makes the math about their odds in his head. They may be less experienced but they still have the numbers on their side and most importantly, munition - heavy gunnery - that can cause significant damage to them. Would they win by the end of the day? Yes, and four Jedi Masters (he is counting his abilities here) will make the balance pend to their side. 

But Obi-Wan is more worried about their losses. What will cost them this victory? A lot of Kyr'tsad will probably escape and run away - to regroup, and thus just postponing the inevitable bloody conflict. And the Jedi might not be there to help the next time, or not arrive in time. More than that, with their numbers and continuing to fight the way they are will result in them being overwhelmed by the enemy. 

If they are, chances are they will be the ones captured and tortured. Obi-Wan may know how to get out of Force-suppressants cuffs and have the experience of running away from prisons but that doesn't apply to all of them and he certainly doesn't have enough in himself to free them all while fighting alone.

No, there has to be another solution. 

Obi-Wan could lead them to battle - he fought with less men, fire power and on worse terrains than this before, and won with impossible odds. The problem here is that the mandalorians aren’t fighting united with the Jedi. If they can form a single unity, and it is possible to do it, they would win this easily.

Obi-Wan deflects more blaster shots with a wave of his hand, and makes a line to one of the verde . 

He isn’t using his lightsaber here, preferring to test his skills in hand to hand combat. It is messier but it surprises the enemy and he uses the Force to augment his movements, keeping up with them without tiring himself out. Besides, Obi-Wan trained with Cody and before him, Alpha-17. His commander was ruthless in their sparring sessions. On the battlefield, Cody could easily crush a lot of droids by simply punching them. 

Obi-Wan learned how to fight like his men. He uses his Clone Wars training now, punching beskar’gam with his bare hands. It’s more rigid than the droids’ metal but not so that makes it impossible to crush if he so wished.

What he gets is an enemy being thrown five feet away, his fist imprinted in the armor. 

Whoever they are, they don’t get up again. Obi-Wan checks, they are alive, just passed out.

“We have to regroup now.” He says in the middle of chaos, ignoring the dumbstruck feeling projected at him coming from the verde he’s talking to. “I have a plan but we must face them again on our terms, not theirs.”

He can feel their incredulity too. Some others are openly forgetting to pay attention to their surroundings and looking at him. 

“Trust me.”

The verde doesn’t say anything to him but Obi-Wan hears the sound of a communicator and he knows his message is relayed to the others. He alerts his Masters in his bonds. He has to deflect more blaster shots and punch his way from more Kyr’tsad - even push some of the verde out of the way of a bomb. Obi-Wan does it all without a thought, never doubting his abilities in combat. 

Slower than he’d like, they retreat to a place where they will have a few hours to recover before the Kyr'tsad find them again.

Obi-Wan scans with his eyes the verde, prodding them gently with the Force. Some have been shot and although beskar’gam can’t be breached by blaster, he knows the bones in the body can still break or bruise. He counts them, checking to see if no one died. To his relief, there are just two gravely injured and ten others with bruises but able to fight. He doesn’t go to them since their medic is already working on them.

The mandalorians and his Masters gather around him, and Obi-Wan produces a holomap of the terrain. 

“Our main problems are their numbers and gunnery.” He says with every inch of the General he knows he is. “We don’t have to lose a single verde to defeat them if we are careful. As Jedi, my Ba'ji and I can cover and redirect shots from large groups. So we have to divide ourselves in squads to maximize our performance.”

“Here’s who will be with who…” and Obi-Wan divides them into groups that have the potential to work well together. His mind was sharp for details during the fight and he didn't waste time, cataloging their abilities and strengths. Now, he uses this knowledge to apply where it will be better suited. 

When he is satisfied, he begins explaining the techniques that each squad will employ, according to their specialities. He marks on the map where they will be and how they’ll perform each assault. 

“Our priority will be cutting their supplies and access to their ships, which will probably be located here,” he continues, making educated guesses based on his experience, and points at an accessible place not far away from the castle, and designates a group to sabotage the ships and other to find the explosives and steal them. “It’s crucial that the ships are prevented from flying. We don’t want to give them any opportunity to regroup.”

Obi-Wan feels them staring at him at the mention of stealing supplies. 

“Just because it’s theirs, doesn’t mean it can’t be used by us. I believe some cultures say that all is fair in war.” 

He then proposes alternatives, should things go wrong. 

When all the plans are being through twice, Obi-Wan teaches them hand gestures to allow communication between them, in case they can’t talk or find themselves without the electronic means to do it. He makes them repeat it all twice. He didn't think that after all these years he would still remember the codes he used with his battalion but he does, good thing it comes in handy now.

Satisfied at last, he pauses and asks:

“Does anyone have questions about the plan?”

Obi-Wan is met with stares of astonishment, since many of the verde had taken off their buy’ce , he only now takes notice of their surprised faces. Even his Masters are shocked, although by what Obi-Wan couldn’t possibly begin to guess. It’s not as if they’ve never seen him making battle plans before.

“Ob’ika,” Jaster says to him hesitantly, “where did you learn all of this?”

Oh.

Perhaps he exaggerated? Let his General part come out too strongly? 

He did just instruct them as if he was talking to his own men, didn’t he. And he did use a strategy he developed in the Clone Wars. 

Well, that is just one more question he can’t answer now and maybe not even in the future. 

“I read,” he says, not really expecting anyone to buy it, “a lot.”

“You read?” The incredulity is thick. Yeah, not buying but he’ll roll with it anyway.

“There’s a lot to learn about the Sith Wars.” He says, which is, surprisingly, the truth. Technically, the Clone Wars could be considered a Sith War. The only detail here is that he didn’t read about it - not from holobooks at least - but he fought in it and read the paperwork. So he is telling the truth, from a certain point of view .

A lot of the mandalorians look ready to protest about his explanation. 

“If you don’t actually have questions or suggestions about the plans, I’d like to have a few moments alone to meditate.”

Obi-Wan doesn’t actually give them time to reply, he just takes his leave and goes to a corner, as far as he can from them, and sits on the ground. It’s easy to slip into the Force. He has to prepare himself to enter a battle meditation soon, to be aware of what happens, where it happens and with who. 

He breaks his trance when he feels his Masters approaching him. Master Plo gives him a stern look (at least from the Force is what he is projecting). 

“You have a lot to explain, Padawan.” 

“I know.” He says, not actually agreeing. He senses his Masters frustrations with him. “It’s time.”

And they can’t object to that - the verde are ready and they depart.

It’s time to fight again.

–.--

Obi-Wan is determined to end this fight quickly. 

When he takes his lightsaber in hand, the crystals are singing in his ears and he knows that today it will not be a Padawan that is going to face the Kyr'tsad.

No. It is General Kenobi that stands tall on the battlefield. He can hear whispers and murmurs about the color of his saber and the storm in his hardened eyes.

Obi-Wan turns it all off, his awareness in the Force expanding until he has a touch in every sentient present on the field, friends and enemies alike. His battle meditation starting, and his steps sure, he is the first to move in direction of the confront, incapacitating the enemies, one by one, with all grace and experience of someone who knows a delicate dance that follows the currents of the Force. 

He is unstoppable, unbreakable and most of all, Obi-Wan is untouchable . Not a single shot comes closer to hit him, his lightsaber a red protective barrier that is moved in a deadly precise manner, making him a hurricane of a single man. Behind him, bodies of fallen enemies lay, incapable of getting up to fight again - not dead, never dead. 

When his line of enemies ends, he supports the other squads, mixing with them without disrupting their rhythm. His economic movements allow him to avoid getting tired after the first few intense minutes.     

Obi-Wan shouts orders and doesn’t turn his head to see if he’s being obeyed or not - he expects them to. He doesn’t care that he’s just a sixteen year old demanding respect. He’s a General, he fought in more battles than any of them combined together, he won’t be questioned. 

–.--

When the battle ends, Obi-Wan feels energized with adrenaline. During the Clone Wars, in his current state, he would have fought straight for days with little sleep. Without injuries, he could go on until his body shut itself off. 

But he forces himself to stop and release that energy to the Force. He turns off his lightsaber, having no use for it anymore and moves to check in with everyone, looking for injuries, helping to accelerate the healing process in the grave ones who can’t wait until their return to the fortress. He helps to cuff and fully disarm the Kyr'tsad and put them to the transport, giving medical attention to those among them who need it. 

Not even once he lowers his guard. After Cerasi almost died twice, even the second time with his senses on high alert, he learned his lesson.  

Back in the fortress he passes on to those who don’t need immediate medical attention, cleaning and disinfecting wounds, applying bacta or stitching the flesh and dressing it with bandages when necessary. He scans them with the Force, looking for hiding injuries, internal bleedings or concussions. 

Obi-Wan has never been more grateful for having chosen healing classes when he started his Padawanship than he is now. It’s even more satisfying for him than thriving in battle. He is relieved to learn that while he is, perhaps at the present, one of the most skilled strategy generals alive, in his core, he still has the heart of a Jedi, who only wishes to heal and maintain peace. Learning this fundamental truth about himself now, after years of doubting himself while in exile, lifts a heavy burden from him that Obi-Wan didn’t know he was carrying.

When he finishes with the mandalorians, he checks his Masters. They are well, if not tired. It’s enough for Obi-Wan and he gives himself permission to find a calm place for himself to meditate and process the battle. It’s a short but necessary break to focus his mind back to the present and let the ghost of his own battalion return back to his memories.  

He is intimately aware of the stares that follow his every movement through the fortress. Obi-Wan can almost taste their questions about his abilities in battle, his skills in commanding and giving orders, his unquestionable posture after, knowing how to prioritize the injured and how to treat them without disrupting the medics. 

He knows it isn’t normal being this familiarized with war and the more pair of eyes he gets on his back, his Masters’ included, the deeper he goes in his quick session of meditation, until the awareness of the reality is faded and blurred, so he can achieve some measure of inner peace.

He rejoins them and turns to help organize and categorize the gunnery they acquired. Obi-Wan feels like he’s back at the Negotiator , helping the Shinies do inventory, the only difference is that the weapons are outdated (from his point of view, at least).

When that is finished, he goes to the Mand'alor , who in turn is talking to his Masters alongside his ade and close advisers. They pause their conversation when he approaches. Obi-Wan has the distinct impression they were discussing him.

“The prisoners?” He asks.

“Secured, along with the governor.” Jaster answers, he looks concerned (they all do but he ignores it). “You should rest, Ob’ika.”

Obi-Wan really doesn’t need to rest. 

No one from their side has died but it wasn’t entirely bloodless either. And there were casualties from the other side. He would know since he spent a good amount of time helping to dress their wounds. 

If Obi-Wan sleeps now, he will dream, and if he dreams, he will remember, and remembering brings back his nightmares. 

He knows that all too well. By the end of the Clone Wars he barely slept anymore because he woke up screaming and thrashing. After his exile, he never really slept more than four hours a week, if he was lucky, tormented by flashes of bodies and blood. 

But now, in front of them, when he knows they already have questions about his battle skills, he can’t afford to raise more concerns - especially when he knows how mandalorians view child raising. His Masters’ image could be damaged by his behavior. So he nods, and retreats to the ship they used to come here. 

He takes a quick shower, cleaning the dirty and sweat from his body. Obi-Wan puts on clean robes and goes to his bunk. He avoids looking at himself in the mirror, afraid of what he'll see. He knows he is a broken old man, but he doesn't want to see what reliving a battle can do to his face. 

Since he is aware his Masters will come later to check on him, he lays down but instead of sleeping, he focuses on meditating and joining the Force. 

Obi-Wan loses his notions of time and space, letting the peace overcome him. He doesn’t know how long he can force himself to be awake and avoid his Masters’ concern for him but he knows it was all worth it, just feeling the Force at peace and content with a tragedy avoided is reward enough for him.

-–.--

Obi-Wan has no interest in interrogating the prisoners or even participating in the process. However, he knows that it’s part of the mission to see it through, so he joins them and even asks a few questions himself.

They gather enough evidence to trace it back to the Senate - but it’s still not enough to link it to Palpatine. Obi-Wan didn’t expect it to be though, he knew the Sith were clever than this. What comes to light instead is something that Obi-Wan knows has the potential to tie the Sith in it: the Banking Clans are involved in the transactions between the Kyr'tsad and the governor. He remembers that one of the greatest financiers of the Clone Wars were the muuns.

When he reads the testimonies alone in his bunk, he opens himself to the Force to see if he’s missing something. The Force has become silent after the battle, with the Kyr'tsad mostly defeated, but when he reads this report, he feels an insistent tug, a feeling that this is the next part he has to investigate if he wants to unravel the mystery of the Sith.  

By the end of the many interrogations, he feels tired. He has trouble separating the future with the present and more than once he catches himself tense, waiting for Maul to appear and fight him with the Darksaber. Being exposed to so much hatred coming from the members of the Kyr'tsad is messing with his perception of reality. 

He alternates between thinking it feels like being back on the last days before the fall of the Republic, with all the murky corrents of the Force covered in darkness, and suffering from anxiety because he felt the same kind of anger in Anakin on Mustafar - a corrosive, twisted anger that consumes the thoughts - in the prisoners, and he catches himself poking around the Force, searching for the supernova which he would recognize as his former Padawan's that would be corrupted by the Darkside and be ready to kill him on the spot more than once.

His Masters throw at him worried glances, but are ignored by Obi-Wan. They try instead to offer him silent support, standing by his side, since Obi-Wan has closed off his ends of the bonds and erected heavy shields to avoid leaking his memories to them accidentally and avoids skin to skin contact at all costs. 

They manage to extract information about more members of the Kyr'tsad and discover the whereabouts of the Darksaber. They make several more surprise assaults to arrest them all. To no one’s surprise, Tor Vizsla has it. 

Obi-Wan is thinking quietly in the ship they’re taking to where it was said Tor Vizsla is. 

“Jaster?” He says, standing in front of the verde . They are gathered in a room, sparring and giving tips to each other. Neither Obi-Wan nor his Masters have engaged them, although more than once they were invited. 

The Mand’alor looks at him.

“Are you trained to fight with a beskad ?”

“I am, why do you ask?” They have attracted attention from the other verde now. His Masters, probably sensing the changing in the emotions, enter discreetly in the room.

“I was thinking about making a proposition to Tor Vizsla.” When he feels their interest, he continues. “I’m aware they won’t surrender if it works in our favor but maybe it could buy us time.”

“What kind of proposition?” Jango asks him. It’s the same tone Cody used on him when he knew he’d dislike whatever crazy suggestion Obi-Wan would throw at him.

“You could go to him with a few verde . Challenge him for the Darksaber, if it’s in his possession. While you fight, the rest of us can work on capturing the rest of the Kyr’tsad . When he loses and refuses to accept defeat, he won’t have backup.”

Miles seems to be considering him. “It’s a good strategy. We can catch them by surprise.”

“The problem would be locating them.” Jaster says. 

“That part will be easy.” 

“How do you intend to find them?” Jango asks.

“We’ll use the Ka’ra .”

Jango raised an eyebrow at him. “How? Beskar suppresses the Ka’ra , Ob’ika. Or did you forgot your experience in cuffs?”   

Ah, well. That wasn’t a secret Obi-Wan was eager to reveal but it’s not like he could change the focus of the conversation now.

“Well, you’re right...” He says, and he doesn’t like how his voice is high (curse puberty). He tries again. “...from a certain point of view, I’d say.”

“Padawan,” this time it’s Master Windu who joins the conversation, “what do you mean?”

Obi-Wan blushes. (Curse his lack of beard).

“There are some materials that can cut off the Ka’ra from us.” He tells them slowly. “ Beskar is indeed one of them. But I’d argue that the Ka’ra is in everything, which makes the point of muffling our connection to it invalid. You just have to look for the connection in a different way than what you’re used to.”

“Are you telling me that you could’ve escaped?” Jaster looks intently at them.

Obi-Wan can feel his Masters ready to deny.

“I could.” He answers before they can. “But they can’t.”

“Obi-Wan-” Master Plo tries.

He sighs. “Would you like to see? I can prove it.”

Jango goes to retrieve a beskar cuff. He secures it in Obi-Wan’s wrists. 

Obi-Wan is so deeply connected and attuned to the Force that for him, being cuffed like this doesn’t even make a difference. He feels his senses a little blurred but not cut off completely.

With a gentle wave of his hand, he opens the cuff and catches it before it falls on the ground. 

“You can test with a collar too, if that’s not convincing enough.” He says. “It does blur my senses a little but nothing that would stop me from feeling where they might be hiding.”

Obi-Wan is met with stares, again. 

“Are you saying that nothing can cut you off from the Ka’ra ?” Miles asks after recovering from his shock.

Obi-Wan debates telling them about Sith masks and drugs and explaining that while it can’t cut him off completely from the Force, it certainly can make his mind vulnerable enough for him to lose his fine control over it, making it almost impossible to escape. He opts for saying nothing of it, and he uses his pretty words for that. 

“I didn’t say that. I said that it’s a matter of point of view. Until now, I haven’t found anything that is able to cut the Ka'ra from me. Doesn’t mean there isn’t, but it certainly won’t be cuffs and collars that will do the trick. Now, back to my suggestion: will you challenge him?”

Jaster nods slowly, his eyes still seeking something from Obi-Wan. He won’t find whatever is that he’s looking for. The Mand’alor doesn’t give up, but he does concede that today won’t be when he has answers for the questions he wants to ask.

“You two should spar.” Jango suggests. “Ob’ika is very skilled with his beskad and he does know how to punch beskar’gam .”

“That’s an understatement.” Miles comments.

“Alright.” Obi-Wan interrupts that line of thought before it can lead to dangerous waters. He doesn't have an explanation for his hand to hand training. “I’ll set my saber to training intensity.” 

He goes to a corner to stretch, going through his katas calmly. Joining Jaster when he finishes, the mandalorians give them space to train. His Masters send him a wave of encouragement, although his bonds remain closed, he still feels it.

Obi-Wan opts for being aggressive, as Tor Vizsla would be. He slows his attacks though, and refrains from using the Force, except for supplementing his strength. 

Jaster, as he expected, is good with a beskad . He thinks that maybe Jango is too, since he’s the heir, he must train in all kinds of weapons. Obi-Wan easily puts up with him - the Mand’alor is good but he’s not Master Dooku with a lightsaber. 

“You’re not even trying.” Jaster complains, good humored. 

“I’m sorry,” he replies, a small smile on his lips, “but you’ve never faced Ba’ji Dooku before. His saber form is for dueling other Ka’ra users which means facing another beskad . If I want to keep up with him, I have to be way better than excellent, which I’m not.”

Jaster laughs. 

“I’m starting to think this fight is unfair.” Jango says as a way of warning before joining them. He’s got his own beskad and doesn’t hesitate to strike with all his strength.

Obi-Wan takes it all with grace and keeps his balance. He switches forms to Soresu instead of Djem So and waits until they are starting to feel tired. It takes hours before it happens. 

“Are you sure you’re not a droid, Ob’ika?” Miles says from where he’s sitting - their audience have already given up standing, some of them even have snacks and are talking. His Masters are paying attention but not as closely as they were at the beginning. 

“Obi-Wan is using Soresu.” Master Plo explains. “It’s the endurance form. A true Master of the form can go on for hours like this without getting tired.”

“But you two, on the other hand…” and Obi-Wan uses the moment to switch his form to Djem So again, throwing them off balance and disarming them. 

Jango makes the mistake of trying to reverse his defeat by a surprise attack. Obi-Wan quickly catches it and punches him hard. 

He is thrown off and hits the floor with a loud sound. 

“Careful, Jango.” Obi-Wan says to him. “I’m not a droid but I do know how to punch them.”

Jaster helps his son to get up. There is, as expected, a mark of Obi-Wan’s fist in his beskar’gam . Jango takes off his buy’ce . They are both breathing hard.

“You’re not even tired, are you. We’ve been at this for hours.” 

Obi-Wan just smiles. “Well, if it’s of any consolation, I’m a special case. At the Temple, Padawans usually just have one Ba’ji to train with and I have three so I had to learn endurance, wanting it or not.”

“Still unfair, I demand a rematch.” 

Obi-Wan accepts. 

-–.-- 

Jaster Mereel raises a challenge against Tor Vizsla as they planned (Pre was there too, watching his father and ready to betray the honor of the challenge if it became clear defeat was the result), and he wins (Obi-Wan never doubted). They manage to capture the rest of the Kyr’tsad and interrogate them. 

Now, in possession of the Darksaber, the Mand'alor can claim the loyalty of the other Houses and finally unite Mandalore. Obi-Wan can feel the chess board changing significantly after that. It’s a battle won for the Light. 

Obi-Wan doesn’t feel happy with that - he can’t allow himself to become complacent. The Sith still remain hidden and he knows the worse has still to come. He begins planning and asking the Force for guidance during his meditations (which happens when he is supposed to be asleep but isn’t).

The only thing that he gets is that the muuns are involved somehow in all of this. It isn’t much but he’ll take whatever he can get from this mission to think on his next steps.

-–.--

By the end of their stay in Mandalore, his Masters and him have managed to reach an accord with the Haat Mando’ade and this one is much more than tentative, it’s real progress. 

After a series of debates - which Obi-Wan is proud to say that he advocated mostly passionately about in his arguments - the two former enemies can say that a permanent alliance is in vigor and all parts are in satisfaction.

What threw him off his delicate mental balance was seeing Satine again. Her father, representing their House, swore loyalty to Jaster and as a result they were included in the final negotiations. 

She was so young but so opinionated and full of naive views of the galaxy, just as he remembered. Her sister was there too but she was less involved, not having the hard edge of when she had joined the Kyr’tsad . 

Obi-Wan argued with her just like before, just like every time they met. 

The only difference was that this time he wasn’t the same boy who fell in love with her, blind and full of hope for a future where the galaxy could be peaceful. He was a war veteran, with blood in his hands and an emptiness in his eyes that left little room for patience when dealing with a spoiled child. 

So instead of arguing as a way of flirting, he was brutal in his words with her. For every pacifist argument he heard coming off her mouth, he had a ready answer on his lips that crushed her. He had a lot of time to think about her in his exile and what he’d tell her about what she had done to Mandalore. He didn’t measure his words with the opportunity presented.

It wasn’t his intention of hurting her, but he didn’t know what else he could do to make her see that the path she was on was no more than wishful thinking, that someday it would result in her death .

His Masters noticed he got worse after that. Jaster noticed it too. Actually, everyone noticed. Obi-Wan wondered if they didn’t have anything better to do than to watch his every movement. They made a point to separate Satine from him after that and he avoided the looks he received, he knew his Masters would want an explanation but he just couldn’t . It wasn’t like him to lose his temper with anyone on a mission, on the contrary, he was the picture of the perfect Padawan, serene and calm. Something on Satine seemed to always ignite a fire on him and make him snap, this time it made him really angry.

In his defense, she seemed murderous torwards him just as much as he knew he looked angry at her.

At night, when he returned to his private quarters (and thank the Force he was allowed a private room for himself), he sat down on the bed and stared blankly at the walls. He should meditate but these last few weeks he was in constant union with the Force. It wasn’t helping the loud thoughts in his mind nor his attempts to realize his emotions and let go. 

He felt tears running down on his face but he didn’t have the will to stop them, nor the force to properly cry.

Obi-Wan still loved her, even after all these years, and he realized then that he was mourning her all over again.

He just sat there, suffocating alone inside his mind, without being able to form a single coherent thought. 

-–.--

To celebrate the new alliance, there is a banquet party thrown in celebration. Many Houses come to show their support and they are invited as guests of honor. Obi-Wan wishes he had the will to enjoy at least the cuisine but he knows he won’t be able to stomach it, with all his nerves and anxiety lurking in the corners of his mind. 

Still, he makes small talk with a lot of people.

Obi-Wan hasn’t slept in days, being busy writing his ideas for the debates between them and the mandalorians and what compromises he thought would benefit both sides, seeing Satine again and having a mental breakdown over her, and worried about the balance of the invisible game he is playing. 

Will the Sith notice his direct interference or will they judge it as a miscalculation on their part? 

What will he find when he investigates the Banking Clan? More importantly, how will he present the evidence to the Jedi Council and the Senate? Will his Masters support him? Can he prove, at last, that the Sith are among them?

His mind is a mess of questions without answers and he feels like when he first discovered the clone army on Kamino, lost and confused. Those questions were never really answered - not even after the Purge. Will he alone manage to uncover the truths hidden? 

Suffice to say Obi-Wan is not a great company at the moment and only his years as a negotiator and as Master Dooku’s Padawan make him be sociable tonight at the banquet. 

Obi-Wan makes a point to avoid all personal questions and topics that stray from small talk and the details of their new agreement. That doesn’t mean he is distracted. He notices how the people treat him - with some sort of importance and open admiration. He has the distinct impression that he had been adopted to the House Mereel (although no one said it explicitly) because he is shown even more respect than his Masters are when he is introduced to someone.

Why they would want to add him to their House is beyond Obi-Wan. He may be familiarized with the culture and costumes but that doesn’t automatically makes him a good candidate for the House of the Mand'alor . Besides, he may have hit off with Jaster and Jango but it doesn’t mean they are…well, friends much less aliit .

Gods, he is becoming a mess, isn’t he. It’s called post traumatic stress disorder and sleep deprivation - he is used to dealing with the lack of sleep but it’s becoming increasingly difficult to shove down his buried memories and achieve the blessed numbness he felt after meditating with his Masters.

It doesn’t matter, his mission here is almost finished and he’ll soon be able to go back to the Temple and exhaust himself and finally sleep a little. 

He endures the banquet (he has no idea how, but he does).  

This time, when they leave the planet, a team of Knights - archivists - will come to continue what they started - exchange knowledge and learn about one another, strengthening their alliance. 

Obi-Wan was surprised when Jaster mentioned he would be open to the idea of a Jedi embassy being established on the planet. This was way better than what he thought they would achieve. He knows it is still a long path before they can see one another as friends, but this is a great start.

Time comes for them to say goodbye to them the morning after.

Jaster hands him a comlink before he embarks the ship with his Masters.

“If you ever need anything, and I mean anything Ob’ika, don’t hesitate to call me.” His eyes are serious and Obi-Wan recognizes the promise behind his words. “We may not be aliit but you can still be under my protection.”

Obi-Wan nods (and his suspicions were right, after all).

“I will.” 

He turns and enters the ship, leaving the planet with his Masters. He’ll miss Jaster and Jango - they were nice to him - but he won’t miss Satine or the way fighting alongside the verde has made him unbalanced.

Perhaps someday he could visit them, but Obi-Wan doesn’t dare to make plans for the future.

-–.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

His Masters make Obi-Wan give the mission report when they entered the chambers and the High Council is impressed with them. 

He is succinct and doesn’t say more than the strictly necessary: how they arrived and were captured by the Haat Mando’ade and then bargained an alliance of mutual interests, then their first battle and how they had to reorganize themselves in a formation to maximize their abilities and prevent deaths, handling the interrogations of the Kyr'tsad, the Mand'alor gaining the Darksaber in combat and finally their negotiations to a treat of cultural exchange. 

He says his report as simple facts and avoids flourishing it. Truthfully, Obi-Wan is tired and he doesn’t have the energy to say more details than these ones.

He thinks that, in another life, Master Jinn would be proud of him for that. However, it's not how things go this time around.

“Omitted some parts in your report, you did, Padawan Kenobi.” Master Yoda says when he finishes talking. 

Well, it’s not like Obi-Wan has to tell every single detail about his time in Mandalore. He said all the important parts, and his Masters would have interrupted him if he forgot something. 

His confusion is clear in his expression because Master Yoda hmmfs .

“Downplayed your achievements, you did,” the old Master says, “incredible skill you showed, qualities of a Knight your Masters’ report says you have.”

What?

He was just acting as he was taught to do.

“A Jedi doesn’t seek recognition, Padawan,” Master Sinube says, as if sensing the directions of his thoughts, “but we don’t omit our contributions to the missions either.”

“And you have shown exceptional skills and maturity, Padawan Kenobi,” Master Gallia continues. “When your Masters sent their report, we could picture the actions of an experienced Knight leading a high risk mission.”

“I just did what my Jedi training taught me, Masters.” Obi-Wan says, because he has a distinct impression of where this conversation is leading him to and he is not ready for it.

“Padawan, you did more than that. Somehow, you managed almost single-handedly to establish an alliance with our ancient enemies while helping the mandalorians to unify their peoples under a single leader.” Master Piell tells him. “You organized their group of people to fight alongside Jedi without raising sentiments of animosity and didn’t kill any of your opponents, a feat that most Masters can’t achieve in battles. And by the end of the visit, your proposals of cultural exchanges were entirely accepted by this Council without needing to review anything.”

Oh.

Well, when Master Piell presents it like that, it sounds like a lot. 

It really isn’t though. Not by Obi-Wan’s standards. 

Give him a month in the Clone Wars and he will have achieved this four times over for the Republic. He is not bragging about it, it’s just the truth. He had to be the best at what he did - diplomacy, fighting, negotiating - or else he would’ve been killed like so many others of his Jedi brothers and sisters were. 

This? Unifying a planet and negotiating an alliance? It’s what he has been preparing for ever since he arrived here almost three years ago. 

He doesn’t say any of it, of course. Instead, as a good Padawan, he bows respectfully to the praise, but makes a point in not thanking them - because he is a teenager again and sassiness is a part of his current state of mind - opting to stay silent.

The Masters notice it.

“Believe in us, why don’t you?” Master Yaddle asks.

Obi-Wan really doesn’t want to get into details about this.

“Master Yaddle, everything I did on this mission my Masters taught me and where I wasn’t sure of my next steps, the Force guided me.” He says, looking straight to her. “I didn’t downplay my actions, I just gave a concise report to this Council. They are supposed to be brief and include only the relevant aspects of a mission. The details, as you could see, were all there in the written report.”

“ Hmmf ,” he hears from Master Yoda. “Great fear I sense in you, Padawan Kenobi.”

Obi-Wan can almost feel the smack coming from his stick. 

His words throw him off balance. His shields are firmly placed as they have been since he stopped sleeping days ago. Obi-Wan is sure Master Yoda must be curious as to why Obi-Wan’s signature is almost invisible and his shields leave nothing to wonder about his emotions. The old Master is just testing him and trying to get a reaction out of him. Well, he won’t.

Obi-Wan can’t help the raised eyebrow.

“I’m not sure how you’ve reached that conclusion, Master Yoda, since my shields are in place and I meditated during the journey back and released my emotions to the Force before coming here.” Is Obi-Wan being disrespectful? Probably. Does he care? Not at the moment. “But I concede to your point. However, you are wrong.” The shock coming from all members of the Council, including his Masters are the proof he needs to know he’ll have a reputation after this. “It’s not fear I feel. I’m simply trying to avoid the obvious direction this conversation is leading me to.”

“And know what our intentions are, do you?” 

“I may not have reached the rank of a Senior Padawan yet, but I recognize the not so subtle mention of the rank of a Knight.” He says, perfectly calm. “My impression is that after I am dismissed, I will become a Senior Padawan, which I can understand. But what you are suggesting here is more than that. You want this mission to count as part of my Knighthood Trials.” 

He is right, of course, if the looks of the Masters are anything to go by. “Tell me Master Yoda, am I wrong to want to avoid Knighthood for a while yet? Am I really experienced enough to bear the responsibilities and privileges that come with the title? I know I could do it, if it was asked of me. But while I can, it doesn't mean I should.” 

Obi-Wan never pictured himself explaining why he shouldn't be promoted to the High Council but it seems that today he has to. Nobody should interfere with his Masters’ place to decide the stages of his Padawanship. 

“I vowed to serve the Force, Master. Mandalore was one of the places where it led me to. You should consider that I was prepared to go even against this Council's explicit orders or my Masters' wishes to do it. Did you consider the implications of that?” He asks, looking serious. “Make me a Knight and you’ll have a Jedi that will have the freedom to disregard many of your orders, or let me stay as a Padawan and have more control over my actions with my Masters to guide me.”  

Obi-Wan needs to lay down and not think of the future for at least a day after this is over. 

Through the closed bond, Obi-Wan can feel Master Dooku sending him his approval. He almost sends back his amusement to his Master.

“I think this is enough for a report, Masters.” Master Windu says. “We can always revisit the subject later.”

How diplomatic of him, Obi-Wan thinks. 

Master Yoda is not satisfied but he agrees. 

“Good work on Mandalore you did.” The green troll says. “Dismissed you are.”

They bow and leave. 

–.--

That night, his Masters decide to leave him alone and Obi-Wan claims the opportunity to say he wants to go to bed earlier.

He sneaks out to train his Emerald Lightning and new lightsaber form. 

Morning comes and he goes to his classes, goes to train in the Halls of Healing, has lunch with his friends - and tells them the same he told the Council about his mission (they think his Padawanship is so awesome, and it really is but if they had any idea of how many years of pressure Obi-Wan put on himself for this mission, they wouldn’t think it as awesome) - then he trains his forms in the dojos, goes back to his apartments, does his homework and disappears in his bedroom before one of his Masters can talk to him into eating dinner with them.

At night, he can’t sleep, so he sneaks out to train or pay a visit to the Archives.

The next day he rises and repeats the routine. 

By the end of the week since they arrived, Obi-Wan has purple circles under his eyes and no matter how much he heals it or masks his appearance, they just don’t go away for long. 

He can’t sleep and he avoids even thinking about why that is. 

He has lost weight too, as if he didn’t have enough problems as it is. Obi-Wan can’t stand the thought of filling his empty stomach with more than the bare amount necessary to carry him through his day. The food was tasteless in his mouth, and more than once he had to stop eating and close his eyes, count till ten to avoid a trip to the fresher. He stopped eating where other Jedi could see him when that happened for the third time. 

His Masters try to tempt him with a trip to Dex or even Little Keldabe but Obi-Wan made excuses each time, claiming he was tired or too busy with assignments to go. 

What he does is drink tea - an unhealthy quantity of it - to soothe his stomach and calm his nerves. He has never been so close to his reality in exile as he is now. Obi-Wan remembers how malnourished he was then, to the point eating made him sick simply because his body had grown unaccustomed to it. He hasn’t reached that point but he’s aware that as a teenager, he should be eating much more than almost nothing. He could suffer severely for this.  

Obi-Wan is desperate for relief, for being freed of his nightmares. He can’t cry in his quarters or even afford to leak a single trace of distress through his bonds - Force knows what his Masters would say to him. He fears that by the end of this, if he doesn’t manage to put himself together, he’ll be forced to. 

In the end, it doesn’t matter. His vicious cycle of misery made him unable to move on and sort himself out as a proper Jedi Master would have done in his place. 

He suffers an intervention from his Masters on their weekly dinner. 

When they corner him, after Obi-Wan scarcely eats the bare minimum necessary to pass off as healthy for a teenager boy, he doesn’t resist them. Doesn’t try to misdirect the subject or puts off a fight. He does none of those things that he would do in the past. 

Instead he just breaks. 

They haven’t said anything, but he feels their intent clear in the Force and gods, he is so exhausted.  

The tears are just an expression of that bone-deep fatigue that he’s been feeling ever since he organized the mandalorians to fight alongside them.

Obi-Wan doesn’t make an attempt to hide, he is beside caring about what his Masters will think of him. His mind is a mess no matter how many hours he meditates and his hormones are intensifying everything he feels to an unbearable degree. He sits there, on the cushions on the floor, sobbing and crying and he can’t stop, he can’t feel his emotions, he feels numb but so full and nothing he does alleviates the pressure inside his ribcage. 

Master Plo is the one to extend a hand to him, and he is desperate and starved to cling to any resemblance of comfort. His Master catches him, enveloping his body in his strong arms and his gentleness just makes Obi-Wan cry harder. 

A long time passes before he feels empty again. Not normal, not good, just an empty shell, still full of memories and surrounded by ghosts that try to suffocate him at night.

Master Plo holds him through it all, running soothing circles in his back and surrounding him with calm-love-acceptance through the Force, never overwhelming his senses but letting him know the comfort is there, if he wants to take it.

When he has no more tears to offer, Master Dooku hands him his favorite tea, and they drink in silence. The resemblance to the Incident is so evident that Obi-Wan flinches involuntarily. He can’t stand the reminders of memories - he has so many of them and can’t escape their reach to find solace. 

Feeling his Masters’ love for him is enough to break his resolve. He can’t carry this burden alone anymore. He doesn’t want to see ghosts anymore. 

“I need help,” he says quietly, eyes downcast and shoulders down.

Master Dooku takes his free hand. 

“I-” he needs to tell them. It’s time for him to share and he has to believe that they’ll listen to him this time. They’ve come a long way for them to not listen to him. “I’m tired of seeing ghosts.”

His eyes are full of pain and grief, as is his soul, when he looks at them. 

“If I tell you everything, will you listen to me?” 

“We will, Obi-Wan.” Master Windu says, his face is worried but determined to be what Obi-Wan needs right now. He breathes deeply before starting. 

“I have…lived this life once.” He confesses and the Force rings true. “In my time, there was a  war and the Jedi were forced to fight in it. It ended badly and the Order and the Republic as we know fell, giving place to an Empire. I lived in exile for many years before I sacrificed myself so the galaxy could have hope again.” Obi-Wan resumes. He pauses, unsure of what to say next. “I know you have questions…you can ask.”

“How…?” Master Windu is the first to question him. 

“I don’t know, Master. I have guesses but…” He shrugs. “Things ended badly. For the Jedi. The galaxy was shredded in darkness and from what I could see, it wouldn’t end anytime soon. I guess the Force provided when nothing else could.”

“You said there was a war. What happened, Obi-Wan?” Master Dooku is still holding his hand and it’s difficult for him to not remember his once Grandmaster .  

“It’s a long story and none of us knew all the details. Even now, I still wonder about it sometimes.” He explains. “For some time, many planets and systems were unhappy with the Republic. They decided to no longer be part of it, and united themselves in a government that we nicknamed as Separatists. At the time, you had…left the Order. You renounced your rank of Master and assumed the position of Count of Serenno. You were the leader of the Separatists.”

“You fought me.” 

Obi-Wan nods. “I didn’t know you personally, Master Jinn never talked about you.”

“Qui-Gon was your Master?” Master Plo asks him.

“He was, Yoda’s meddling worked out in the end, I’d say.” Obi-Wan lets his shields fall, little by little, sharing his memories of his apprenticeship with Qui-Gon. “But Master Jinn died on Naboo when I was twenty-five. He didn’t Knight me but I gained my Knighthood on that mission. I think…it was what made-”

Obi-Wan pauses, unsure if he should say it. A gentle hand rubs his back. Master Plo’s touch is his strength at this moment. His Masters wait patiently for him to continue.

“When Master Jinn died, Master Dooku was no longer part of the Order but…I think the news of his passing was a turning point for him.” Obi-Wan looks at his Master in the eyes with a sad expression on his face. “You Fell and became a Sith Lord. When I first met you, we fought, me and my Padawan. You cut his arm off and burned my thigh. If it wasn’t for Master Yoda, we would’ve died that day.”

The silence that follows is deafening. Obi-Wan smiles, melancholic. 

“The war lasted three years. In secret, the Separatists had gathered a droid army. When I faced you the first time, you told me that the Republic was under the control of a Sith. I didn’t believe it then but after everything, it made sense. I was on a mission to capture a bounty hunter and ended up on a planet that wasn’t in our records. There, I discovered a clone army…that the Jedi had commissioned.”

“We would never-”

“I know,” Obi-Wan agrees with Master Windu, the Jedi would never, “but they said it was Master Sifo-Dyas who ordered it. I suspect that it was Count Dooku in secret, though. A man named Tyrannus was resposible for it, according to our late investigation on the matter.”

“You mean Yan was named…”

“Darth Tyrannus, yes.” Obi-Wan says. “We didn’t have a choice, not really. There was suddenly an army droid and the Republic was being attacked.”

“There’s always a choice.” Master Plo says firmly. “I can’t imagine the Council would allow it to happen.”

“You should see for yourself if you don’t believe me.”

Obi-Wan looks down. He allows the heavy walls guarding his memories to crumble down and he shares with them - the first battle of Geonosis, the beginning of the Clone Wars. Count Dooku standing tall, a satisfied smile on his face as he watched them in the arena, preys to die. The Jedi fighting and the arrival of the clones, his Grandmaster escaping.

“Many lines the Jedi never would dare to cross were broken during the War. We all did horrible things and saw too much death. The Force always felt clouded and dark. Not even Master Yoda could sense anything.” Obi-Wan shares some of the horrors he lived through. The sieges, feelings of helplessness, the pain and the nightmares. 

He felt his Masters’ distress and stopped. 

“I won’t share more, it’s not- You shouldn’t have to see it.” He says to them. His Masters don’t need to see the worst parts of what happened to him, to the Jedi. “But I should tell you what happened, in the end.”

“What could be worse than that?” Master Windu asks him, frowning.

Obi-Wan closes his eyes and takes a deep breath. He can’t center himself but he needs to not break down while he says the next part. When he opens his eyes again, a few tears roll down on his face, and his voice cracks.

“Darth Sidious. He- Somehow he made the armies turn on the Jedi. We trusted them and they…” He doesn’t say the words but it hangs heavily upon them. “I managed to escape and found Master Yoda. We went back to the Temple to investigate the distress signal coming from here. It was a trap, of course but-”

Obi-Wan breaks. He can’t say it. His chest feels tight, it hurts. The grief is suffocating and there’s nothing that can make him forget what he saw on that day.

“All of them…they were all dead. There was no one left. Even the younglings-”

He cries harder after that. His shields finally break completely and his mess of memories flow without his control through his bonds. The horror of seeing the Purge, the sick feeling of death and the smell of burned flesh. It’s all there, his hurt and confusion on those last few days.  

“I’m sorry, I-”

Master Plo hugs him tight and Obi-Wan holds him just as tightly, afraid that this is a wishful dream he’s having while still under the twin suns of Tatooine, the heat making him see what is not there. 

“I miss them. My vod , my family. I’ll never see them again, I don’t even know what happened. It hurts so much,” he murmurs between sobs, “but I’m here and I have to see you and pretend it’s alright when it’s not .” Obi-Wan feels angry at that, with himself, with the Force. Why him? Why did it have to be him? It doesn’t matter now, does it. He’s here and that life is gone. With a strength he didn’t know he possessed, he buried all his feelings inside. He forced himself to stop crying and act like the Jedi Master he knew he was and continue to talk. “I lived alone after that. Master Yoda gave me training to do in my exile. Master Jinn learned how to maintain his consciousness after death and he taught me how to do it too.”

“Obi-Wan,” Master Dooku says, and he forces himself to look into the eyes of the man who once was his enemy, his torturer, “it’s alright.”

His voice is so gentle, so different from the mocking voice of Count Dooku. He feels lost between the echoes of memories and what his ears listen to now. Obi-Wan flinches, and it’s too much. His bottled feelings refuse to stay locked inside him, he’s unbalanced and-

“Breathe, Obi-Wan.” His Masters say to him. “It’s alright to cry. You’re allowed to.”

“I can’t-”

“You can, Padawan. Now breathe.”

“It’s too much,” he sobs again, “why me? I miss them. I can’t-”

Master Plo continues to hold him, to support him. Obi-Wan greedly accepts his comfort through the Force, from all of them. Still, he’s tired, so tired. He just wants- no, needs peace.

“Please.” He begs when it’s too much. “I don’t want to see them anymore. I just- I see Cody every time I close my eyes and I can’t anymore.”

An image, a memory, of his dear commander passes through them. Cody, Rex, Ghost Company, his vod . All bearing Jango’s face. Fighting alongside them, developing strategies, sparring, late night conversations. His remembrances said each night in exile after. 

“I hated being a General and I hated fighting.” He’s still crying but he manages to explain for his Masters. “Mandalore was…Jango is all of them and neither. It hurts to miss them.”

“Obi-Wan, what happened on Galidraan in your other life?” Master Plo asks, voice low and quiet as if he already suspected but needed confirmation.

“It was a massacre.” He answers, brushing his tears with his sleeve. “It wasn’t a vision but I told the truth. Jango survived and somehow he was convinced to give his DNA to create clones. I guess his revenge was complete in the end, even if he didn’t live to see it.”

He shares an image of Master Windu cutting off his head in Geonosis. His Master is uneasy after seeing it, they all are. Geonosis was the first time Obi-Wan felt the Force truly in despair, hurting and getting dark. It never stopped after that, the opposite instead - the Light diminished gradually and painfully with all the death that spread thoroughly the galaxy until it came to the point where simply learning how to use the Force, which was usually an act of Light, became a beacon in the universe, quite noticeable for the Emperor and his apprentice. 

“I think Master Dooku led the mission to Galidraan.” He says, feeling more coherent and turning his mind back to the present. “The timing is…right.”

“This is-” Master Dooku tries to say.

“Worrying.” And Master Plo completes it, disturbed.

“A lot of things are.” Obi-Wan says, feeling weary beyond his physical years. “I see ghosts all the time and try to prevent a lot of deaths and Fallings. If you want to know, our first mission to Melidaan was one of them.”

“Tell us.”

“Master Tahl was worse, and she was completely blind after that. Master Jinn and her were…involved. I didn’t know, we had a bond but he was still hurting from Xanatos, it's not like ours. I insisted that we should stay on the planet and help the Young but he didn’t listen. I drew my saber on him, he cut my braid, took my saber and left me there.”

“My Padawan did what ?” Master Dooku’s voice has a dark edge to it that makes Obi-Wan recoil and come closer to Master Plo's chest. His Master calms himself and Obi-Wan dares to relax a little again before continuing.

“I stayed there ten months and we finally managed to have peace talks, but Cerasi was shot. She died in my arms and I had to call the Order for help.”

“Qui-Gon left you there alone? No one came to help you?” Master Plo asks.

“No. When I called, he came and accepted me back but it took us two years for him to trust me again.” Obi-Wan says. “Then Master Tahl died on a mission and we both missed her but neither of us knew how to deal with our grief.”

“Did he at least send you to a mind healer?” Master Dooku asks, still angry but more subdued, for Obi-Wan's sake. They are all being careful with what they're projecting to not overwhelm or trigger him.

“No, I wanted to but there was no time. We were always on missions and I barely kept up with my classes.” Obi-Wan answers. He smiles bitterly. “It’s funny how things are. I learned to be a General fighting with the Young and in my second life I used my skills to help them accomplish in a few weeks what took me almost a year the last time.”

“Obi-Wan…”

“Sometimes I think I was born to fight. Did you know I was one of the best strategists in the Order?” He continues spiraling, ignoring the concern he feels in the Force coming from his Masters. “They put me in the High Council for it too. I commanded a third of the Republic Army. Do you think it was difficult for me giving orders to Jaster? What I did in Mandalore was nothing. In the Clone Wars I would do it in a week’s time. My brothers and sisters were dying, leading the clones to their deaths while I was being victorious.”

“Padawan-”

“But it doesn’t matter, does it. They all died, and I had to keep living anyway. I still do.”

Master Plo shakes him. 

“ Obi-Wan Kenobi .” His Master says and breaks him from his line of thought. 

“I’m sorry, Master.” He tells him. “I’m not- I don’t want to die. It’s just. Feels unfair. Why me? I joined the Force, and did my duty. I’m tired.”

“We know, Obi-Wan.”

“I don’t want to see them anymore. I’m tired of dreaming and seeing my memories. I can’t meditate, it’s not working and-” 

He cuts himself. There’s nothing else he wants to say. He explained himself, isn’t that enough?

“How long are you like this?” Master Windu asks.

“Since when Jaster told me I should rest after the first battle. I’m…I use the Force, I’m used to going without sleep for longer but…” 

“You haven’t been eating too.” Master Dooku notes. 

“It’s difficult for me. When I was alone I preferred to sustain myself with the Force if possible.” He confesses, shame in his face. “Please, will you help me? I just-”

Master Windu has a silent conversation with his other Masters and Obi-Wan doesn’t bother to keep up with their expressions. He’s so tired. He doesn’t know what he’ll do if they don’t agree to help him.

They finish and Master Windu is careful to approach him, as if Obi-Wan could run away. Where would he go? He doesn’t have anyone, his mind is laid bare for them to see the truth and he has nothing to hide from them. Obi-Wan doubts he could cause any trouble while as sleep deprived as he is.

“Sleep, Obi-Wan.” The Force suggestion is gladly accepted by him. Distantly, he hears Master Windu’s voice promising, “we’ll be here when you wake up.”

–.--

With Obi-Wan limp in his arms, Plo looks to his friends. They look…just as lost as he feels. The Force is mourning and Plo realizes that’s what his Padawan has been hiding from them ever since he erected his strong shields to keep them out of his mind - grief and pain, a sad soul that has loneliness as company for more time than they can count.  

“I don’t want to believe it but…” Mace says, rubbing his forehead, “it makes sense, doesn’t it? The shatterpoints, how the Force always felt around him and his skills…”

“What kind of future is so dark that the Force has to bend the laws of time and space to bring someone back in the hopes of fixing it?” Yan asks. “And to think that I-”

“He feared you.” Mace says, as if only now realizing that Obi-Wan viewed Yan as a Sith when they first formed their bonds with him. “All this time, he was afraid of you.”

“We’ve always known that Obi-Wan was keeping secrets. We thought it could be a trauma…” Plo says to himself, “and to think we were right, but…he’s just a boy.”

“Apparently not,” Mace says, “but I think being in the body of one can make his reactions different. We know children don’t really have the control of their emotions the same way as adults, and teenagers go through a lot of brain development…”

“Let’s be honest, Mace. If it was me, I would’ve had more breakdowns than he did, and so would you.” Yan says, his voice is tight and Plo doesn’t remember ever seeing him so disturbed before. “I’m surprised his mind is intact. The amount of grief he carries is enough to drive some mad.”

“Or Fall.” Plo continues. He exhales deeply once, twice. “What are we going to do with him?” 

The boy in his arms is sleep-deprived and has issues with food and trusting people. His Padawan always thought himself alone against the galaxy and now that they know the burden he carries, it all makes sense.

“He really should see a mind healer but apart from us, I don’t think anyone would believe in Obi-Wan. Sith Hells, I wouldn’t have when he first tried to tell us. None of us did. But the way he acted in Mandalore was…he felt like a Master in the Force, and it’s difficult to deny what is in front of you.”

“And the Force was loud and clear when he was telling us about his life.” Yan complements.

“We should talk to him when he wakes up.” Plo says to them. “He is a child, yes, but he is also a man, and we should discuss it with him instead of treating him as a normal Padawan.” 

“I swear, the Force knew what it was doing when it bonded us together.” Mace says, massaging his temples. Plo couldn’t imagine the massive headache his friend must be suffering now. “I’m not paid enough to deal with all these shatterpoints.”

“That’s because you aren’t paid, Master Windu.” Yan bites back, dryly and they all recognize the signs of how disturbed he is by the possibility of having Fallen and becoming a Sith. “But having a Padawan is a gift and with them comes problems. I may have been a Sith in another time but being Obi-Wan’s Master is a privilege I’m honored to have.”

“So am I. Wouldn’t trade this kid for any other less complicated.” He agrees.

“On the brighter side, we both will be following the Will of the Force that Obi-Wan is so adamant about from now on without questioning him too much.” Plo tries to lighten the mood. 

“We already didn’t ask a lot of questions, but I see your point.” Mace says. “I wonder what everyone will say about it after we can reveal the truth.”

–.--

Obi-Wan sleeps for an entire day and when he wakes up, he finds his Masters there, making tea and bringing blankets to the living room, as if they were preparing for a holomovie night. He makes a quick trip to the fresher and avoids looking at himself in the mirror, but he knows his eyes still feel sore from crying so much and there’s a lump on his throat. 

When he exits it, finds himself feeling awkward around his Masters. How do they feel about his admission? Are they going to report him? Make him see a mind healer? 

“Your thoughts are loud today, Padawan.” Oh, he didn’t raise his shields after confessing to them, he is projecting, isn’t he? "Come join us.”

He sits in the middle of them as usual, between Master Dooku and Master Plo with Master Windu in front of him, and then he blushes, remembering that they know he is not exactly who he claims to be - or the age he’s supposed to be. 

A comforting hand on his shoulder breaks his thoughts and brings him back to the present. 

“No matter what happens, Obi-Wan, you’ll always be our Padawan, do you understand?” Master Windu says to him. “You can be a hundred years old but we’ll still be by your side.”

He nods, wiping away a stray tear. Master Dooku has a tray of food for him on his other side. It’s porridge and it smells good, although Obi-Wan eyes the plate warily. He feels hungry but he doesn’t want to feel sick and waste food. 

“What are you thinking, Padawan?” Master Dooku asks him gently. 

“I’m hungry but…” 

When he doesn’t add more, Master Plo lays a comforting hand on his back and rubs circles to soothe him.

“It’s alright, Obi-Wan. You can have as little or as much as you want.”

“I’ll try.” 

He receives encouragement from his bonds and feels a little better by the prospect of eating food. He is careful to eat slowly and without a rush, grounding his mind on the present. Master Plo breaks the silence after a few minutes.

“The training you did,” he says lightly, curious, “it doesn’t happen to have anything to do with what you’ve been trying to teach us, does it?”

Obi-Wan blushes, swallows the food and answers with a shy, “maybe.”

“Ah, I suspected so.”

“What exactly is that you’ve been teaching us?” Master Windu asks.

“There are a lot of applications, I’d say.” He tells them. “Master Jinn taught me to still be myself after I died as I said before, but other things would include not being ever deprived from the Force or even amplifying what we Jedi can do, such as sensing intentions or even seeing the future. Theoretically, I’m also not bound by my physical limits and can, well, live forever if I wish to.”

“That’s...”

“Yes, it is. But it’s not an easy thing to achieve as you can imagine.”

“You tricked us into buying you dinner.” Master Plo accuses him, amused.

“How long did it take you to complete this training?”

“Two decades, Master Dooku.” He answers sheepishly. “In my defense, I really enjoy Dex’s and mandalorian food.”

“You don’t say.” Master Windu replies dryly. “I can’t believe we were deceived by your innocent face.” 

It’s the lack of a beard , Obi-Wan thinks but doesn’t say. It must’ve passed through his inexistent shields because his Masters smile at him. 

They let the comfortable silence sit between them for a moment. Then:

“Member of the High Council?” Master Windu phrases it as a question but Obi-Wan feels his curiosity.

“Yes.” Obi-Wan affirms. “Because of the war- many of us died on Geonosis and…well, they made me a General but after a few months it was clear I had the experience to lead armies so it was easier to give me more and more battalions to coordinate and then it was convenient to place me in the Council. Towards the end most of the strategies and battalions were under my supervision, and it was always me that had a final say in who to send where.”

“I’m sorry, Obi-Wan. It must’ve been hard for you.” Master Windu says. “This entire war sounds really messy.”

“Messy doesn’t begin to cover it, Master.” He replies. “But exile was worse, I think.”

He eats more but his hunger is satiated for now. Obi-Wan gets up to clean his plate and returns to sit with them again, hugging his legs to his chest.

“My Padawan Fell,” he begins explaining, “he believed in lies and turned against us and helped in the Purge at the Temple. I watched him…killing younglings without remorse and couldn’t phantom why he did it. Master Yoda was with me and he said that he had been consumed by…Darth Vader.”

Obi-Wan dries a few tears that escape his eyes and closes his eyes. He lets out a shaken breath.

“Master Yoda sent me to kill him while he would do the same to Sidious. I went to Mustafar to confront him. We fought and I gave him every opportunity to stop, to think through, to tell me what was wrong. If he had stopped, I would’ve dropped my saber at the same time and I didn’t care about what Yoda had told me, I would’ve run away with him and helped him. But he didn’t. So I didn’t. And when I had the high ground I-”

His voice breaks, and he feels numb from relieving the memory. He shares flashes of it, but not Anakin’s face. His Padawan isn’t that man yet and may never be if Obi-Wan has a say in it, and he doesn’t deserve to be judged by what he hasn’t done.

“In the end, he did become Darth Vader.” Obi-Wan shares his last memory of their confrontation at the Death Star with Vader, more machine than man, with the heavy sound of breathing and voice modulator that made him unrecognizable inside that monstrous suit. “I spent the next twenty years hiding from him in the desert, as a hermit. They called me Crazy Old Ben. I’m not proud to say that most of the time I was drunk. It helped me sleep and kept away the nightmares. I couldn’t bear to remember those last few days.”

“That wasn’t wise or healthy, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku says to him but his tone isn't a reprimand.

“None of you were there to stop me.” He retorts, a mix of anger and sadness in his voice. “Besides, being alone was worse than being on the field, making the hard calls. At least in the war I had my vod to share the burdens with. In that sand ball I just trained and waited. There was a rebellion but I couldn’t join it, it would do more harm than good. Jedi were hunted and I didn’t want anyone else dying for me.”

Obi-Wan and his Masters spend the next moments in silence, digesting his words and trying to imagine what it was like to live in constant alert on a galaxy that hunted and killed Force sensitives. Then, as if the thought had just occurred to him, Master Dooku asks him:

“What happened to me? The Sith have the rule of two, don’t they?”

“Ah, well they have Master,” Obi-Wan says, “you kidnapped the Chancellor and my Padawan and I were sent to rescue him. I was knocked unconscious but my Padawan managed to kill you.”

“He must’ve been very skilled.” Master Dooku comments. His Master is trying to look unaffected but Obi-Wan knows he’s feeling disturbed by the entire thing.

“He was a prodigy, second best of us I’d say, but my opinion of him is biased.” 

“Just second best? Who is the first, you?” Master Windu asks jokingly, trying to improve the mood. It works and Obi-Wan is more than happy to follow that line of conversation.

“Oh no. I’m not that good.” He says, and thinks fondly of the best of them, his Grandpadawan. “Ahsoka was the best of us.”

“Ahsoka?” 

“Your foundling, Master Plo. Ahsoka Tano. She was my Grandpadawan.” He shares his memories of her. “Just like her Master, and she ended with the nickname of Snips and she called him Skyguy. They were the best of us, and I’ve never seen a Master-Padawan duo who worked so well together. I had requested her as my Padawan actually, but Master Yoda meddled, again. In the end, they worked way better than I expected.”

“Ah, now I can believe you were on the Council.” Master Plo jokes. 

Obi-Wan laughs. It was an unsaid truth that members of the High Council had to be Masters, but the unspoken tradition was that their lineage had to have at least two generations forward.

“I was elected before she was assigned to him. After Geonosis, my Padawan was Knighted, even with my protests that he was too young, the war gave us no choice and a few months later she was with us.” He tells them. “And before you ask, he was a Padawan for ten years but he was just nineteen and Ahsoka was fourteen. I was thirty-five.” 

“That’s very young.” Master Dooku says. “It would not be done in other circumstances, I imagine. But you took a Padawan soon after being Knighted. There wasn’t a war then.”

“I had promised Master Jinn I would train the boy. My Padawan was a slave and in our last mission we freed him but not his mother. He was nine and the Council denied his training. Master Jinn said he would train him anyway.”

“He repudiated you.” Master Dooku deduces. His stare is cold. 

“Maybe.” Obi-Wan says, his voice small. “It doesn’t matter. I trained him, said I’d leave the Order if the Council didn’t allow it.”

Master Windu exchanges a look with Master Dooku. 

“Are you still planning on training him this time around?” Master Plo asks.

“If it’s the Will of the Force. But even if it isn’t, I want to be there for him. He was my little brother, I loved him and I don’t want to fail him again.”  

“It wasn’t your fault he Fell, Obi-Wan.” 

“I know. Falling is a choice but it doesn’t mean I’m blameless. I spent a long time meditating about what had gone wrong and now that I’m here I intend to fix it.”

“One thing at a time. You have to be healthy first if you intend to be a Knight and train him someday.” Master Plo tells him. 

“I know.” 

“We will help you, Obi-Wan. You won’t have to carry this burden alone anymore.” Master Dooku promises. “If we stand together, all will be alright.”

Master Dooku says it with such conviction that for a moment Obi-Wan can almost believe him. He told the same thing once to Anakin and Ahsoka. Watching their lineage fall apart by lies, distrust and false accusations was one of the hardest things Obi-Wan ever endured, knowing he had contributed to it didn’t help either. 

Maybe, this time around, when he finds Anakin, he can be the Master and the older brother he deserves. Maybe he can keep him from Falling, support him better, listen to him in a way he didn’t the first time. Maybe they can have the privilege to raise Ahsoka together again. 

He vows to have nice lineage time with them, to be there for them and never betray their trust in him again. Most of all, Obi-Wan vows to not let the Darkside consume the galaxy again and destroy all he holds dear, even if they are not the same people he left behind - and perhaps will never become them - he’ll protect them.  

“I wish I believed in you, Master.” He tells him, smiling sadly. “But I can’t. Not when there’s so many things at stake. Someday, perhaps.”

“Have faith, Padawan. If not in us, then in the Force.” Master Windu says to him. His hand holds Obi-Wan’s shoulder firmly.

“We’re a team, and no matter what, we stand together.” Master Plo echoes the sentiment.

Obi-Wan doesn’t say anything to that. He won’t lie and say he believes in them, he can’t let himself hope. Hope is a fragile thing that can destroy even the most powerful men. It’s a weakness he cannot afford to have. 

Master Dooku gets up and returns with something in his hands. A bead.

“Will you accept it, Padawan?”

It’s an orange bead, for his negotiation achievements in Mandalore. It’s bigger than the others, to mark the rank it confers to him as a Senior Padawan, if he accepts it. He touches it with his fingers carefully, a smile gracing his lips.

“I don’t think I have a choice.” He comments, dryly. “It seems I’m destined to have Mandalore as the mission that grants me this rank.”

“You don’t say.” 

Obi-Wan looks at Master Windu. “I’m serious. Last time, I spent a year there, protecting Satine from the Kyr’tsad . Learned the language and all.”

“So that’s why you had such strong opinions about her ideas.” 

Obi-Wan rolls his eyes at that. 

“She dies because of those ideas, Master.” He recalls the memory but doesn’t share it. He never wants to see her body lying lifeless in his arms ever again. “She is naive and thinks that talking is the solution to every conflict in the galaxy. I wonder if she would still believe in that if she knew how she dies. I was forced to watch, you know. She was the only other person I would leave the Order for, besides my Padawan and Ahsoka. I loved her. Still do. But seeing her again was just-” He pauses. Then, when his emotions aren’t overtaking his mind, he continues. “She will always be like this, I realized. I can’t let the galaxy fall apart just because I love one person, and not fight when I can just because pacifism is the easier way.”

He is crying again, Obi-Wan notices. Gods, will there ever be an end to his tears?

Master Plo is hugging him again and he lets him.

“Better?” His Master asks.

He nods.  

“I’m just so tired of losing the people I love.” Is what he says in a small voice, defeated and sorrowful. 

He stays in that hug for a long time. Master Windu makes them more tea after that. Obi-Wan drinks it and tastes ashes.

“I wish you wouldn’t leave me. I don’t want to end up in a desert alone again if everything goes wrong.”

“You won’t, Obi-Wan. Even if the galaxy ends up being ruled by the Sith, we’ll end up on a desert planet together until you finish training us. How does that sound?” 

A wet laugh escapes him. “And being drunk together for twenty years since we’ll have nothing better to do?”

“Exactly.”

“Are you sure you’re the same counselor I was friends with, Master Windu? I still remember you frowning over simple behavior rules being broken by Initiates.”

“I’m willing to make an exception for you, Padawan. Actually, I think we all are, if you’d let us.”

It rings like a promise in the Force. Like the truth. 

It makes Obi-Wan smile genuinely for the first time and against his better judgment a sparkle of something shines in his heart, it is bright and, although small, he knows it is already strong and it would crush his spirit if he tried to ignore its existence. 

Hope , is the name of what he is feeling. A tiny bubble of hope that will refuse to go away. Maybe he’ll get his soul and spirit hurt by choosing to believe in his Masters - but just this time, just one more time , he’ll allow himself to hope for a better future.

He takes the bead, sealing his choice and opening the new door towards the unknown.

“I think I can be persuaded to let you.” 

–.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

After his Second Incident, Obi-Wan feels more at ease when he is in the company of his Masters. It’s still not easy, on the contrary things get more complicated between them - they had a dynamic going on (a good one if Obi-Wan is entitled to have an opinion), and now they have to start it all again, figure out their new interactions. 

That makes for awkward times. They know he is an adult on a teenager’s body, that he is a Master and has knowledge on things they don’t. On the opposite side, he is going through puberty (and he loathes every single moment of it) again, and his apprenticeship is so much different than it was with Master Jinn. 

There are moments when Obi-Wan doesn’t have control over his emotions as he was used to and he acts like every inch of the teenager he appears to be, and there are other circumstances where he forgets himself (now that he feels more relaxed around his Masters) and treats them as equals, forgetting his position as their Padawan.

The first few times he slipped and treated them like friends, Obi-Wan was mortified . They were having dinner and Master Dooku had said a smart remark about something and then Obi-Wan had just… flirted with him . As if that was natural and something they totally did on a daily basis.

He was so red in the face after he realized what he’d said. The shock around him didn’t help with his situation in the least.

“What was that, Obi-Wan?” Master Windu asked, an eyebrow raised.

“I’m sorry! I just…”

“Young one, did you just flirt with Yan?” Master Plo’s amusement was going to be the death of him.

“I’m- I- I did. I’m sorry Master Dooku.” He said. “It’s just…you sounded so like him and I…” 

He didn’t need to clarify who he was.

“And your first response to a Sith Lord is to flirt?” Master Dooku finally asked.

“Well…” Obi-Wan was going to throw himself out of their window and not use the Force to ease his descent. “My Padawan always complained that I flirted with all of our enemies.”

“Including Sith Lords.” Master Windu said skeptically. 

“I ah, had a reputation, you know. Usually if I flirted enough, they would end up too much annoyed to worry about torture or things like that. Besides, I may have been one of the ‘poster boys’ for war propaganda because they said I had good looks.”

“Poster boy, eh?” Master Plo had to stop laughing at him!

“I looked very mature. I had a beard and all.” He says, still embarrassed. “And I didn’t just flirt with the enemies. I did it with everyone, it’s just…me, I guess. This is so awkward .” He puts his hands on his face to cover his eyes. “I sometimes forget that you’re not… my friends .” 

“It’s alright, Obi-Wan.” Master Plo says, laying a gentle hand on his shoulder. “We figured this could happen. If it serves for anything, this proves that you’re feeling comfortable around us.”

“I- I don’t like this.”

“Why not?” 

“Sometimes all I can feel is that I’m a teenager and then I remember I’m not one, in fact. But I have to act like one and a moment later I’m saying things like that to you, and it’s so confusing.”

“Ah, the joys of puberty.” Master Dooku said, and when Obi-Wan felt his smile he just…snapped.

“It’s not funny. You try going through your life again - I know for a fact that I have maybe two more inches to grow and that’s it! I’ll have this baby face forever and that’s why I grew a beard in the first place. I know things about Master Windu that a Padawan shouldn’t because we were friends, and I have intimate knowledge of Sith alchemy because I was tortured by you! Not you, but him , but you wear the same face and sometimes you speak like my Grandmaster! I can’t treat Master Jinn with familiarity because he doesn’t know me, but I know him and I know how he likes his tea, and his schedule when he is at the Temple and- This is all so frustrating!”

Obi-Wan stopped venting his frustrations when he felt something wet on his cheeks. 

“Oh, great, now I’m crying and I don’t even know why! I just don’t want to be a teenager again.”

“It’s alright to be upset, Padawan.” Master Windu said. “We’ll find a balance that works for all of us. You don’t have to hide your tears from us.”

“I’m a Jedi Master though, I shouldn’t be crying like this.” Obi-Wan said, even though he accepted Master Plo’s hug. 

“It’s not wrong to have emotions Obi-Wan, and crying over them is perfectly normal.” Master Plo was rubbing comforting circles on his back. “The problem starts when you don’t let out what has to come out and bottle your feelings up inside yourself.”

“But-”

“No buts, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku said. “What kind of things did my Padawan teach you for you to think like this?”

Obi-Wan didn’t have an answer for that.

“It’s normal to cry, Obi-Wan. We won’t think any less of you because of that.” Master Windu told him. “And while we are in a unique situation with you, you’re still our Padawan, and a teenager. We expect temper tantrums here and there.”

He smiled a little. “Alright.”

“Yes?”

He nodded. “Thank you, Masters.” 

“Every time you need it.”

--.--

Obi-Wan is a Senior Padawan now and that means he can officially teach classes. That also means that when he is teaching, he notices things about Initiates and Junior Padawans that he didn’t before - things that only being able to live his life again make him be perceptive of the details.

He notices how terribly unprepared they are to face the real world, the galaxy outside the Temple walls. They teach the Code and how bad attachments are but they don’t explain why, they don’t say what Falling really means and how it’s a choice that is made by a series of bad decisions. 

They don’t even teach who the Sith are properly - they just say it’s people who use the Darkside.

They don’t teach about the Corps and how noble their goals are. No, the only path that is worth pursuing is Knighthood, everything else is a terrible thing, to be dreaded.  

This is so wrong, and on so many levels - there are so many gaps in their education. 

Obi-Wan wants to remedy that - he needs to. He doesn’t have any other pressing missions. The Force has been calm lately and Obi-Wan’s only responsibilities lie with his studies, his training and mediating matters between the mandalorians and Jedi (and that mostly resumes to him explaining to the Knights sent there the costumes and culture, and calling Jaster to see how things are going there - he is becoming friends with them, last time, he and his Masters “had dinned” with them and it was…fun). 

He has the distinct impression that his Masters have been talking to Jaster behind his back - not that Obi-Wan is entitled to know everything his Masters do in their free time, but he is almost sure they talk about him specifically . 

That would explain why Jaster is always asking how he is, if his Masters are treating him well, even offering him a place to stay if he ever takes a vacation. It is so…strange to have the Mand’alor worried about him. 

Jango talks to him too, usually with Miles by his side when they have free time. Little by little, he’s starting to see Jango as his own person. Sometimes it hurts to see his vod in him. At night before sleeping, he goes to his window in his bedroom to look at the constellations and the distant worlds he once visited aboard the Negotiator , and he remembers them, all of them, and says their names in his remembrances, a quiet murmur in his lips, a sad smile adorning his face. 

He won’t ever forget his vod , will forever carry them with him and be grateful for having the privilege of meeting them, but he is learning to let them go, let his memories rest as they deserve to do after so many years. 

Jango and Miles don’t ask a lot of personal questions to him, and prefer to talk about his training or what he is learning and with that they compare notes - sometimes they even arrange for recording each other and offer criticism about their physical training. Obi-Wan learned a few tricks with both of them (but he has to admit he enjoys being a teacher and correcting their instances, pointing out their mistakes or even offering advice). 

It’s nice. He introduced his friends to Jango and Miles the first time he recorded himself (Quinlan agreed to spar with him and suddenly Bruck, Garen, Bant and even Siri were there too, demanding to know what they were doing and if they could be included). Now a lot of his holocalls with them are full of interruptions and parallel talks - Obi-Wan doesn’t know how they manage to understand each other or even what they are talking about most of the time but he always laughs a lot (usually about some idiotic thing Quin says).

Their last scheduled holocall was actually a surprise for Obi-Wan. Master Plo was behind it all, he is sure of it.

The date of his life day was getting closer and his friends had been unusually tight-lipped about it, not letting any of their plans escape - as if they didn’t have a routine by now of his life days: a small party in one of his friends’ quarters with supervision. 

When it arrived, Obi-Wan expected the same thing, and had an unusually good feeling about that day in particular. The Force was expectant but in a good way during his morning meditation. 

“Ah, you’re awake Padawan.” Master Plo said to him when he exited his bedroom to have breakfast. “Your friends left this note for you, they said it was important you read it before eating.”

Obi-Wan didn’t say anything but he read the note - a set of instructions of a place to meet. When he raised an eyebrow at his Master, he only received amusement through the Force without an explanation. 

“We shouldn’t keep them waiting.” 

He nodded to Master Plo, still suspicious.

They ended up in Little Keldabe, at Diath’s (the dinner owner of his favorite restaurant there). Master Plo was silent the entire trip and Obi-Wan was trying not to ask questions, knowing he wouldn’t get any answers. (Was this how they felt about him having secrets? Gods, he doesn’t know how they managed to not force him to talk).

He knew of course that it was a surprise waiting for him there, but to enter the diner and see his friends, their Masters and Jaster with his verde was more than what he could’ve expected.

“ Briikase gote'tuur !”

“What- You-”

“We wanted to surprise you, Ob’ika.” Jaster said, smiling. “What do you think?”

He laughed. “You guys are crazy.”

“Did you expect anything less from your friends?” Jango asked. “C’mon, let’s eat. We have a lot to do today.”

“Are you planning to kidnap me?”

“Perhaps. But don’t let your Ba’ji know.” 

Obi-Wan laughed again. He received a lot of hugs - Quinlan being the most annoying of them (Master Tholme looked apologetically at him but he was well aware of how pestering Quin could get and he suffered in resigned silence). 

Their morning was filled with talking and gossiping. What a surprise to discover that Jaster loved to know everything about everyone. Sometimes, Obi-Wan thought that the only difference between the Jedi and them was the Force and the beskar . 

To his immense relief, they didn’t sing to him nor made cake. He would have blushed so hard if they had.

Afternoon was the fun part. They went to the movies. It was a messy debate about what they should watch. Some of the verde wanted to see the romantic comedy, others wanted the action one and Obi-Wan’s friends wanted the scary movie.

“Ob’ika should decide.” Jango said, making everyone stop discussing. And that’s how Obi-Wan found himself having to decide how they would spend their next hours together.

“Choose wisely, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku whispered in his ear.

“Hey, don’t try to influence my Padawan, Yan.” Master Windu complained. “You both have terrible taste for boring movies and I’m not skipping my Council duties to sleep.” 

“Why would I do such a thing, Mace? I couldn’t possibly influence our Padawan even if I wanted to.”

At that, Obi-Wan saw his clue to just move away from their bickering. Turning his attention to the options, he looked carefully before saying anything. What should they watch? Hmmm , a difficult choice, indeed.  

He decided to settle for a classic that was in exhibition this week, Titanic: the tragic story of a spaceship that crashed in an asteroid field, in a time when the galactic engineers were still learning how to build ships so big and that were able to travel long distances with many aboard, that killed many and gave life to an epic romance between a twi’lek and a togruta.

No one protested at his choice and by the end of the three hours Obi-Wan could hear the distinct sound of muffled cries and sniffs coming from both of his sides. He didn’t comment - his own eyes were a little misty too.

Bruck and Quin were so depressed at the tragic end that they had to wait a moment until both Padawans could compose themselves before leaving (Master Windu would deny but he had red rimmed eyes by the end of it and Obi-Wan suspected someone from Jaster’s verde had lent him a handkerchief because there was no way he hadn’t cried, not with that expression). 

After such intense emotions, they returned to the Temple, where Obi-Wan and his friends gave the mandalorians a proper tour. They received a lot of stares but no one stopped them (he was beginning to enjoy his reputation of always being the subject of gossip among his fellow Jedi).

At last, they stopped at the dojos - because obviously, the mandalorians couldn’t leave before a friendly spar, could they. Obi-Wan didn’t know who but someone recorded the entire thing and he knows for a fact that the footage is now used by Masters to teach in lightsaber classes.

By the end of the day, they had dinner together at the commissary and Obi-Wan was smiling so hard his cheeks were hurting. 

At the hangar where Jaster’s ship was docked, they said their goodbyes. Obi-Wan still couldn’t believe they had come all this way just to celebrate his life day. Jaster gave him one last hug and a small box before departing with his verde . 

Deciding to stay with Master Dooku that night, Obi-Wan went to his bedroom to open it, curious at what it could possibly be. He laughed. He was well on his way to make his adoption to the Mand’alor ’s House official, wasn’t he. Jaster had gifted him a holocron.

“Obi-Wan?” Master Dooku called him.

“Oh, sorry Master. I was just seeing what Jaster got me.”

He showed him the holocron. Master Dooku had a surprised expression on his face. 

“Well, that is certainly something. Are you going to open it?”

“I’m not sure. Do you think it’s…?”

“From the only mandalorian Jedi we have records of?” He completed. “I do. It’s a princely gift, Padawan.”

Obi-Wan rolled his eyes. “I’m not royalty, Master.”

“You may as well become, from all the hints Jaster dropped today.” 

“Uh, not you too. I’m just an ordinary Padawan, nothing else.”

Master Dooku didn’t reply to that - no need, his silent opinion was loud enough.

“Should I…?”

“If you wish to, yes. You can open it in your bedroom too if you prefer.”

“I don’t mind.”

They sat down on their meditation cushions and Obi-Wan reached out with the Force to open the holocron. As they suspected, it was indeed Tarre Vizsla’s. 

Reading from the Ba’ji in history holopads and books was one thing but nothing could prepare Obi-Wan for seeing him in person (well, as much as in person a holocron recording could be). He was dressed in beskar’gam with his buy’ce on. His face was hardened, just like a soldier’s, he had a look on his eyes that told people to not underestimate him - this man was a powerful verde . But when he saw Obi-Wan, his expression turned soft, as all mandalorian’s did when in front of ade .

“ Su cuy'gar . I am Ba’ji Vizsla. Who is thee that seeks my knowledge?”

Obi-Wan looked at Master Dooku - he seemed just as impressed by Tarre Vizsla as him (and very few things could cause such an impression on his Master). Obi-Wan smiled - this had to be one of the best presents he could ever receive.

–.--

After his life day, Obi-Wan is ready to admit he has friends outside the Order, good friends who care about him and are interested in knowing the real him - maybe someday he could even call them his aliit too. It’s more than he deserves but when he mentioned it a few weeks later to Jaster, he received such a hurt look that he shut his mouth and stopped talking.

“Ob’ika, of course we care about you. You are an amazing verd’ika , and although we know you like your privacy,” Jaster raised his hand when Obi-Wan started to protest about that, “you still are an interesting person, very intelligent and we all like to talk to you. We’re all here for you, you just have to trust we’re not going to disappear at the first sign of trouble.”

Obi-Wan didn’t cry but he felt his eyes getting wet at that. 

“Thank you, Jaster.”

“I mean it, anything you need. I’ll drop everything, put Miles to run things here and go get you. Jango too.”

A wet laugh escaped him. 

He started believing in them. 

–.--

Master Dooku volunteers to help Obi-Wan in whatever his next steps are against the Sith, so he entrusts him to check on Kamino, and he feels the irony of that responsibility being placed on him, but he is learning to share his burdens - his Masters stand with him, they are a team and he can’t do it all alone, he must trust them. Master Windu is accompanying him and it will all be well, Obi-Wan has a good feeling about it for once. Both of them update Obi-Wan and Master Plo on their secret mission. It's nice to be able to delegate some of his worries to his Masters.

He would have gone with them if not for his studies and exams. (Obi-Wan studies just as diligently as he used to under Master Jinn, especially for his classes of Healing. Bant is amazing and he knows he wouldn’t be keeping up if not for her help and patience). 

His Masters will pass through many future Separatists planets on their way there and verify if the armies of the Trade Federation are being created on a massive scale (which is a double win for all) making it a long mission and that’s why they discussed to leave Obi-Wan at the Temple this time. He argued of course, but he was outnumbered.

“You need to learn how to be at the Temple, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku told him. When he looked confused, he explained: “Between your missions with us and your studies, how much time do you spend with your friends? Do you have hobbies? Time to relax?”

They all knew the answer to that: No.

“We live to serve, yes, but there’s nothing wrong in taking time for yourself and just enjoying life here and there.” Master Windu continued. “You don’t take free time ever since you became our Padawan, and weeks between missions filled with studying don’t count. The Temple is your home, Obi-Wan. How long has it been since you enjoyed living here?”

“I…don’t know. When I was a youngling, probably.” He said, beginning to understand their point. “Master Jinn was always on missions and I had to keep up with him, I guess. And then I had to look after my Padawan and was always busy.”

“You understand living like this is not healthy and why we’d want to break that habit.”

He nods slowly.

“It’s alright to pursue your own interests, Padawan.” Master Plo spoke. “Our duty always comes first but we aren’t expected to give all of ourselves to the Order. Part of being a Jedi is achieving balance in all things.”

He nodded again, feeling a bit ashamed. “I’m afraid I’m not very good at taking free time or having hobbies.”

“It’s never too late to learn, if you’re willing to.”

“Will you help me, Master?”  

“Always, Obi-Wan.” 

And that’s how Obi-Wan found himself Temple-bound for the first time in both of his lives with the simple order of just…enjoying himself. 

He still goes to his classes, teaches and trains. But more than that, he spends time with his friends, introduces them to Dex. He joins the Initiates and other Padawans in their mischief and helps them to play pranks. Obi-Wan reads and discovers his love for mandalorian novels - and when he shares that with Jaster, he receives lots of files with books the next day for him to enjoy. 

Obi-Wan meets by accident his friend Bail Organa too, in a museum. He was alone, not having planned to go there but since he wasn’t ready to return to the Temple yet, he decided to see the exhibition. He was happy to see his friend again and it was good to discover this aspect of him. In his other life, they only ever talked politics and had dinner together - sometimes joined by Breha. (Well, there were other things they did too, but that’s neither here nor there). 

They keep in touch after that and become fast friends again. He feels honored to be introduced to Breha again. If he ever gets invited to their wedding, he will go without thinking twice.

Bruck still manages to have anger issues from time to time and Obi-Wan helps him work off his steam at the dojos. They train until neither can stand without help. Sometimes, they talk too. Obi-Wan listens to Bruck and, when he’s feeling brave enough, he shares his emotions with his friend. 

There are other occasions when all his friends are free at the same time and they decide to just enjoy a lazy day together. Obi-Wan likes these days better than the others. It became a sort of tradition for them, to go to the Room of a Thousand Fountains in swimsuits and just lay down, or even be pulled in the water and swim. Master Plo always arranges for them to have take out or going out for dinner on those days: everyone joins. (Quin complains the entire time about watching Downtown Coruscant while Siri throws pillows at him to be quiet). 

Obi-Wan didn’t remember, much less know, that life at home could be so fun. He is glad his Masters didn’t let him go on their mission, he thinks that for the first time he is enjoying being a teenager and living in the moment.  

–.--

In the middle of all of this, Obi-Wan decides to present his idea to Master Plo about teaching. 

But first, he enjoys the time he has with his Master, training together on the dojos when they should be sleeping (because Master Plo is cool like that, and look, Obi-Wan is officially a teenager, with all the slangs ). 

He is showing Master Plo his new lightsaber form - still rough around the edges but he wants honest criticism so he can improve.

“This is impressive, Obi-Wan. I’ve never seen anything like it.” Master Plo says after he finishes the katas. “You said you are trying to unite your Soresu with Makashi and Vapaad?”

"That's the goal." He says. "Do you think I could do it?"

"Obi-Wan, I don't think you could do it." Master Plo says seriously. "You've already done it ."

"Oh."

"I could feel some discomfort through the bond. Are the katas not to your satisfaction yet?"

"Yeah, it's still unbalanced in some parts, I think. But then, it could be only me who is not used to it. What do you think?"

"I honestly couldn't tell if not for the bond. You looked like a true Master executing your katas." He praises. "I'm sure when you're feeling like you've finished improving the katas, very few Masters will be able to win against you in the dojos."

"Really?"

"Really, myself included in those left behind by your abilities. Now, would you like to test it?"

“Better out of three?” 

“Loser pays for our next dinner.” And that’s one of the things Obi-Wan loves about Master Plo - he likes playing sabacc and gambling . Well, all his Masters do. That makes Obi-Wan’s life very interesting.

So they duel. Sparring with Master Plo is always nice. He is a good teacher but when he is betting on something, he fights to win. Obi-Wan has lost count on how many times he lost money because of that. (Master Windu once said it was wrong to bet money against their own Padawan but Master Dooku bickered back telling him that it was a lesson in life - they argued for hours about it, and Obi-Wan and Master Plo casually escaped them to go watch a movie together).

It’s not even five minutes in and…Obi-Wan makes a movement that disarms his Master. He made it so naturally that both of them didn’t realize what happened until the saber was in Obi-Wan’s hand.

They start again. 

This time, Master Plo ends up cornered against the wall. 

The last time, Obi-Wan lets the fight drag on, relying on his Soresu, until he sees an opening and takes it, using his new form to overpower his Master.

He wins again.

Obi-Wan is not even tired. He’s not out of breath. He could go on and on for hours.

Master Plo is studying him.

“I think we’ll have to wait for your other Masters to come back so we can fight you together and test how you fare.” He concludes. “In this level, I fear one to one may be too easy for you. This new form is endurance against many trained Force users.”

Obi-Wan nods. “I didn’t think…In the war I had to fight for long hours and redirect many blaster shots and protect others but…never quite like this.”

“This is something else, isn’t it?” At his nod, Master Plo continues. “You are completely open to the Force, the katas it created using your body are a dance. A complicated, powerful dance. The Force sings around you when you use this form.”

“Ah, I hadn’t noticed that.”

His Master chuckles. “You are well on your way to become the best duelist in the Order. A few more years and I don’t believe even Master Yoda could beat you.”

“Oh.” 

“Come, let’s try again, we’re still not done.”

And so they face each other again and again, until Master Plo gives up in trying to keep up with him. The proud hug he feels in the Force coming from his Master is enough to leave Obi-Wan smiling for the rest of his day, even if he's got a headache from lack of sleep.

--.--

He almost forgets about his plans for teaching.

"You've been spending too much time on your holopad. Do I want to know what you're plotting?" 

"What? Me? Master, I'm offended you'd think I'm plotting something." 

They are sitting together in comfortable silence after a week full of activities. Master Plo is meditating and Obi-Wan is...well, plotting.

He feels a nudge coming from the bond and signs dramatically.

"Well... I wouldn't call it plotting, you see."

"Ah, so my Padawan admits he's been secretly making plans about…?"

Obi-Wan mumbles unintelligible words.

"What was that again, Obi-Wan?"

"Teaching." He finally says. "I want to add some things to our curriculum."

"Ah, I see. Is that because of your recently self appointed classes?" Master Plo asks. "I thought you were teaching the Initiates politics and history."

 "I am, and some Junior Padawans too."

"So what about it that prompted this intense research?"

"I just...they are so unprepared, Master. We don't teach about the Sith anymore, we don't talk about the Darkside and more importantly, we don't really give them options." He answers. "When I was an Initiate, I thought that the only path to become a Jedi was through Knighthood. Going to the Corps is seen as a failure. The Initiates are afraid of not being chosen. It's so much pressure on those so young."

A hmmm was all the response he heard from his Master. Then:

"Is that what really happens?" 

He nodded. "It shouldn't be like this, right? I'm not imagining things, am I? I just... I haven't thought about it before, there were so many things that went wrong and my education being one of them didn't even cross my mind."

"You are right, if things are like you said, then we have a serious problem in our hands." Master Plo envelopes him with the Force. "It's not your fault for not noticing, Obi-Wan. You were a child then. You are here now and we can change it."

"Alright." 

"Do you want to show me what you've been working on?"

He nods and moves to sit closer to Master Plo, giving him his holopad with his annotations.

Master Plo reads it all carefully, more than once in some parts. 

"You were very thorough, Obi-Wan. You should be proud of it."

"Thank you, Master."

"I think I may have an idea of how we can apply your ideas and reach more Jedi than what you initially thought."

"How?"

"Let me talk to a few members of the Council of the First Knowledge and then we can sort this together." He says.

"Alright, I can wait. I could add more details to what I'm planning to teach and a schedule."

"Good." His Master hands back his pad. "But Obi-Wan, make sure you're not sacrificing your health or grades because of this project, and I don't want you cutting out your free time either. You should have a balanced life and rest is included in it. If you have trouble adjusting your routine, I'm here to help you and we can carry the responsibility together."

"I know, Master. We're a team." 

The happy-proud-hug he receives is answer enough.

–.--

Master Plo manages to arrange an office for them. It’s only been a few days since he talked to him but his Master was quick to get things going. He shows it to Obi-Wan: two desks, one for Obi-Wan and another for him, as a supervisor.

“We’re going to create an entire department from the ground,” he explains, “and you and I are going to divide the lessons for Initiates, Padawans, Knights and Masters. The first two, you can teach them without my direct supervision but for those ranking above you, I’ll have to be present.”

“Alright. What can I put on the curriculum?”

“Every single topic you showed me. You’re going to be responsible for making a schedule of classes, choosing topics for the lessons and teaching. I will help you, as will your other Masters when they return. One of us will always be here to help you. Now, you are free to recruit more people to be part of your team and divide the workload.”

“Is there something I should be aware not to do?”

“Not exactly. I know you want to broach the topic of the Sith and I’m not against it but you should treat it carefully.” He warned him. “It’s not a topic Padawans usually know about and some more conservative members can have strong opinions about that.”

“I understand Master.”

“Let’s get to work, shall we?”

A few weeks later, Obi-Wan was ready to start his new classes. He was feeling like a true maverick (Master Jinn would be oddly proud of him). His Masters were back and they were discussing the final details of his new assignment.

“Well Padawan, now you only have to give a name to the course so we can submit to the systems and wait for people to enroll on it.”

Obi-Wan had a few ideas about what he wanted to call his new course. He decided to settle for something that would have made Anakin and Ahsoka proud of him, following their lineage tradition of being dramatic and openly defiant of the rules.

“I’m done, Masters.” He said, finishing typing and handing over his holopad for their final inspection and approval.

Master Dooku let out a full-bellied laugh when he read the name.

“What? What did you name it?” Master Windu asked, already taking the pad from Master Dooku’s hands. “ Obi-Wan .”

Master Plo, who was standing making tea, looked over his shoulder to read it. He chuckled.

“Ah, I believe it’s a fitting name, all things considered.” 

It was. 

Heretical Knowledge To Follow The Light 101.

2h/week

All levels

History, Politics, Lightsaber Combat.

Master Plo Koon, Master Yan Dooku, Master Mace Windu & Padawan Obi-Wan Kenobi.

–.--

“If I write a proposal to reform the Order, would you help me present it to the Council?” He asks his Masters one day.

His lessons had just started last week and to their surprise, a lot more Jedi had subscribed than what they were counting on. The High Council and the Council of the First Knowledge hadn’t liked the name not even a bit. But they had presented evidence that what they were teaching wasn’t exactly heretical, per se - just highly unconventional and mostly forgotten through the passage of time. 

“Have you ever thought of becoming a creche Master, Padawan?” Master Dooku asked him after accompanying him in his first week (they decided on a system of rotation between themselves - whomever Obi-Wan stayed the week with would be responsible for helping him with his lessons and they would discuss whatever problems they found along the way). “Or one of the permanent Instructors?”

“I have, Master.” Obi-Wan had told him, smiling sadly. “I love teaching and being a Master, but I can’t, not when so much is going to happen and I have to help prepare us for what’s coming.”

“I see. Perhaps one day then.”

“Perhaps.” 

And that had been the end of that conversation but even with just a few lessons to teach each week, Obi-Wan was left feeling more hopeful than ever. That was why he decided to ask about reforming the Order.    

“Of course we would, Padawan.” Master Dooku says, bringing him back to the present. “I’ve been waiting for this day since we braided your hair for the first time.”

Of course he has. Master Dooku is almost heretical by the Council’s standards - no correction, he is heretical but with that green troll as his Master, no one dared to say anything about it.

“Remind me again how such an heretical Jedi is still in the Council, Master? Oh no, I forgot, it must be Master Yoda’s influence, no other explanation.” He jokes.  

“Careful, young one. Grandmaster Yoda can still make your life difficult if he hears you sassing his favorite former Padawan like this.”

“What would he even do? Put me on creche duty? I love to help there. Discuss philosophies with me? I may not have read more books than him but I was trained as a diplomat, I know how to talk in circles back to him.”

“That you do, don’t you?” Master Windu says. “How many times have you discussed with Master Yoda?”

“A lot, usually over his delicious swamp soup during dinner.” 

“Ah, I have heard of that soup.” 

“You don’t want to try it, Master Plo.” Obi-Wan makes a face. “I fear it's only for Yoda's species.”

“That it is. I don’t have fond memories of that particular lineage tradition.” Master Dooku says. “And what kind of reforms are you planning to propose, Obi-Wan?”

“I’m glad you asked, Master.” He says, smirking.

“Wait. Before you start telling your ideas, is it going to cause shatterpoints?” 

“Yes.”

“I’ll remember to take more medicine from the Halls when we go to present it.”

Obi-Wan smiles and retrieves his holopad from his bedroom to begin. 

–.--

“Obi-Wan…”

“This is…”

“... a karking shatterpoint . Actually, everything you do is. I don’t know why I keep expecting otherwise.”

“I know.” He says, after explaining his ideas. He had come prepared - with his proposals already written and arguments ready, data and information gathered and presented. For each protest from his Masters, Obi-Wan had at least three arguments of why his idea was justified and necessary, he had history by his side too, making references to many old books that probably not even Master Nu knew they had in the Archives. “What do you think?”

He is excited. This was the first time he had won a debate against his three Masters. 

“I think we all should personally consult the books you referenced in the Archives.” Master Dooku said. “Your research is very thorough and if the Council were quicker to change, I don’t believe they could find objections that sustained themselves against your arguments.”

Obi-Wan glows at the praise. 

“How long have you been writing this?” Master Windu asks. “You couldn’t have written it overnight.”

“Ever since I came here I started working on it. I had your access code to justify my entries at the Archives but I was always careful to not get caught. So in my spare time I wrote it.”

“It’s impressive, Obi-Wan. And very concerning too.”

“I didn’t know the situation was that dire.”

“It shouldn’t be but we know that a grand part of this was planned. The other, well, the Code limits much of what we could be.” 

Master Windu rubs his forehead. “When do you want to present it?”

“I was planning on doing it as soon as you approved it.”

“We will schedule an audience, then.” Master Plo says. “Do you want help to present it?”

“No, I can do it. But…well, I think I’ll leave the bond open just in case.” 

Obi-Wan’s been working on leaving his mind open for his Masters. The feelings of support coming from them is enough to help him on difficult days. He feels more warm than cold nowadays, and lighter, so, so much lighter. 

Master Plo offers him a double hug, physical and with his signature. Obi-Wan accepts both. 

“We’re proud of you, little one.” 

The nickname still makes him blush but he likes it. Makes him feel…

“Thank you, Masters.”

–.--

He is nervous when he enters the Council chambers. It’s not every day that a Padawan requests an audience to talk about changing the Order’s dogmas and beliefs. His Masters are there but they don’t stand with him. Instead, they sit in their chairs, offering support through the bonds.

This is not their battle to fight, it’s Obi-Wan’s. And they’ll be there watching him change the course of history with proud expressions on their faces the whole time. 

“Requested an audience, Padawan Kenobi did,” Master Yoda says, starting the session, “hear you this Council will.”

Obi-Wan bows. “Thank you, Master Yoda.”

He looks at each counselor and prays to the Force that his words get through them.

“I found deeply troubling datas regarding our Order Masters, and I composed a report for you in the hopes that we can improve our standing in the galaxy.”

Obi-Wan stands there, for hours, explaining what he collected in the Archives. He begins explaining the wrong visions many planets and systems have about the Jedi, of how they became legends and myths on the Outer Rim and political tools on corrupt hands of politicians. 

He shows them all the data he collected: ever since the Ruusan Reformation, the mission requests made by the Senate started giving more and more attention to matters closer to Core planets and the number of missions that were lacking information or provided wrong data gradually increased - until the present, where almost all missions go wrong and no one notices that something is wrong because it became the new normal, when it’s not. 

Obi-Wan follows that topic with another closely related: with so many missions going wrong, the number of Jedi dying on the field because of it is high and it would not be so noticable if their numbers weren’t already so low.

He explains how many Temples they used to inhabit and how many their numbers of Knights, Masters and Initiates, as well as Jedi from other branches, the Corps, were. He shows them the slow death the Order’s been suffering because of their own limiting acceptance of Force users, lack of support from the Republic, and their own inability to be self-sufficient. 

He finishes laying bare the problems and concerns he has, then Obi-Wan chooses this moment to propose a brief break to eat and drink while the Masters can process what he just told them. They agree and an hour later, he faces them again, this time with many concerned faces, worry permeating their signatures. 

This is his chance now to present his reforms - just after making them realize just how close the Jedi are to being extinct. 

He does just that. 

He explains the ancient Code and how changing it, although for a good reason, ceased to accomplish its purpose and is now causing more harm than good for them. He references how the Order used to treat families and older Force users and attachment - especially Falling.

He mentions the other branches that existed with other interpretations of the Code, the Gray Jedi, that used both sides of the Force for good and how many philosophies and studies they had today are just because of their research. 

Obi-Wan proposes actual changes: in the Code, in their teachings and the way they serve and treat the Republic. His ideas are of gradual but constant modifications happening all at once. He explains that Jedi aren’t raised from infancy to serve and die for governments. No, they are taught to serve the Force, the Light, and its purpose. The Republic doesn’t represent that anymore and they are in debt with the galaxy because of that stagnation.

He quotes their vows they made when they became Knights to follow the Will of the Force and dedicate their lives to serve the Light. He ends his proposals saying:

“If we don’t change, our future is at stake. History shows that when the Jedi have become stagnant for too long, the Dark have tilted the balance towards their side. We can already feel that happening. Outside the Temple, the galaxy grows darker and hopeless. The Light is being extinguished. It is time for us to change.”

The Force rings true inside the chambers, loud and insistent at the Masters sitting. It surrounds Obi-Wan and whispers for them to listen to him, to trust him and follow his path. It’s the last of many shocking revelations of the day. The Masters are speechless. 

Obi-Wan sends them his complete report and bows, thanking them for their time. Before leaving, he turns back to them and says:

“I put my trust in this Council to guide us through the Light’s path.”  

And he exits the chamber, feeling his Masters approval like a river of water - refreshing and soothing. 

–.--

A few days later and they all have a free day to spend together. The Council decided to take time to investigate all the data gathered by Obi-Wan and he knows they’ll have a lot of headaches about it - they'll have to search on so many books (Master Nu is going to have a stroke with so many people disorganizing her precious Archives). 

His Masters are confident that the simple action of giving his proposal time to verify the sources before discussing the matter is a positive point in Obi-Wan’s favor. He agrees. Maybe this time around they’ll be ready for Sidious.

Since they are free and all on planet, Master Plo proposes training together in the dojos, meaning he wants to test Obi-Wan’s new lightsaber form to its limits.

“What katas are those?” Master Windu asks. “I don’t remember ever seeing them before.”

“They’re new,” Master Plo replies before Obi-Wan can, “he’s been trying to unify his Soresu with your forms.”

Master Windu observes attentively to his movements, studying him.

“This looks terribly complicated but if you can actually pull this off...”

“You’d be lethal,” Master Dooku has a dangerous glint in his eyes that Obi-Wan learned to read as excitement for a new challenge over the years, “and unstoppable.”

“That’s the goal.” Obi-Wan says, still warming up. “I have to create something new if I intend to face Sidious or his Master.”

“Obi-Wan, you won’t be alone for that.”

“I know but it’s better to be prepared. They are not to be underestimated.” He finishes his warming up, and positions himself in the first instance. “I need to be able to fight you all if I want to think about stopping Sidious. Don’t hold back.”

His Masters nod and attack him.

They train for hours. Obi-Wan is ridiculously skilled in Soresu, the endurance form, and he transferred this aspect to his own form. His movements are economic, although graciously brutal. His defense is unbreachable and he dances while facing three Jedi Masters.

Soon, there is a crowd forming around them, Masters, Padawans and Initiates pause to watch Padawan Kenobi holding on his own against the best duelists on the Order. The news spread and some Masters started bringing their classes to watch the fight, which is getting longer and longer and shows no signs of actually stopping any time soon. 

Obi-Wan can feel eyes on him, analyzing his form, judging his instance. Some are making bets about the results. He slips into the Force and lets it complete his movements, take control of his dance and predict their attacks. 

He senses, so deeply attuned as he is, the tiredness emanating from Master Windu and he knows exactly when he switches forms to regain his breath. When Master Plo guides him to make a mistake, he goes forward and springs the trap to his advantage. And when Master Dooku engages him one on one, trying to distract him from his other opponents, he is quick to disarm him and take him out of the fight.

The audience makes silence at that. Did you see that? Obi-Wan just disarmed Master Dooku! How did he do it? Where did he learn that form? Is what they murmur, intrigued by his skills.

The fight comes to a break, his Masters waiting on him to decide what he's going to do. Obi-Wan weighs his Master Dooku’s blade on his hand. The song is different from his own kyber’s but he fought many times before with Anakin’s and he knows Jar’Kai. He comes to a decision then.

He ignites the blade, and assumes a Jar’Kai opening to the surprise and shock of his Masters and their audience.

Obi-Wan is one with the Force and the Force is with him.

His new form mixes with the Jar’Kai katas and he doesn’t fault his balance, he retracts his own saber’s to act as shoto blade and attacks. The Force guides his steps and he is invincible like this, impossible to predict and quick to change instances and confuse his opponents. 

He ends up outlasting them both, striking down when they least expect him to, disarming them and pointing two swords to their chests.

“Solah.” Master Windu says, sweat running down on his face and a smile on his lips.

Obi-Wan lowers the lightsabers and bows to them. 

“I wasn’t aware you knew Jar’Kai, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku says, approaching them again since the duel is over now. 

“I helped teach Ahsoka the form.” He answers, returning the lightsaber to his rightful owner.

“It appears we have gathered an audience.” Master Plo says.

“I’m going to be the talk of the Temple for days again, am I not?” 

“Well, it’s a good thing we included lightsaber lessons in your classes. I think after this demonstration, your students will enjoy learning it from you.” Master Dooku says.

Obi-Wan is going to reply to that when they feel Master Yoda approaching, alongside other Masters.

“A duel like this, in many years I haven’t seen.” He says. “Curious your lightsaber form, it is. Seen it before, I have not.”

“It’s new, Master Yoda.” Obi-Wan replies. “I am unifying my Masters’ forms with Soresu.”

Master Yoda’s old eyes pierce into his own. 

“Attempts like this common are not.”

“It’s impressive, Padawan Kenobi.” Master Gallia compliments him. “Are you planning to teach it in your classes?”

“I don’t know. I had to learn three forms to create it, and Vapaad is not for everyone.”

“I see. Well, after this I imagine you’re going to have to open more spots for new students.”

Obi-Wan smiles. “Wasn’t my intention but I can’t complain, Master Gallia.”

She smiles back and gives space to others to talk to him.

Obi-Wan, as predicted, becomes the talk of the Temple after that. Master Dooku has an idea about his sudden good popularity.

“Why don’t you open a challenge?” He suggests over dinner. “You submit it in the holonet of the Temple and anyone can issue a challenge against you so they can test their abilities and you can become more confident in your form. And you can choose to decline or accept it.”

“Weren’t challenges something we stopped doing for a hundred years or so?”

“It’s out of fashion, yes, but I think it’s a great opportunity for you to practice with more people than just us. We never had the problem before because your skills weren’t of a Padawan’s and we were teaching you forms that few use, but now there’s little else we could offer you as a challenge to your current level.”

“You think I need to expand my horizons.”

“Yes. And who knows? Maybe even Grandmaster Yoda decides to test you.” 

“I don’t remember ever seeing Master Yoda at the dojos training. He just takes the Initiates there.”

“Exactly, Padawan.” Master Dooku says conspiratory. “And I know my Master, he was curious about your new form.”

“Do you think I have a chance against him?”

“I do. If you open yourself to the Force as you did when we fought, you have a great chance against him. No one listens more to the Force than Yoda in this Temple. Except you, perhaps.” 

“Alright, I’ll think about it, Master.” 

Master Dooku’s lips twitch upwards.

–.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

Obi-Wan wakes up thrashing on his bed, fevered and sweat soaking his tunics. He gets up and barely makes it to the fresher before emptying his stomach. 

Master Windu is by his side in an instant, rubbing circles on his back and murmuring a few calming words to him. When he is certain that Obi-Wan won’t pass out, he goes to the kitchen and brings back a glass filled with water for him, which he accepts gratefully. 

Obi-Wan is a mess after it. He rinses his mouth but he is still shaking. It has been a long time since he had a vision, and one so intense as that. As an Initiate he was prone to having them, his connection to the Cosmic Force making it easier to lose himself to the flux of possible futures. With his apprenticeship to Master Jinn he learned to dismiss them and ground himself in the present, although his bad feelings never really stopped making themselves known to him.

Now he is afraid of what that could possibly mean. It was, as everything in his life, quite terrible (well, at least in his previous one it used to be). 

“A vision?” Master Windu asks him, while he guides Obi-Wan to bed. 

He nods, exhausted.

“I’ll make some tea.” And he leaves, but his presence continues to surround Obi-Wan gently.

Master Windu gives him tea, a herbal scent that he drinks after a particularly nasty shatterpoint (meaning Obi-Wan altering the future) causes him a headache. Obi-Wan drinks it slowly, feeling numb. When he finishes, Master Windu checks his temperature again to see if the fever persists but thankfully not, and he stays with Obi-Wan until he falls asleep again.

Obi-Wan’s relief lasts very little. The next night, he dreams of it again, and the night after that too. 

Master Windu offers to meditate with him after the second time. Together they try to see the vision but they can’t find it. Obi-Wan knows it was one, all the signs from the Force there, but his memories are murky and when they try to grasp it, it simply vanishes.

“This is strange,” Master Windu comments, a frown in his expression, “do you have any theories?”

“Planted?” 

“Do you think someone put a vision in your mind? With your shields? I don’t think so, it’s not impossible but very improbable.” His Master says. “Have you been alone recently?” 

“Just the usual, I went to buy mandalorian food for us and Dex’s. I don’t wander around Coruscant, Master. This is the least safe planet to wander alone with the exception of perhaps the Trade Federation.” He pauses, an idea occurring to him.

“What is it, Obi-Wan?”

“I need to meditate more.” 

“We didn’t find anything-”

“No, and we won’t. I’m not going deeply enough. If I can enter the currents of the Cosmic Force I can see what is trying to show me.” 

“This is dangerous, you could not return.”

“Oh, I will, Master. Don’t worry.” He says. “I’ll need you to ground me to my physical body so I can find my way back but otherwise, I should be unharmed by the experience.”

“You could be lost in the currents of time itself, Obi-Wan.”

“Well, time is a relative concept in the Force, isn’t it? Besides,” he says confidently, “I know my way around the Force.”

“Are you sure?” 

“I am. Come on, we should eat and be comfortable before I start. This could take a while.”

When they finally sit down to meditate, Obi-Wan lets his mind slip past the barriers that unify his spirit to his body, becoming the luminous being he knows he is. He finds himself admiring the beauty of the currents of the Force - he could spend days here, studying and becoming one with it. But this is not his goal for today. 

He has a mission and he won’t lose his focus. He searches within all that makes his being…well, himself. He finds none of the traces of the vision. This is strange. Is it possible that it’s not inside himself and instead he is feeling another’s vision?

But where would he start looking for it?

He looks around the flow of energy that binds the galaxy together, laid out before his eyes and-

There.

Not someone’s vision then.

What is that?

He moves freely there. Is it a planet? It’s difficult to tell shapes and places here. 

The planet feels cold and dark in the Force. The Darkside is active and eager to spread evil throughout the galaxy. So it wasn’t a vision, it was a warning. Something is happening on a Sith planet. Now if Obi-Wan could only discover what planet is this…

Korriban. Darth Plagueis.

Obi-Wan shivers. 

It can’t be. Korriban is home to bones and ashes of ancient Sith. An Empire came from there.

Korriban. Darth Plagueis.

It’s a warning, a premonition. Obi-Wan doesn’t want to think about what could happen if he ignores it. 

He decides to get closer, see what his limits are here, if he can find out more about what Darth Plagueis is doing on that cursed planet.

It’s nothing good. The sense of death makes Obi-Wan flinch even though he can’t be affected by it, not in the Force’s domains. But more than death and anger and unspeakable alchemy, this place reeks of something much worse, something unnatural and prohibited, beyond the natural laws of the Force.

Invisible as he is, Obi-Wan is still careful to check if his presence is hidden from the Sith. He lets his conscience become tainted by the Darkside here, not daring to announce himself as a presence of Light. 

What he sees doesn’t even begin to fill his worst nightmares and anxieties. 

Creation of life. Distorted, corrupted and tainted life. With the only purpose of spreading evil. Of course ancient Sith corps would be used to that unsacred means.

Obi-Wan is horrified. He would be disgusted too if he were still in a physical form.

He doesn’t sense much more beyond this, it’s incredibly difficult to with the Force screaming and bending like this, harmed. Approaching the Sith carefully, he takes notice of his appearance and every other detail that could tell him more about his plans and machinations. There are books written in the Sith alphabet and Obi-Wan can read a few words of it but nothing substantial that would make sense. He gathers this is the formula used to resurrect the bodies. 

If he wasn’t trying to be discreet, he could manifest as a ghost and actually take the book and read it or take it back to the Temple. But he doesn’t need at this point in his life to be noticed by this Sith Master. 

Oh yes, because this is certainly Sidious’ Master. 

He feels even more powerful than Sidious ever did when he revealed himself. Well, if he has the power to create life, he isn’t to be underestimated.

Obi-Wan observes and observes. A silent watcher, gathering information on whatever signs and clues he sees. When he remembers he still has a physical body to return to, he leaves, knowing that he could seriously die if he remains here.

He’ll return later. He has to.

–.--

Obi-Wan takes a while to find himself again, where he is and where he should be going - there are so many places and times where he can feel that needs his help or even that awakens his curiosity. He becomes distracted more than once and it’s only when he senses three meditations occurring together, intent clear of calling out his name through the Force that he finds his way back to his time. What he sees upon his return are his Masters’ worried faces, sitting around his body, waiting for him to wake up - their intense meditation must have left them tired. How long have they been calling him back?. 

Ah blast , how much time did he spend in Korriban?

He could surprise them, he thinks, since he’s already like this and he doesn’t know exactly how much time will take for him to return to his body (it should be possible, theoretically, or else he is a permanent ghost from now on). Manifest as a ghost for them - wouldn’t that be funny?

“Hello there.”

He hears three surprised yelps. 

“Obi-Wan!” Master Windu is up in an instant. 

“How long have I been gone?” Being a ghost is a difficult job. 

“You- what-”

“I’m a ghost, yes.” He gestures to himself, glowing and nonmaterial. “Luminous beings we are, not this crude matter. Didn’t you know? Master Yoda said that.”

He laughs at their expressions of horror.

“Did you- are you dead?” Master Plo asks, not quite daring to touch him on where he’s sitting beside them.

“Well…that depends,” Master Windu sits slowly next to him, warily, “of how long has passed since I slipped into the Force. It’s difficult to grasp time on this side.”

“Two days, Padawan,” Master Windu says, reproachfully but Obi-Wan can see the concern in his eyes. “I called them here when you wouldn’t wake up after a few hours.”

“ Hmm ,” he rubs his chin (where his beard should be but isn’t yet), “then I guess I’m not dead. At least not by your concepts.”

“Do you- Are you-” Master Plo tries but fails to make a question. Obi-Wan waits patiently for him to order his thoughts. “Can you interact in this…form?” 

“You mean touch things and people or use the Force?” At his Master’s nod, he answers by demonstrating. Obi-Wan extends his hand to him and waits, an encouraging smile on.

Not just Master Plo but Master Windu and Master Dooku touch him, at first as if afraid of the feeling, then more confidently, squeezing his arm and hand.

“You feel…”

“As if I am made of Light?” He jokes. “Well, I have to inform you that I am.”

Just to mess with them, he ceases to be material , and their hands pass through him. He laughs at their shocked expressions. 

“This isn’t funny, Obi-Wan.” Master Windu complains. 

“I’m sorry, I couldn’t resist Master.” He says, not feeling sorry at all. “As for using the Force, I still can but it’s different from when I have a physical body.”

“What changes?” Master Windu asks, holding his hand again.

“Well, it’s easier, for starters.” If he could blush, he’s certain he would be right now. Somehow, his Masters are still able to tell his embarrassment. At their curious expressions, he explains: “I’m the Force, technically.”

“You’ll have to explain it better if you want us to understand, Padawan.” Master Dooku says.

“I ah, you know…are there limits to the Force? Is it finite?” 

“No…” Master Plo answers slowly, “Obi-Wan, what are you saying exactly?”

“I am myself Master, but I am also the Force. I’m part of it when I'm like this. So, if the Force doesn’t have limitations…”

“You don’t have too.” Master Windu finishes.

He nods, still projecting his awkwardness. "Technically, I can’t Fall either. I prefer the Light, obviously, but the Force is Dark and Light, I can use either and still be myself if I wish to. But please don’t tell Master Yoda that, he’ll have a stroke if he hears me saying that.”

Master Plo snorts. “I doubt he would be concerned about you saying you can use the Darkside while looking like this, Padawan.”

He shrugs. 

“Are you going to return to your body?” Master Dooku asks eventually, after they have poked and prodded him and convinced themselves Obi-Wan is really here, and he is alive and well.

“Yes, I intend to. It’s just- It’s been so long and here is so peaceful. I miss it here.” 

“Obi-Wan…”

“I know. I don’t actually have a death wish, you know? Alright, hang on a little, I’ve never tried the reverse process before.”

“You what-?”

But he doesn’t wait for the question, disappearing and focusing on his sense of physicality. Finding the barriers he broke to arrive on this side and reconstruct them. He slowly manages to repair the damage he’d done to his body by ripping his spirit apart from his body before its time. 

When he next opens his eyes, he is in a body again, tired but alive and well. Master Windu is pulling him to his chest in a blink of an eye.

“Don’t you dare to scare us ever like that again, Padawan.” Even though he had been right there with them just a few moments ago and had assured them he was okay, his Masters are projecting their concerns at him. It would be overwhelming if it wasn’t comforting to know how much they care about him.

He laughs. “I may need to, you know. But don’t worry, I figured out how to cross the barriers so next time I probably won’t be gone for long.”

“This is so strange.” Master Plo says. “I never thought I would see a ghost in my life, least of all of you.”

“What can I say, I’m a Jedi of many talents.”

“This is what you’ve been teaching us?” Master Dooku asks him.

Master Windu lets him go only for him to be enveloped by Master Plo in turn.

“Yes. It’s not easy though. I was being serious when I told you had to let go , only then your training will be complete. But maybe you can do it faster than my two decades. After all, a Master always wishes for his students to be better than them.”

Master Plo chuckled. “I think today’s experience was enough of ghosts for a while, little one. Some of us can’t take the fright.”

He agrees and promptly lets out a yawn. Master Windu collects warm tea and dinner for him.

“I think traveling through the Force left me tired.” He says. “Ghosts don’t get tired but this body certainly does.”

“Did you find your vision?” Master Windu asks.

Between bites he answers: “Worse.”

“What happened?”

“It wasn’t a vision. It’s a warning.” He drinks more tea before continuing- just to be interrupted by Master Dooku.

“I think we can continue this tomorrow, Padawan.” His Master says gently. “We are all tired from the last two days and you have responsibilities in the morning.” 

Obi-Wan agrees. His Master is right, as usual. He is rather tired from the experience and a night of sleep, going back to his routine and meditating tomorrow might do him some good before sharing what he discovered with them. 

He finishes eating and bids them goodnight before retiring for the evening. When he lays down, Obi-Wan sleeps untroubled.

The evening of the next day is when they reunite again to talk. Obi-Wan is in the middle of an assignment when his Masters arrive, done with their own obligations for the day. They drink tea together and wait with small talk while he is doing his homework. When he finishes - the dreadful assignment of astronavigation - he puts his lessons in his bedroom and joins them on the table. 

Obi-Wan brings a pad with him and sits down, accessing the Archives with Master Windu’s password. He searches through the Sith texts they have until he can find one that has translations.

“What are you looking for, Obi-Wan?”

“The date. Oh, here it is.” He does the math, converting the calendars and then double checks it again in his mind. “I saw the future yesterday.”

“Alright. Why don’t you explain from the beginning.”

“When I joined the Force, I found out that it wasn’t a vision, it was the Force literally screaming, corrupted, that’s why there were no images to my dreams, only terrible feelings. So I followed the source of that pain.”

“Simple as that?” 

“Yes. The concepts of time and space there are blurred, everything is happening at the same time so it’s easy to navigate its currents.” He explains. “I ended up crossing the galaxy and…arriving in Korriban.”

“Korri- Obi-Wan, that’s a Sith planet!” Master Windu reprimanded. “We don’t go in there.”

“I quite agree on that. The planet was even worse than I remember from the Clone Wars. I was careful to mix myself in the Darkside so my Light couldn’t be felt.” He hesitates. “I…I think it’s better if I share with you the next part.”

They don't question the tense way in which he holds his body before entering the meditation with them. Obi-Wan projects what he's seen: Darth Plagueis creating life, his notes and the feeling of the planet in the realm of the Force.

“This is…” Master Dooku is unusually without words.

“Yes, my thoughts exactly.” He says dryly. “Our only advantage is that I can go back there and investigate more, go on undetected and we know it’s still not happening in the present. The date is still a few years forward. So we have time to prepare.”

“How can you be so calm about that?”

“Oh, believe me, I’m not. But ever since I’ve got here, I started making changes. Master Dooku never Fell, the mandalorians are on our side and armies aren’t being created. I have to believe that what we’ll do will change things for the better.” He says firmly. “I refuse to believe I’ve been given a second chance just to be doomed to fail since the beginning.”

His Masters reach him in their bonds and Obi-Wan shares his strength with them. They have to believe or else their lives are meaningless. 

“We’ll continue monitoring whatever Plagueis is doing on Korriban and prepare accordingly.” He tells them. “We’ll win this fight. We won’t let the Darkside take over the galaxy this time.”

–.--

Obi-Wan decides to take upon Master Dooku’s suggestion and open a Challenge on the holonet of the Temple. He is a little nervous because it’s been a while since he sparred with someone who wasn't his Masters or close friends. Now that he has the opportunity, he feels like an Initiate on a Tournament trying to prove himself.

It doesn’t help that he catches Master Dooku teaming up with Master Plo about it. 

–.--

Obi-Wan was going to meet them in the Room of a Thousand Fountains to meditate but what he saw made him pause and hide himself from view. 

Master Plo and Master Dooku talking to other Jedi Masters and Knights - nothing unusual in that, they had a lot of obligations and responsibilities and Obi-Wan knew his Masters’ time had to be shared with many others besides himself.

But then a discreet move, too quick and precise, from one of the Masters catched his eyes. 

Wait, that was Master Tahl.

And she was…passing credits to Master Dooku?

What?

Oh, no. 

They were making bets, weren’t they. About the Challenge in the upcoming week. Obi-Wan knew Master Plo was incorrigible with his tendency of betting his credits but to see Master Dooku by his side, helping him organize it…

Did Master Windu know?

No, silly question. Of course he didn’t. He would never allow it. 

Well, Obi-Wan had three options: he could tell Master Windu about it and end their fun; he could also collect evidence and use it for blackmail in a convenient opportunity later or he could enter the pool and earn a few credits himself.

A part of him - the Jedi Master who sat on the Council - told him it was wrong and set a bad example for others if he was ever caught. Another part, the one who raised Anakin and dealt with him and Ahsoka and their blatantly disregard for rules on a daily basis for three years, thought it would be hilarious to win all the bets if he could and become rich (by Jedi standards). 

The teenager inside him agreed with the last one and won.

Now he only had to find someone to bet in his name and offer a share of his profits. 

That was a problem. Who would help him?

Oh. He knew someone who could do that. Someone who had a distinct reputation and happened to have a soft spot for him.

“Late it is, sleeping you should be Padawan.” 

“Master, I need your help.” 

“ Hmmf . Come inside you may. Good reason you must have.”

Obi-Wan entered Master Yoda’s quarters. Both sat facing each other. 

“You know I submitted a Challenge in our holonet?” At Master Yoda’s nod he continued. “The thing is, there are some Masters making bets about it.”

The troll said nothing but from his careful blank expression, Obi-Wan knew his Grandmaster was more than aware of it - he probably had already bet some credits himself.

“I was wondering, Grandmaster, if you wouldn’t be interested in betting on my name.” Obi-Wan said, aiming for a tone of nonchalantly. 

He was pleased to see the troll’s eyes widening and his ears rising up. Good.

“ Hmmf . Involved in such things you shouldn’t be.” 

“But Master Yoda, how am I supposed to learn how to administer my allowance if I can’t do it in a safe environment?”

Ha . He had come prepared and the troll stood no chance against his compelling arguments.

Master Yoda shook his head in exasperation. 

“Incorrigible you are, just like your Masters.” He told Obi-Wan but his tone was already defeated (he hadn’t really tried that much). “If betting on your name I will, a share of the winnings I demand.”

“Of course, Master. I hope I’m buying your ignorance too if we’re doing this.” He said with a smirk. “Now, what do you say about twenty percent?”

–.--

Obi-Wan invites Jaster and Jango to the Challenge - and asks if they want to make bets (with the promise of denying who made it for them). The Mand’alor can’t come, unfortunately - something about the New Mandalorians and politics - but he lets Jango come if he wants to.

Better than that, he transfers to Obi-Wan the credits (a lot of them - and does everyone he knows like to bet?) and tells him to bet it all on himself. 

“I know you, Ob’ika. You won’t lose.” The faith Jaster has in him is so great that it reaches the point of it being ridiculous.

Jango brings along his sister, Arla, and Myles. 

The sum of credits they place on Master Yoda’s table is so high that Obi-Wan knows he’ll be settled for the rest of his Padawan days with it.

“Rich friends you have, Grandpadawan.” Master Yoda comments, still trying to regain his composure.

“Well, I got lucky with them, don’t you think?.” 

His Grandmaster just hits him with his stick while he laughs.

The day of the Challenge comes and the requests he receives form a long list and he spends it whipping out the floor off his fellow Jedi. Jango, Arla and Myles are sitting with Master Yoda and a bunch of younglings who begged their Crechemasters to see “Obi-Wan being an awesome Jedi”. It is nice to have a crowd cheering for him - especially if they are the younglings he helps to take care of in the Creche. 

By far, the only ones making loud noises are his mandalorians friends and the younglings. The rest of the Jedi present are pretending to be serene and analytical - Obi-Wan knows that the Battlemaster arranged for it to be recorded with the excuse of “saving knowledge for future generations” - he would believe him if Master Yoda had not told him that Master Drallig had bet an exorbitant amount of credits on himself and in other Masters, and recording the entire thing will serve as proof for when he collects his credits.

Obi-Wan faces the Master Drallig after lunch (the list was so long that they had to take a break to eat. It seems like the entire Jedi Order was present to see Obi-Wan fight). Fighting against their most experienced and knowledgeable Master in lightsaber forms is exciting and a real challenge for him. 

In the Force, many Jedi cheer for him (and he almost laughs at that. Jedi are truly ridiculous) and Obi-Wan imagines that must’ve been how Anakin felt when he was showing off on the dojos. 

Until now, he is winning without difficulties. His new form is a powerful tool against Force users. After losing with grace, Master Tahl suggests that Obi-Wan faces more than one Jedi at once. Master Windu, who is supervising the Challenge, with Obi-Wan’s approval, accepts and starts calling two Knights at once, three, and even Masters and Knights together.

At some point, between water breaks, Obi-Wan returns to face six Masters - including Master Tholme, who is smiling as if he was dragged along for it at the last minute. He looks at the crowd and sees his friends with the mandalorians, discussing his chances. His eyes meet Quinlan’s and his friend says, almost shouting, “you can do it, Obi-Wan!”

He laughs, his friends are crazy. 

He holds his ground against them, expertly standing in the same place to conserve his energy. The duel lasts a long time, with him opting to not chase them. But then he starts to get hungry again and Obi-Wan decides to finish it while they are expecting defensive blocks and no attacks from him.

A chorus composed of Jango, Arla, Myles, Quinlan and Garen’s voices shouting, “wizard!” marks the end of that duel.

Obi-Wan goes to his friends to eat on his break, while the Jedi watching start talking to themselves, commenting about the credits lost, his skills and making new bets. 

“Ob’ika that was totally wizard.” Arla tells him. “I mean, buir said you could fight but I wasn’t expecting this.”

“Obi is awesome!” Quin declares. “Good thing that Master Tholme bet on him.”

“Wait. Are you saying your Master bet against himself?” Bruck asks.

“Technically, he made a bet for me and I knew Obi here would win.”

“I’ve never seen a more disloyal Padawan than you, Quin.” Siri laughs. “What face did Master Tholme make when you asked him to bet?”

“Ha, he laughed and told me that if he won, I would have extra duties in the archives for a month.” He says. “I’m so glad I did it. Now I’m a rich Jedi.”

“I think we all are.” Myles adds. “We should go out and celebrate after this is over.”

“Spend the credits like there’s no tomorrow.” Jango agrees.

“You guys go ahead. When I’m done here, I want my credits, a shower and my bed, in this order.”

“You’re no fun, Obi!” 

“On the contrary, Garen. I think my rest will be well deserved.” He winks. 

“What about tomorrow?” Bant asks. “You guys will still be here, right? And Obi can come with us.”

“Skipping classes to spend credits? Sith Hells I’m in.” Quin declares, laughing. “Whatever punishment my Master can come up with will be worth it.”

Jango laughs. “Well, I suppose we could delay our return for a few hours.” 

They all turn to Obi-Wan, expectantly.

“Alright, I’ll join.” (And he doesn’t mention that he has already planned to take tomorrow off and won’t be skipping any classes). “Gotta go now.”

“Good luck!” They shout at him. 

Obi-Wan knows there is no such thing as luck but as it is, he feels confident that he can beat his challengers. He does just that for the next hour or so, and all is going well, until… 

…the next Master presents himself to spar with Obi-Wan.  

Obi-Wan freezes at the sight of him.

Qui-Gon Jinn.

Obi-Wan’s former Master. 

He doesn’t know Obi-Wan - just in passing by and because they are lineage brothers. Master Jinn is never on planet long enough to have dinner with them (Obi-Wan has the distinct impression that Master Dooku and Master Jinn aren’t on best terms either), although Obi-Wan knows for sure that he was invited more than once. 

Memories of his apprenticeship with his Master flows through Obi-Wan like waves and the grief of them, the sadness and longing are suffocating. He’s thrown out of balance just by looking at him. This man was everything to a young Obi-Wan, and he rejected him, taught him to be the man Obi-Wan is now and then left him all alone again, barely Knighted and with a child to take care of.

He misses him and he wished he could have a few harsh, well-deserved words with that man. But he can’t, his Master isn't alive anymore and all that’s left of his memory is this shadow of him, standing in front of Obi-Wan, lightsaber drawn in an opening stance of Ataru.

Feeling a light brush of concern on his mind from Master Windu, Obi-Wan sends back resolution-calmness he doesn’t feel back to him and lets go of his emotions, forcing his mind to enter a battle meditation. He will let the Force guide him when his emotions fail to bring him stability. 

They start and Master Jinn is relentless in his blows, jumping and moving faster than is naturally possible, aided by the Force. He tries to be quick and overwhelm Obi-Wan. With a mask of serenity that doesn't reflect his inner conflicts, Obi-Wan meets him blow for blow, having a sense of déjà vu with memories of a young Anakin, who had the same intensity in his attacks and the fire burning in his eyes.

Except that when Obi-Wan looks into Master Jinn’s eyes, expecting to see the same intensity, they’re not burning. They’re cold, dead, and full of  pain, an echo of Obi-Wan’s own. This Qui-Gon is still hurting from Xanatos, still afraid of letting his Fallen apprentice go. He is a mere phantom of the man he could be - the man Obi-Wan watched heal for years.

Above all, this Qui-Gon is looking for a way out of his anger and Obi-Wan is the perfect candidate for that - he is a rival, a model Padawan that Qui-Gon never was to Master Dooku. Obi-Wan is loved by his Master and has his approval, he is Master Dooku’s pride and joy , even though he caused a few problems at the beginning, it’s clear that Master Dooku favors him.

Qui-Gon is hurt by that and taking it out publicly with Obi-Wan is his way of showing it - where all can see and in front of their Master. Obi-Wan remembers the same posture on Anakin once, and their similarities are so many that he could cry at their childish way of releasing dark emotions. 

He won’t let Master Jinn win, though. If a Master is trying to prove a point and humiliate Obi-Wan he’ll find out it’s nearly impossible to go against him when he puts his head into it. It’s the one thing all of them have in common in their lineage: they’re all strong willed.

More than once, Obi-Wan sees a breach in his guard and he thinks about surprising him with a dirty move, kicking him on the chest and sending him far with a Force-push. Master Jinn certainly isn’t expecting it, by the arrogant look on his eyes, he thinks he has him cornered and tired from consecutive blows.

Oh, Master Jinn is in for a surprise. Obi-Wan won’t fight dirty but he is going to show this man that he isn’t just a Master of Soresu for nothing. He draws back and provokes, letting himself be chased by never touched, an endless game of loth cats and mice. He can wait all day like this, letting Qui-Gon make a fool of himself.

It works, and Master Jinn starts to get tired and frustrated with the lack of reaction from Obi-Wan, who doesn’t let his grief and hurt break the blank mask on his face, and his movements get sloppy and a touch of anger clouds his eyes, his lips a thin line. It’s a look Obi-Wan has seen on him a few times when Xanatos was mentioned. Seizing the moment, he breaks his defense for his new form, his saber a flash of red-black that surprises Qui-Gon, who forgot, from Obi-Wan’s previous duels, that he is quick in changing forms. 

Obi-Wan’s lightsaber breaks past Master Jinn’s poor defenses, retracting his blade at the last minute to avoid injury. But the suggestion of it is enough - a lightsaber through his middle, the same way Maul once killed him. 

The shock Master Jinn emanates is enough for Obi-Wan to know that he did the right thing, showing his once Master that his arrogance will be his downfall someday and now, if he only listens, he could work on getting better and training in his saber skills.

Obi-Wan bows low - too low, deeply respectful - and goes to Master Windu who is eyeing him attentively. He feels unbalanced and Master Windu’s presence is a soothing thing that envelops him. He puts his hand on his shoulder, grounding him to the present. 

“You did well, Padawan. Do you wish to continue? You know you don’t have to.”

“I can do it, I just need a few minutes.” 

His Master hands him a water bottle and he drinks gratefully. He can sense Master Dooku talking to Master Jinn in a low tone. Obi-Wan doesn’t want to know what they’re saying. He focuses on his friends' cheers and gestures for the next duel to begin. 

–.--

Obi-Wan declares that, since he won them all credits, it’s only fair they pay for his company as a thank you the next day.

His friends do. 

It’s the most fun they have. 

Deciding to have lunch in a new store (a candy store) may have not been their best choice but while they are stuffing their bellies full of junk food it’s all good. 

Myles looks at them as if they’re crazy. They totally are. 

Obi-Wan knows for a fact that he will have a stomache after this but at the present he doesn’t mind. He is a rich Jedi and indulging one time won’t kill him.

They visit a park and end up (meaning it’s Quinlan and Siri’s fault) all soaked - how they managed that, with the small pond barely fitting an adult, is a mystery to all. After that, Arla insists on taking a holo.

“It’s for buir , so he knows he’s missing all the fun.” 

They agree pretty quickly after that because she is not dropping the idea and are those two officers coming on their way? Oh gods, better hurry.

It’s the worst hole ever taken in history, Obi-Wan is sure of it. Nine wet people, smiling like mad and two officers behind, unfocused and slightly blurred. (Disturbing the peace was never that fun before). 

Bail ends up rescuing them by total accident. 

They run into him and Obi-Wan makes (or tries to) puppy eyes at his friend. 

“When I said I wanted to spend my credits I didn’t think it would be like this.” Jango comments from behind his cards.

Bail lets out a laugh. “Why do I have the feeling that if I hadn’t helped you, you’d be all behind bars right now?”

“Because we probably would be.” Obi-Wan says, lowering his cards and earning loud protests from his friends. 

“How can you be so good at sabacc? It’s unfair.” Siri complains.

Obi-Wan just smirks. 

They are all with borrowed clothes from Bail, in his senatorial apartment, playing and eating more junk food. The senator in question had been sightseeing on a rare day off from his work, until deciding to save the Jedi and Mandalorians from jail.

Betting their credits in a game of sabacc is a fun challenge for all involved: the Mandalorians are wearing their buy’ce to avoid being detected by the Padawans. Bail has an impressive sabacc face (he has to, it’s in his profession description) and his shields are impossible to penetrate. 

That leaves the game interesting and since they’re all feeling high on their victories of the previous day, the bets are equally large. This time though, Obi-Wan plays to win.

It’s a good thing he has so much experience in losing against Master Plo and Master Windu because it helps now. His friends may play well, but they are no Jedi Masters at sabacc.

Much later, they return to the Temple, Bail drives them and laughs good humored at the sleepy faces he delivers back to the Jedi. It’s hours past their curfew, with Jango, Arla and Myles insisting on returning them personally to their quarters (as if they were responsible adults) before leaving Coruscant. 

–.--

Well, apparently, even what Obi-Wan doesn’t wish to know he ends up involved with.

Lineage dinner. (Obi-Wan doesn’t know if he fakes an illness or if he begs for a mission off-world with Master Plo). 

With Master Yoda and Master Jinn . 

Master Windu is present too - he was for a time Master Yoda’s Padawan after all. Master Dooku looks torn between his dry sense of humor and awkwardness.

Master Plo ignored his requests of going on an adventure and now he is forced to be here, living in this…this situation, while Master Plo excused himself saying he would enjoy the night with his own lineage - he had the courage to not invite Obi-Wan! (Of course he wasn’t considering all the other dinners he had tagged along with Master Plo. When it most counted, his Master had left him and betrayed him, how dare he).

–.--

“How was dinner?” Plo asked them the next morning. His laugh was barely concealed behind his mask.

Obi-Wan refused to answer.

“That bad, huh?”

“Master Yoda clearly suspects something.” Mace said, ignoring the sulking teenager. “I don’t know how much of a theory he has but we should expect some comments in the future.”

“We already knew that he was the most likely to suspect things. What about Master Jinn, was he still angry with Obi-Wan?”

“My former Padawan was extremely unpleasant last night. He can have temper tantrums of the worst kind.”

“Ah, and I imagine the swamp food didn’t help.”

Mace threw him a look. “Don’t pretend you’re not enjoying this. You knew it was going to be awkward, at best. Tell us about your dinner with Tholme and Quinlan.”

“They are well. Quinlan is excited to be in Obi-Wan’s class, and Tholme said it’s the only class he actually studies for.” He recounts. “Tholme is thinking about starting Quin in his Trials soon, although he isn’t sure the boy is mature enough. You know how Quinlan is.”

“That boy is trouble.” And Quinlan was. Plo loved his Grandpadawan but that boy was a walking troubleman. Obi-Wan was the only one who managed to put him in his place and no one knew how he did it - it’s not like Obi-Wan parted from his secrets easily (Plo remembers one or two occasions where high bets and bribles had to be made ir order to extract something from his Padawan - it made him oddly proud and extremely annoyed with him). 

“Master Tholme should wait for their mission on Ryloth before starting Quin on his Trials.” Obi-Wan said, drinking tea. 

“What happens on Ryloth?” Plo asks him. 

“He rescues Aayla.” The boy says confidently. “She’ll be his Padawan. They make a good team.”

“Ah.”

“But I think their mission will only happen later this year. Quinlan becomes a great Master, don’t worry, but I can’t say that he gets better manners.”

“Good to know who we have to keep an eye on.” Mace says dryly.

Obi-Wan shrugs and gets up to put his cup on the dishwasher. “I’m going to see Bant. She’s going to supervise me in the Halls today. See you later, Masters.”

When Obi-Wan closes the door, Plo turns to his friends. 

“How bad is he, truly?”

“It’s worse than we thought, Plo. Qui-Gon needs to see a mind healer and Yoda keeps pushing for him to take on a Padawan.” Yan says gravely. “I don’t know how Yoda could ignore the resentment he has against Obi-Wan.”

“Yan and I think we should push for a suspension. Ever since Tahl ended things with him, he’s getting more and more reckless. From what Obi-Wan told us, he was devastated with her death in his other life, but he had Obi-Wan to ground him. He doesn’t have him now, and neither will the Council approve if he tries to take on a new Padawan.”

“I see.” Plo says, thinking of how he could help. “Perhaps we could take the matter to the First Knowledge instead of our Council. They are the ones responsible for the Halls, after all. If we recommend that every Jedi that’s been on the field frequently has to go through a routine evaluation, we could arrange for a suspension without making it seem like it was planned.”

“This could work. Qui-Gon will be very resistant otherwise.” Yan says. “Can it be done?”

“I’ll speed up the process.” 

“Great, this is one less problem we have to deal with.” Mace says. “What else is on the list?”

The list : also known as a list they made after a few conversations with Obi-Wan, where they put names and planets that needed their attention for the possibility of future disasters. 

“We are monitoring the Trade Federation and for now things remain quiet, although there is talk of increasing the production of battle droids, our Shadows assigned to monitor them reported that they don’t have the funds to do it.” Yan said and they were relieved to know that visiting the future Separatists planets had helped in keeping them in the Republic or redirecting them to Neutral planets, which in most cases resulted in them aligned to Mandalore. “Our alliance with Mandalore is going well and Jaster even requested for Obi-Wan to visit them when I talked to him the last time.”

“We should send him.” Mace says. “A vacation disguised as a solo mission. He’ll find trouble there but the Mand'alor will keep him safe. It’s not common but we know Obi-Wan doesn’t really need to pass his Trials.”

“ Hmm , I think we could do better than this.” Plo adds. “The Order is changing, as Obi-Wan wants. But what if we used his visit to Mandalore for a big purpose?”

“What do you have in mind?”

“Outer Rim planets and slavery.” He says. “Mandalorians traditionally hate slavery just as much as we do. Send Obi-Wan there with a team of young Knights and Senior Padawans preparing for their Trials and give them a mission to free slaves. Unite us for a common cause.”

“And the Senate won’t be able to complain because Mandalore is not part of the Republic, and we could say that the Jedi there just had to help mediate the situation.” Yan concludes.

“This could work. And Obi-Wan has the experience to lead and coordinate them.” Mace says, getting on board with the idea. “After the Challenge, I doubt any Knights will refuse to follow his lead and if they do, when they see that even Jaster steps aside to make place for Obi-Wan, they’ll have to let him lead the mission.”

“Exactly.” Plo says. “What do you think about sending him there after his exams finish?”

“I agree. It’ll be good for him. He gets to cause trouble, supervised, and for a good cause.”

“Continuing on the list, we have to find Ventress and Master Narec.” Yan says. “And if possible, make contact with the Nightsisters.” 

“I’ll have some Shadows making contact with him and helping him to return to the Temple.”

“We can look after Asajj while Obi-Wan is away, and help her adapt to the Temple life. It’ll be easier if she has support.”

“Then it’s decided.” Mace says. “Do we have any leads on the identity of any of the Sith?”

“No, Obi-Wan remains tight lipped about it still. Darth Plagueis and his apprentice Sidious. We don’t know anything except what our Padawan doesn’t say about it.” Yan comments.

“Do you think they’re part of the Senate?” Plo asks.

“I do, why else would Obi-Wan follow the news about bills and senators so closely?”

“Makes sense. But if there are Sith in the Senate, how are they hiding?”

“The same way they did in Obi-Wan’s other life.” Yan tells them. “Whomever they are, they can hide in plain sight, in front of a lot of Jedi Masters. We should not underestimate them.”

“Confronting them won’t be easy.” 

“We’ll figure it out, we just have to trust in the Force.” Plo says.

–.--

Obi-Wan receives a request to see the High Council and he is immediately intrigued. They had been regularly meeting with him to discuss changes for the Order but those usually occurred once a month. 

His Masters didn’t mention anything about a new mission either, which makes him suspicious of being called there. He goes expecting…well, anything, really.

“You summoned me, Masters?” He says, after bowing.

“A mission for you, this Council has.” Master Yaddle says, and she looks happy with it. Coming to observe the other Masters, so are they. “Sending you to Mandalore, we are. With a team of Knights and Senior Padawans you will go.”

“What am I to do there, Masters?” He asks, because he has the distinct impression that this will be his first solo mission and he’ll be in charge of the Knights and Padawans.

“Abhor slavery the Mand'alor does, so do Jedi. Experience in coordinating both in fighting together you have, your mission will be.” Master Yaddle answers. “Uniting our people for a common enemy and helping others, was it not your goal when changes you were proposing?”

Ah, that’s a good cause, if Obi-Wan ever heard of one. He looks at his Masters and feels their hands in this assignment. He smiles at them. Their meddling is certainly better than Master Yoda’s.

“Yes, that’s what I had in mind, Master Yaddle. Do you have a specific planet or system or that will be decided with the Mand’alor ?”

“You will plan with him, Padawan Kenobi.” Master Gallia answers. “Do you have more questions?”

“Who will I take with me?” 

“Do you have any Knights and Padawans in mind for this kind of mission?”

“I do, in fact.” Obi-Wan answers confidently. “But I will work with whomever this Council partners me with, of course. If I may, I know some that have potential and abilities that should benefit from this kind of work, if you’re interested in suggestions.”

“You seem confident in your judgment, Padawan. Have you been freeing many planets in between missions?” Master Nu inquiries. 

No, but I know how to plan for interplanetary assaults and sieges, and with a group of few good men I can overthrow a government in days. 

“I simply let the Force guide me, Master Nu. The last time I checked, even the Force isn’t pleased with people in bondage, so it’ll provide the means for us to be successful.” 

She seems a little offended by his commentary but lets it slide. 

“You can make recommendations about who you think is suited for this mission, Obi-Wan.” Master Plo says. “But the Council will have the final word on it.”

“Alright. Should I give their names now or…?”

“Now is as a good time as any.”

“Well then…” 

When Obi-Wan finishes his list, he explains why these Jedi should accompany him. He lists their abilities and pairs them off with the group of Haat Mando’ade that compose Jaster’s verde and how their complementary skill sets will be efficient on fighting slavery on the Outer Rim.

“To have success with our campaigns, we’ll have to ensure a complete change of government on these planets, otherwise it’s all for naught. The New Mandalorians support Jaster’s government but they don’t exactly like violence so this is a double win for the Mand’alor . We deal with the messier part and they are left to ensure a new economy is established. The freed people will have access to healthy care, food and new jobs, a support system that should stop any slavers who wish to reclaim their properties.

“To take a planet like, say Tatooine, we don’t need numbers. We need stealth and skilled fighters. Our priority will be removing the ships so that the slaves don’t die unnecessarily. We also have to bring along weapons for them. They won’t allow us to fight for them without fighting with us. They should be responsible for taking control of their own destiny.

“So between gathering the supplies and dividing the verde into groups and assigning Jedi with them, I would estimate two or three weeks. Travel time doesn’t count. When we arrive on the planet, we’ll spend more time working underground and monitoring the routines than making arrests or removing slavers from their positions. This will be phase two. But the entire process should be quick if the squads are efficient. Again, two or three weeks. More time and we risk word getting out to the wrong ears and less time and we risk sentient lives.”

He explains it as if it was a completely normal debriefing. 

“So, my last question for you is this: how many planets and systems do you wish for us to free?” Obi-Wan asks, ignoring the shocked looks of everyone in the room, even his Masters.

Since when do you make such detailed plans in minutes, Padawan? Master Windu asks through the bond, clearly impressed.

Since I fought in a galactic war and controlled most of the army, Master. I had to think quickly or many would die. Besides, sieges are much more difficult to deal with than planetary invasions.

“How many are you planning to free, Padawan?” Master Poof asks instead. The shock has passed and now the Masters are recognizing not Padawan Kenobi, but the brilliant strategist standing in front of them who could accomplish almost any task given to him.

“I assume I don’t have a time limit to return.” He says, looking at them for a negative. “Well, let’s say I stay on this mission for a year, then. I think that should be enough to free nine to ten planets and then leave the system organized for other Knights and Padawans to take it from there and continue. Is that sufficient for this Council?”

“If you accomplish that, Padawan, you may yet have your name on galactic history.” Master Gallia says, a little unbelieving. 

“Well, I hope my name won’t be the only one listed.” Obi-Wan replies. 

–.--

Obi-Wan recommends his friends to come with him and a few other Knights that have potential to be great Jedi one day. The Council accepts and includes some seasoned Masters to go too. Master Piell uses the excuse of supervising but Obi-Wan is able to sense his curiosity of how he’ll conduct this mission.  Master Drallig, their Battlemaster accompanies them too - and Obi-Wan thinks he volunteered himself for this mission, a chance to leave the Temple for a good cause.

Jaster is as warm as Obi-Wan remembers from their last encounter on his life day. He is more than happy with this joint mission. 

“Where should we start?” Arla asks. She’s on Jaster’s council and they are all assembled together alongside the team of Jedi to discuss their next steps. “There are a lot of planets that have traffic of sentients.”

All eyes fall on Obi-Wan. He raises an eyebrow at them.

“You always have a plan, Ob’ika.” Miles says. “And they usually work, so why not say what you have in mind?”

As a matter of fact, Obi-Wan does have a plan. A well-thought-over plan that he made in his exile, long ago, when he spent his days and nights thinking about what he could have done if he could change the past. 

He is grateful now that he has the opportunity to see it through. 

“May I see the list of supplies first?” 

He is handed a pad and he spends the several next minutes reading carefully what is typed on the file. He reads it again, just to be sure. His mind is racing with all the information. Closing his eyes, he makes the mental math, their odds, their supplies, the preparations, the post mission precautions they’ll have to take. When he opens his eyes again, the room is silent and he has a sharp smile on his lips.

“I know what we’re going to do.” He starts, feeling excited for this. “This mission is to last roughly a year, give or take. During this time, if everyone here works hard we can do some good in the galaxy. What I have in mind for us is quite daring but I’m confident we can succeed.”

“And what would that be, Padawan?” Master Piell asks.

“We’re going to take down the Hutt Empire.” 

–.--

“This was actually easier than I thought it would be.” Jango says as a greeting to them when he joins them for breakfast.

They had just freed the first planet and were heading to the next after leaving it to the New Mandalorians and some other planets from the Republic (mainly Alderaan and Naboo) to take care of the inhabitants and establish a new government.

“What? Freeing slaves?” Obi-Wan asks, between bites of his own food. 

“Yeah,” he continues, “I mean, we are just what? A hundred people? And it was an entire planet.”

Master Drallig made a noise of agreement and his sentiment was echoed by others. 

“If the other planets are like this, in a year we’ll actually end the hutts' legacy.” Myles says, a little unbelieving. “By the Ka’ra , we’re going to be legends, aren’t we?”

“As a rule, Jedi don’t seek credit for their deeds, extraordinary as they may be,” Master Piell says, but then he looks at them all sitting together, “but I think that registering this in history holopads for the future generations is a good idea.”

“Please, someone makes sure to include Obi’s name in it.” Quinlan says, a little too loudly. “It was his plan.”

Obi-Wan blushes from where he is sitting and with a misuse of the Force, he takes Quin’s food from his plate and throws it at him in retaliation. 

“What? I’m serious. I’m pretty sure we wouldn’t have done all of this so fast if not for your planning.”

“He’s right, Padawan.” Knight Barr says.

“Obi is humble,” Garen says teasing, “he doesn’t accept compliments.”

“Alright, leave the ade alone.” Jaster tells them and Obi-Wan looks at him in relief. “We still have much to accomplish. What’s our next destination?”

Now Obi-Wan is more than happy to take over the conversation. 

–.--

Their last stop was Tatooine. 

Seeing Anakin again was painful for Obi-Wan. He was so happy to see his little brother again but he also saw a dark future for him, and the ghost of his former Padawan in him, screaming his hate with sickly yellow eyes at him. 

Obi-Wan tried to not let his tears fall - it is a waste of water here, in this sand junk, and he cannot afford to waste water after having lived here for two decades and learned how sacred it was each drop.

“He’ll be welcome at the Temple, Lady Skywalker.” He had told Shimi, shallowing the lump on his throat, while Anakin was busy celebrating with other kids his newfound freedom from a slave chip. “As will you.”

“I’ll think about it.” Was all she had replied and Obi-Wan had a feeling inside him telling him that perhaps this path, the Jedi life, was no longer open for Anakin. He had hope - had learned to have faith again with his Masters and he prayed to the Force and the Gods that even if his little brother won’t be by his side, that his future would be a good one.

It is Hondo who catches him after that, sitting alone stargazing into the vast sky of Tatooine at night. The pirate and his crew were somewhat recruited to their cause by Obi-Wan after Ko Vari, convinced into a profitable agreement - and now forming a little army with the former slaves to stop sentients’ traffic across the galaxy. 

“Ah, Kenobi, my favorite Jedi.” He is cheerful and completely unaware of Obi-Wan’s desperate wish for solicitude. “What such a brilliant mind as yours is doing out here, all alone? We should be celebrating, my friend!”

He offers him a bottle of alcohol. For a moment, Obi-Wan thinks about accepting - it wouldn’t be wrong, Jedi learn how to purge alcohol and toxins from the body from a young age and have special permission to drink if they want to before reaching majority. But he thinks about his drunk past in the desert, of how he became dependent on his drinks to keep going on, of his Masters’ disappointed faces if they learned he drank to deal with his feelings - and he politely refuses Hondo’s stretched hand.

“I’m not in the mood to celebrate, Hondo.” When the pirate is silent beside him, Obi-Wan turns to look at him and finds Hondo waiting for him to continue. Well, Hondo is someone he can trust , at least a little. “Sometimes I feel lost, and I’m not sure of what I’m supposed to do.” Not sure of how to deal with the possibility of having altered so much the timeline that I’ll lose my future Padawan .

“Ah, but we all feel like this.” Hondo tells him, still cheerful but more subdued. “Let me tell you a secret, little Jedi: even the great Hondo Ohnaka can’t see the future! Do you know what I do when things go wrong?”

“What do you do?”

“Improvise! And if that doesn’t work, I move on. Life is too short for the incredible Hondo Ohnaka to be sad over a little disappointment along the way.” 

A huff escapes Obi-Wan.

“I’m serious! That’s why you’ll never see me sad or planning much about the future. It is what it is. I can’t control it but I can choose how I live it, and Hondo always enjoys life the fullest.” 

It is - surprisingly - good advice. And one Obi-Wan needs right now. 

“I think you’re wiser than you let on, Hondo.” 

He receives a wink in answer. “Don’t tell the others, they might try to steal my title of captain if they knew.”

“I won’t.”

When Hondo leaves him, no doubt to drink more, Obi-Wan looks once again to the stars and recognizes some constellations he used to observe a long time ago. He smiles, take care of Anakin, please , he prays to the Force and leaves to live in the moment, joining the others in their celebration.

–.--

It took them a few days to organize their departure - the aid provided by the Republic was a few days behind schedule and Bail had shaken his head fondly at Obi-Wan in their last holo after the news of one more planet being free of slavery. His friend had been skeptical at first when Obi-Wan contacted him at the beginning of their mission but after the fourth planet in less than six months, the senator had passed from incredulity to exasperation to just rolling along with whatever Obi-Wan threw at him to resolve.

Bail and his senator friends had created an entire committee to support their operation and a lot of good propaganda was being made about the Jedi and the mandalorians working together. As a result, intergalactical companies were helping to finance their mission and even establishing bases in the planets freed to open new job positions. 

Obi-Was saw the pile of holopads accumulating on Bail’s desk - they increased each time they talked. It made him remember (a little nostalgic) about his paperwork during the Clone Wars - and he thanked every deity out there that his role now was only to create the problems for others to deal with, never again he would submit himself, if he had the option, to do the paperwork. He was a Jedi of action.

Since he found himself with free time (a rarity these last months) he decided to visit where once upon a time his old house had been. Informing Jaster that he would be absent for a while (it wouldn’t do to have a hundred people looking for him, as amusing as it would be), Obi-Wan went out on the first light to his destination, taking with him precious water canteens and his holocron.

He walked fast, still used to the paths of the desert and arrived there before the suns were in the center of the sky.

His modest accommodations were exactly as he remembers them - full of sand and old. A feeling of terrible loneliness overcame him. Obi-Wan knew well how hard those decades were for him.

Sitting in his preferred position for meditation, Obi-Wan put the holocron in front of him and opened it.

Ba’ji Vizsla appeared before him and smiled.

“ Su cuy'gar , Ob’ika.” 

“ Su’cuy, Ba’ji .”

“Ah, so here is Tatooine.” He commented, looking around. “Did you find your vod ?”

Obi-Wan nodded but he couldn’t avoid the empty look in his eyes when he did it. He had told his story to Tarre Vizsla when he first opened his holocron and since then, his Ba’ji had been full of questions and training for him.

Seeing that his student wouldn’t say more, Ba’ji Vizsla continued:

“I see. I’m sorry, Ob’ika.” He looked genuinely sad at that and it made Obi-Wan want to cry and waste water. “If you are looking to be distracted from it, I have something in mind to occupy your thoughts.”

“Please.” Obi-Wan said. “My mission here is officially over and having something to do would be good for me, I think.”

“Alright.” His Ba’ji conceded. “In this case, I’m giving you a special mission. It is time for you to prove your worth as a verde . This mission is yours alone and I trust you can accomplish it with glory.”

“Tell me what I have to do.” 

–.--

On the ship back to Mandalore, everyone was bored except for Obi-Wan - he was thinking about his mission and how he was supposed to do it. He was pulled from his so-called brooding by Quinlan, who had the brilliant idea of playing a truth or dare game. Of course everyone accepted it - even the Masters.

Obi-Wan had a bad feeling about it. Did anyone listen to him? No.

When it was Jaster’s turn, he chose a dare, and Bruck - the traitor! - said:

“I think Oafy-Wan is too quiet,” the nickname used just to irritate him, “so I dare you to say something important to him that will make him lose his cool.”

Obi-Wan wished he could use the Force to choke him. Bruck officially wasn’t his friend anymore after that. What was it with everyone aboard this ship and trying to make him embarrassed?

Jaster thought for a few minutes and Obi-Wan saw him come to a decision. The Mand’alor was…blushing too, which gave a little satisfaction to him but at the same time made him worried about what he would hear from him.

“Ob’ika, I should have asked you before this but a dare is a dare. I want you to know that I mean it though. Ni kyr'tayl gai sa'ad - Obi-Wan Kenobi.”

Of course none of the Jedi understood what the Mand’alor had just said but every mandalorian did. 

“Ob’ika?” 

“I think you broke him, buir .” Jango said. 

Someone shook Obi-Wan back to reality.

“What- But you- I- You can’t I-”

“Ob’ika, take a breath.” Jaster said, a firm hand on his shoulder.

“I have three Ba’ji already. I-”

“You do,” Jaster agreed, smiling a little mischievous, “but no one said anything about becoming aliit . The position is open, isn’t it?”

Obi-Wan couldn’t believe him. He covered his face with his hands and shook his head. There was no sense of shock coming from the Force and he realized everyone of Jaster’s verde were already aware of his intentions of offering him to join the aliit .

“I- You mean it?”

“I do.”

“I’d be honored to, if you are sure.”

The smile Jaster gave him was impossible not to reciprocate, the hug too.

None of his friends understood, an Obi-Wan felt devious pleasure in not telling them. If they want to know, they’ll have to learn the language properly.

“Is it my turn now?” He asked, planning how to make Bruck pay for this. 

His revenge would be sweet - as a member of Mereel House officially now, he had to take retribution to his enemies very seriously. 

–.--

Jaster knocks on his door later that day. He looks hopeful and careful. Obi-Wan lets him enter and offers him tea. Sitting in his bed, both of them don’t know how to start the conversation, stalling for time by drinking tea.

“I never knew my parents.” Obi-Wan says quietly. “They gave me up when a Jedi came to Stewjon. The Jedi have always been my family, in a way.”

Jaster ponders his words.

“Have you ever wanted to have a family, in a more traditional way?”

“For a time, yes.” Obi-Wan remembers Satine and his year mission on Mandalore. He would have left the Order for her, maybe married, settled down and had children - it was a dream, a childish one that sometimes he had indulged when in exile, thinking of what other paths he could’ve taken to prevent…well, everything. “But I discovered that family doesn’t have to be of blood to be valid.”

Jaster smiles. “You’re right. And I’m glad to have you in my aliit , ad .”

Obi-Wan blushes.

“When I adopted Jango and his sister,” he continues, “they were both hotheads - still are. It was a privilege to raise them and see them grow. I know I won’t be around much to see you, Obi-Wan, but seeing how you’re shaping to be a good man, even from far away, is an honor I’m happy you conceded to me.” Jaster is looking intently at him now, conveying his feelings. “And I’ll always be here for you, no matter what, even when my time comes to march away, a part of me will always look out for you.” 

Obi-Wan smiles at the warm feeling in his chest. 

“Thank you, buir .”

The hug that follows is one of the softest he ever received, the love Jaster feels for him encompasses him gently. 

–.--

Obi-Wan comms his Masters a day before arriving at Mandalore. 

“There is something I need to do before returning.” He tells them. 

He receives two pairs of raised eyebrows and a frown from them.

“Would you elaborate for us?” Master Windu asks.

“It’s not related to any of our…current concerns.” Obi-Wan explains. “ Ba’ji Vizsla gave me a mission and I was thinking about doing it before returning to the Temple.”

“A mission?” 

“Yes, I’ve been talking to him in my free time. It’s not too dangerous.”

“ Padawan .”

“Well, at least I don’t think it is. It’s more like a search mission than anything.” He says, a little sheepish - he doesn’t think it’s dangerous but they all know that Obi-Wan doesn’t have a good judgment about what could be considered dangerous or not. 

“How long will this mission take?” Master Dooku asks him.

“Well…”

“Yes?”

“That’s the thing, I have no idea.”

Obi-Wan can hear their exasperated breaths. His Masters exchange looks.

“Have you talked to Jaster about it?”

“Why would-” He starts to question but stops. Of course they assumed he talked to Jaster. “I haven’t.”

At their unimpressed stares, he signs.

“I haven’t yet .” He corrects himself. “If he lets me, can I go?”

They don’t mention that technically, Obi-Wan doesn’t need permission from any of them - he is an adult and more than capable of making his own decisions. But he likes to have the approval of his Masters and they like when Obi-Wan keeps them informed of things. 

“Yes, Padawan, you may go.” Master Dooku finally gives their permission. “But do comm us from wherever is that you’re going.”

“I will.”

–.--

Obi-Wan spends a long time in his borrowed ship alone meditating to find what Ba’ji Vizsla told him to look for.

When the Force nudges him, Obi-Wan changes the route and makes his way to one of the distant moons of Mandalore. It’s been desolated for a long time if his senses are right. Not devoid of life - just torned by wars and not useful anymore for sentients to inhabit it. 

The perfect place for native species that were once declared extinct to flourish without being killed for sport.

Obi-Wan is careful to mask his presence from the animals - he doesn’t want to have to use his lightsaber if he can avoid it. 

What he is looking for has become a legend even before Ba’ji Vizsla had been born. But there were always rumors, myths and stories that adults pass on to their children - and now it is his mission to discover if they were really only stories or if there is any truth behind them.

The Force guides him to an isolated place, with scarce vegetation, full of rocks. Obi-Wan raises his hand and closes his eyes, letting his senses guide his steps.

Sensing a weak, very faint trace of life is what stops him. On the ground, in what used to be a nest, is an egg. A really big egg.

Even before touching it, Obi-Wan knows he’s found it. Kneeling on the ground, he extends his hand to lay on the egg. It’s fragile and ancient - a survivor that is giving up his fight after so many years alone.

He stretches his awareness in the Force just to confirm that its progenitor is indeed dead. 

This egg is the last of its kind - and has been for a long time. This wasn’t his mission, exactly - he had to just discover if the species still lived but now, seeing that it was up to him to decide its fate…

Well, Obi-Wan always had a soft heart and he always wanted to have a… pet - although his Jedi obligations never allowed it.

He supposes he could take care of it until it is grown up and strong enough to survive in the wild.

Obi-Wan smiles, thinking about what his Masters would say to him when they figure out what species exactly he is saving from extinction. (He could give the egg to Jaster but this little one needs the Force to encourage him to hatch and he isn’t sure if his buir would like to have this baby animal in his care - with the history between their ancestors and all).

–.--

A year and a month later, Obi-Wan returns from his missions. He came back as a legend among his fellow Jedi. The team of Knights and Padawans that accompanied him were openly admired by all. 

More than freeing slaves, Obi-Wan Kenobi brought down the Hutt Empire on the Outer Rim and Mid Rim alongside the Mand'alor and his verde . They ended a reign of tyranny and brought justice to so many souls and relief from their unfair work.

The hutts were established there for generations and slavery was the base of their economy. 

No more. 

Obi-Wan has a smile on his face when he enters the Council chambers to give his final report to the Council.

“How would you say your mission was, Padawan Kenobi?” Master Poof asks him.

“Good, Masters.” He says, still feeling lighter. “The Hutt Empire is no more and many planets from the Core are now working with the New Mandalorians to provide aid to those freed slaves. Including Alderaan and Naboo. Last I heard, a new committee was being formed on the Senate to include a program that will sanction more missions to abolish slavery across the galaxy. Many cases of corruption were also uncovered and our Shadows are investigating closely, and some senators are already being questioned by illegal dealings with hutts’ affiliates.” 

“Yes, indeed. You really caused a revolution, Padawan.” Master Dooku commented, amused.

“I only went where the Light guided me to, Master Dooku.” Obi-Wan replies, smiling. “Now, if I may…”

“Yes, Obi-Wan?” Master Windu says.

“I would like to request to extend this mission for a few more months.”

“Why, Padawan, you left things arranged for the next team to replace yours, didn’t you?” Master Gallia asks.

“I did, but I would like to participate in their next project.” He explains. “The only other slavers acting openly in the galaxy after the hutts are the zygerrians. I’d like to help take them down.”

“You would, wouldn’t you.” Master Dooku says. “How much time do you expect it to take?”

“Well, no more than six months, Master. I can still be back for my exams in the Halls.”

Master Plo chuckles. “I heard your healing skills have progressed greatly during your time away.”

“I had a lot of practice, Master Plo.” Obi-Wan says, feeling a little sheepish with the praise he feels through the bond.

“Rest you should, Padawan Kenobi.” Master Yaddle says. “Consider your request, this Council will. Enjoy your time at home and friends while you’re here, you should. Missed you, your Masters have.”

Obi-Wan bows. “I will. Thank you Masters.”

–.--

That night, Obi-Wan spends time sharing his stories with his Masters about his year mission away from them. (He decides to keep quiet about the egg for now - it is in a nest in his bedroom and Obi-Wan pours the Force gently to heal it every day, little by little, hoping to see it become strong - there is no need to tell them about it while its future is still unsure). 

“Jaster officially adopted me, after that.” He tells them, laughing. “Then I told him that he couldn’t because I already had three Masters, who would be very sad to lose their Padawan. He said that I had Masters but the position of buir was still open.” 

“Oh, Force. Obi-Wan tell us you didn’t.” Master Windu says, laughing too.

“I didn’t have a choice! I had to accept. He was dared to but I could feel his sincerity through the Force.” He says, pretending to be exasperated. “I think that Jango is happier than Jaster after hearing the news. He said that he likes having a younger brother because now he doesn’t have to be the next Mand’alor .”

They laughed at that. 

“So you did end up becoming the next mandalorian Jedi.” Master Dooku concluded. 

“I did.” Obi-Wan says, more serious now. “I…freeing slaves and helping people was…”

“Good?”

“More than that, Master. It was what Jedi are supposed to do, you know?” He says, quietly. “My Padawan used to be a slave. I always wondered if we had been doing our calling as peacekeepers and actually helping people, he would’ve Fallen. I think I’ll find out the answer to that in a few years.”

“You've found him?” Master Plo asks, treading carefully on the subject.

“Yes. We freed his mother and him. I told her that he would be welcome at the Temple if she wished. And so would her - she’s an excellent mechanic and we could use her help around here.”

“Do you think she’ll come?”

“I don’t know. In my other life, Qui-Gon didn’t free her, so she had no other option but to let him come with us. It was the only path for a better life for him. Now that she has options…”

“ Hmm , she may choose not to give up her son.” Master Dooku concluded. “Although things are certainly different and we’ve been discussing attachment on the Council. I doubt they would be forced to be separated.”

“I explained that to her too. But it’s still difficult to predict.”

“What’s his name, Obi-Wan?” Master Windu asks.

Obi-Wan ponders for a moment if it’s wise to tell them the name of the boy who burned the galaxy just to save his wife and unborn children to his Masters. They won’t judge, he knows that…so why is it so difficult to trust his Padawan’s name to them?

“Anakin.” He says, feeling a lump in his throat. “His name is Anakin Skywalker.” Master Plo hugs him. “He burned the galaxy for his wife. She was expecting and he Fell because he thought the Darkside could save her, but she died anyway. I fought him and cut off his arm and legs but he survived and became Darth Vader.” Obi-Wan opens the bond and lets the memories flow through it. “We had to separate the twins to not attract attention from Sidious. Bail took the girl, Leia, and I watched over Luke on Tatooine, the last place their father would look for them.”

He stayed in silence after sharing, feeling drained and tired.  

“You lived alone there.” Master Windu estates, connecting the dots.

“Yes. Master Yoda hid on Dagobah and I spent the next twenty years alone. I had to mute my presence and Luke’s. I thought I was going mad half of the time and drank a lot the other half.”

He feels a gentle reprimand through the bond he shares with Master Plo but it is filled with affection underneath and he knows his Master isn’t disappointed with him, not really - just concerned.

“When I last encountered Anakin, we fought again and I sacrificed myself so Luke and Leia could escape. Then I finally became a ghost.” He says, sadly, and his Masters know he is remembering their promise to him to all of them ending in a desert drinking and training if things end badly for the Order. The thought brings comfort to him now. 

“And you’ll train the boy again.” Master Dooku comments, more to himself than anything, although Obi-Wan feels nothing leaking from his opinions on the Force, he knows his Master has doubts if this is a wise choice.

“I don’t know. He is too powerful to not be trained, at least the basics. He would draw too much attention from the Sith if he is left alone.” He replies, knowing it is necessary, if not by him then someone will have to teach him the basics.

“All in its time.” Master Plo says. Then, after a few minutes in silence, “first, you have to become a Knight.”

It was meant as a joke but Obi-Wan can’t hide his wince at the reminder of his Trials. His Masters notice it.

“I…last time Master Jinn died before he…” He doesn’t finish. “I always doubted if I was really ready or if he said I was just so he could train Anakin.”

“My Padawan acts like a fool most of the time, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku says. “You had a difficult apprenticeship with him, and even if you didn't feel ready, you did your best.”

“I know but…sometimes I wonder if my best was worth anything.” He confesses sadly. “My mistakes led me here in the end, didn’t they. I’m living it all again so I can fix things but I shouldn’t be here, not really. If I had noticed the signs, talked more to Anakin and made him see a mind healer before…”

“Obi-Wan, you did your best.” Master Windu repeats firmly. “You were an inexperienced Knight entrusted with a child that didn’t have the Temple’s upbringing.”

“And you turned him into a Knight and saw him be a good Master to Ahsoka.” Master Plo continues. “We all make mistakes and no Master is ever perfect. Do you blame us for how we dealt with you after you constructed your lightsaber?”

He shakes his head.

“And if you had Fallen because you went down there close to Sith artifacts, would it be our fault?”

“No…”

“Sometimes Obi-Wan, people make mistakes. You made mistakes with Anakin but he made his choices too. And so did Qui-Gon. He chose to disregard the Council about training an older boy clearly attached to his mother, and he chose to cast you aside for the promise of another student. But even in this awful situation, you did your best, stayed in the Light and gave your best to fulfill a promise to your Master. Maybe you weren’t ready when Master Yoda cut your braid but you were ready when you dedicated your life to be the best Master that boy needed.”

“We never feel ready to assume more responsibilities, Padawan.” Master Windu says. “We can only hope that the faith others have in us to complete our tasks is deserved, and do our best.”  

“And you, Obi-Wan, have been worthy of Knighthood even before Qui-Gon’s passing.” Master Dooku tells him. “Only a Knight would accept being put aside for another, and carrying out a promise to its end. You have been a Knight in every sense of the word since then.”

“I…I haven’t thought of it like this.” He confesses quietly. 

“Back to the present,” Master Windu says after a moment, his voice lighter, “the Council is very keen on your promotion. We were even offered bribes if you care to know.”

“ Uh . What did they offer?”

“A lot, Padawan.” Master Plo chuckles. “Many weeks off duty, in fact. You accomplished what few Masters would be capable of doing in our times.”

“Did you accept it?”

“Well, it’s not us that have to accept it, is it?” Master Plo questions. “Are you ready to be a Knight again, Obi-Wan?”

Is he? 

He’s only seventeen, almost eighteen. But still. Does he feel prepared? 

“I…”

“You don’t have to answer now, Obi-Wan. You have time to think about it, but if your mission on Zygerria is as successful as it was with the Hutt Empire, you know we won’t have much of a say in Knighting you, don’t you?”

Obi-Wan nods.

He closes his eyes and breathes for a few moments, centering himself. The Force is gently nudging him, whispering for him promises of a brighter future - his Knighthood is deserved and well-earned this time around. His path is forward and he is the Chosen One , the Force will always guide his steps. He doesn’t need to fear having to face the future alone any longer. When Obi-Wan opens his eyes, he has his answer.

“I am ready, Masters.” 

–.--

To be continued...

Chapter Text

“I think I have a solution for us.” Master Dooku says a few days later. 

“What for?” Obi-Wan asks him. 

They are sparring again, Obi-Wan using his new form confidently after a year practicing it with Mandalorians. 

“We should make you a Knight-Errant.” Master Dooku explains. “You’re younger than most Knights are, still finding your way around the galaxy since you’ve never had the opportunity to be who you are apart from us and without a Padawan to look after. This way, we can still work together more than if you were just a Knight.”

“That’s a good idea. Still, we haven’t had Knight-Errants since the last Sith Wars.” Master Windu says. “Ironically, I think it fits our situation. What do you think, Plo?”

“This title does come with unique advantages. The final decision is yours, Obi-Wan.” 

“I like it, although I admit I’m not familiarized with it.”

“Shall we present it to the Council? I think your request to help with Zygerria has already been voted in favor too.”

“Alright, Masters.”

–.--

They braid Obi-Wan’s hair one last time before his Knighting ceremony in Master Dooku’s quarters. They put two last beads in it, a yellow one to symbolize his accomplishments with his new lightsaber form, and a black one for his covert operation on helping taking down slavery in Hutt space.

Obi-Wan couldn’t hide his joy even if he tried. He thinks about how far they’ve come since the first time his Masters braided his hair, back then when he had just woken up to live his life again. 

He thinks about his apprehension with having to share his mind with Master Dooku and his determination of working everything out alone, not trusting anyone with the truth. How many hours he spent immersed in the Force, trying to block his emotions and hide himself from his Masters. Obi-Wan remembers it all. 

That’s why today his bonds lay open, and he feels all the pride-love that his Masters send him through the Force. They meditate together as Masters-Padawan for one last time, letting the memories of their missions together flow among the currents of time and space in the Force.

And if, by the end of it, Obi-Wan has tears in his eyes, his Masters pretend not to notice it - their own eyes are, after all, a little misty too.

–.--

Standing tall in a circle were his Masters, wearing smiles. This time, his Knighting ceremony would have more than just Master Windu and Grandmaster Yoda present. The High Council was fully assembled, all of them emanating contentment in the Force. They turned on their lightsabers, illuminating the chambers vividly.

Obi-Wan was glad to be able to create new memories about this moment. 

Grand Master Yoda stepped forward and Obi-Wan kneeled.  

“Jedi we all are. Speak through us, the Force does. Through our actions, proclaimed what is real, the Force did. Acknowledge today what the Force has proclaimed.” The ancient words echoed in the chambers filled with the constant humm of the lightsabers. “Padawan Kenobi, by the right of the Council, by the Will of the Force, Knight-Errant of the Force, I dub thee Jedi.” 

Grand Master Yoda brought down his green lightsaber above his shoulder, severing his braid. 

“Rise, Knight-Errant Obi-Wan Kenobi. May the Light guide you.”

Obi-Wan took his braid, rising. He had a smile that could illuminate a dying star and bring life back to it.  

–.--

“Go celebrate with your peers, Obi-Wan.” Master Windu said after. “Don’t worry, we won’t kick your things out till tomorrow.”

“How nice of you, Masters.” 

“We mean it, Obi-Wan. Go.” Master Plo nudged him. “You deserve it. And don’t you dare to return before dawn, young man.”

“Alright, alright. I’ll go. See? This is me going.” 

And he did go, laughing, to find his friends for their night out on Coruscant. 

“I can’t believe you’re already a Knight, Obi-Wan,” Bant complained. “At seventeen. Isn’t that too young for a human?”

“Too young? Look at his face, he’s a baby Jedi!” Quinlan said loudly, while pointing to his face. “I was supposed to be facing my Trials but someone beat me to it. How did you do it, anyway?”

“Remember my year's mission on the Outer Rim?” 

“Yeah, Obi. As if we weren’t there with you, helping bring down a slaver empire.” 

“Well, that counted as my Trials.” He said. “But I’m not a full Knight yet, you know. The right title is Knight-Errant.”

“Banthacrap.” Bruck said. “This is just them making up words so you don’t get scared with the missions they’re gonna send in your way.”

Obi-Wan laughed. “That’s not it.”

“It is, everybody here knows it.”

“It’s not-”

“Yeah, it is, Obi.” Garen told him. “We’re happy for you, man. To be honest, I think we all saw it coming when they told us you’d be leading the mission. I mean, they gave you command and there were Knights involved-”

“Don’t forget Master Piell and Master Drallig.” Bruck added. “They didn’t say a word about your strategies.”

“And the Mandalorian king. He followed you as if you were fighting together for years.” Siri continued. “I don’t think that’s how kings deal with kids like us. He respected you as if you were his equal.”

“Don’t try to protest, Obi, you know it’s true. We were all there to see it.” Quin cut him off. “At this rate you’re going, you’ll have a seat on the High Council before you’re thirty.” 

(And wouldn’t that be ironic).

“Don’t forget the lightsaber form.” Bant said. 

“Oh, yeah, there’s that too.”

“Guys…” Obi-Wan tried to protest. 

“Oh no no no. You don’t get to have this humble attitude on your Knighting celebration. You have to accept all the compliments and brag about them. I’m pretty sure that’s how this works.”

Obi-Wan shook his head, outnumbered. He loved his friends but sometimes they were too much. To escape their conversation, he gestures to the waitress droid FLO to serve them another round of drinks and more chips. 

“Talking about missions, do you think they’ll send us back to Zygerria?” Siri asked.

“I think so. Why wouldn’t they?” Obi-Wan replies.

“ Hmm , I gotta say, ending slavery is much more exciting work than I imagined.” Quin commented. “When Master Tholme told me the news, I thought it would be a long boring assignment that wouldn’t end up anywhere. But no, we had a lot of action, didn’t we. Even Shadow’s work was quicker than what I’m used to.”

“That's because Obi-Wan knew what to do and how we had to do it.” Bant said. “I doubt it’d be this quicker without him. Zygerria will be over in no time, and maybe we can all count that as our Trials.”

“Wouldn’t that be a dream to come true? All of us Knights…” 

“Don’t dream too high, Siri. You still lack common sense in that head of yours to be a serious Knight like our dear Obi over here.” Garen mocked. “ Ouch .”

“Guys, calm down. I think you’ll all make amazing Knights when your time comes.” 

“Thank you, Obi.” Siri said. 

“What do you plan to do after Zygerria?” Bruck asked him. “You have a plan, right?”

“Why would you think that?”

Five unimpressed faces stared at him. 

“Are you serious? You always have a plan, man.” Garen said. “First with the new classes, then demanding changes with the High Council and now spreading justice on the Outer Rim. So spill the beans: what’s the plan?”

“I…”

“Yes? We can’t hear you, Obi.”

“I really don’t know, guys.” He says quietly. “I’m following a general outline but I don’t know the specifics. The Force nudges me in the right direction and that’s all.”

“And what’s the outline?” Quin insisted.

Obi-Wan didn’t look at them. 

“Obi?” Bant asked, worried.

“This doesn’t leave here, alright?” He says, looking serious. When they nodded, he continued, voice low: “There are two people I’m keeping tabs on. My goal has always been them.”

“Who are they?” Siri asks. 

“The Sith.” He murmured. 

“What? But-”

“Shh! Eyes and ears everywhere, Quin,” Obi-Wan reprimands. “My Masters know about it and we’ve been working on it. I didn’t tell you before because we were just kids then. But now I can trust you to keep the secret.”

“Alright, that’s…a lot.”

“Yes, it is. And need I remind you, you asked for this.”

“But how, Obi? They’re dead!”

“We think they're dead. Why do you think I’ve been pushing for our alliance with Jaster? And for changes inside the Order? And giving classes about what we consider heretical?”

They didn’t have an argument for that. 

“How long have you known?” Bruck asks after a few minutes.

Obi-Wan let out a mirthless laugh. “Since before being chosen as a Padawan.” He answers. “It was I who convinced my Masters about them. It took a while but we got there.”

“Who else knows?” Garen asks.

“Just my Masters and now you. I can’t trust more people into it, it’s dangerous and the more people who know it, the more risk we’re at ruining our plans.”

“Plans? What plans? Shouldn’t the High Council know about this, Obi?” Bant asks.

“No, they can’t. Not yet.” Obi-Wan tells them. “Guys, I’m serious. We report our missions directly to the Senate.”

“What does it- Oh,” Quin says, “You don’t think-”

“They are, I assure you.”

“What? Guys, don’t leave us behind. What are you talking about?”

“They’re in the Senate, Garen.” Quin explains. “If Obi-Wan tells the Council, they will know, because we report to them, and they have access to our records.”

“Exactly.” 

“Oh.”

“But that’s…we would sense it! Wouldn’t we?” Siri questions.

“No.” Obi-Wan says confidently. “Can you sense me?”

“What, of course I can-”

“Kriff, Obi. What karking have you done?!” Quin asks. “I can’t sense you, it’s like-”

“You’re not even here.” Bruck finishes.

“Yes.” Obi-Wan says. “If I’m able to hide from you, what do you think they’re able to do?”

“We wouldn’t notice, even if they were in front of us.” 

“And that’s why we can’t tell the High Council. They will deny it. I know because my Masters denied it too at first.” He says, a little sadly. “But with the changes I’m pushing forward, I hope we’ll be ready for them.”

“How long do you think we’ve got?”

“It’s difficult to say.” Obi-Wan says, taking a bite of his food. “That’s why it’s so important we support the mandalorians in the meantime. They are our greatest ally in the war that’s coming. And by ending slavery, we spread Light through the galaxy, making our path easier.”

“Force, Obi-Wan,” Bant says, “you don’t joke around.”

“And I don’t intend to start now.” 

“You’re crazy, why are we friends again?” Quin jokes.

“Because we love him and he is our only hope at getting cool missions.” Bruck answers before Obi-Wan can.

Garen laughed. “Oh man, this is so karked up.” 

“Yep.”

“I say we get more drinks, who’s in favor?” Quin suggested loudly. 

“Get us the good shit, Quin. Today we’re going to get our Knight-Errant here drunk.” 

“You will try.” Obi-Wan retorted.

“You just see, Obi. We’ll have to carry your sorry ass back to the Temple tonight.” 

Obi-Wan couldn’t wait for that.

–.--

When Dex’s Diner closed, they moved on to Little Keldabe. Quinlan was already drunk and Garen was well on his way to be too. Bruck had paced himself, so from the six of them, he was faring better - not counting Obi-Wan himself. Siri and Bant were sporting blushes but they seemed fine.

Diath’s diner was their choice for drinks. The Mandalorian owner was happy to see them - Obi-Wan and his friends were famous now, with the news of having worked alongside the Mand’alor for a year, every Mandalorian knew about the Jedi mission to free slaves in the Outer Rim. 

“ Su cuy'gar , Diath!” They said in unison, entering her establishment.

“ Su cuy’gar, verd’ika. ” She echoed the sentiment. “What are you doing here at this time?” 

“We’re celebrating Obi-Wan’s Knighting!” Quin answered her, almost falling on his face if not for Bruck to catch him at the last minute. 

“Oh, congratulations, Obi’ka. Then, in this case, the first round of drinks is on the house.”

She received various excited exclamations at that and started serving them.

“Does the Mand’alor knows?” 

“No, I haven’t had the chance to tell him yet.” Obi-Wan answered. “I know Jango will want to celebrate when they see me again.”

“Oh, Force yes! I can’t wait to drink with them!” Quin was officially out of control. “Why aren’t you drinking, Obi? You have to drink more!”

“You see what I have to deal with?” 

Diath laughed. “You’re lucky you Jetti can drink before majority or else I’d have to call your Ba’ji .”

“Ugh, don’t remind me.” Obi-Wan said, ignoring Quin’s ramblings with Garen. “My Ba'ji told me to not come back home till dawn. I’m stuck with these guys here for forever.”

“Ah, we love you too, Obi.” Bant replied while Siri made kissing faces at him. Bruck took his hand and made a scene of kissing it loudly. Obi-Wan made a disgusted face at him.

They laughed and drank more.

Obi-Wan ended up being the sober friend that ensures everyone returns safely home. It was dawn when they stepped inside the Temple. Obi-Wan returns each one of his friends to their respective quarters and receives quiet thanks from their Masters. 

He prods his bonds and goes to Master Windu’s quarters to see his Masters.

“Ah, there he is.” Master Plo welcomes him. “Just in time too. We were already deciding if we should give back your clothes to the Quartermaster.”

“Very funny, Master.” Obi-Wan goes to help in the kitchen. “I need at least two cups of tea before I can discuss my new sleeping arrangements.”

“You don’t seem drunk.” Master Windu comments, exiting the fresher.

“‘m not.” He replies, sitting and serving them tea. “We started the night at Dex’s and finished at Diath’s. That reminds me I have to call Jaster and give him the news, I think he’ll plan a celebration too.”

“That he will.” Master Dooku agrees, then he makes a disgusted expression. “You stink of alcohol, though.” 

“Let me drink my tea and then I’ll clean up. You should see the others, Master.”

“Did Quin make a scene?” Master Plo asks, mirth in his eyes.

“Yeah, he and Garen have always been loud drunks. I had to carry everyone home. Bruck helped a little since he was almost sober by the time we left.”

“How much do you have to drink to get drunk?” Master Windu asks, curious.

“Oh, a lot. But I have the distinct impression that you'll be able to see it if you tag along for our celebration with Jaster. They have the good stuff.”

“I’ll think about it.” He says. “How’s Diath?”

“She’s good. Business has been doing great lately. She said more Jedi are becoming customers. You wouldn’t have anything to do with that, would you?”

Master Windu says nothing. Obi-Wan is not fooled by his nonchalant expression at all. 

“I gotta go, I have classes to teach today.” He says, getting up and washing his cup. 

Obi-Wan makes quick work on the fresher, exiting it wearing new robes.

“See you later?” 

“We’ll play sabacc tonight.” Master Plo promises.

“Alright.” And he exits the quarters, excited to get through his first day as a Knight-Errant.

–.--

“Obi-Wan?” Master Plo calls him.

“Yes, Master?” He asks, coming from the kitchen, with a mouth full of food and more on his plate.

Uncivilized, he knows. But he has been so hungry lately - Master Dooku gave him one critical look and declared him ready for another growth spurt, to which he replied he already had reached his adult height.

“Are you sure, Obi-Wan?” Master Windu asked, not looking up from his pad. “You’ve been eating a lot and you still have a few years left of youth to grow.”

“I am. I’ve been this height since I was sixteen in my other life.”

A frown crossed Master Dooku’s face - his expression told Obi-Wan he had found something that made him angry.

“What had you been doing at sixteen, Padawan?” Oh, when he used Padawan like this Obi-Wan knew he was shielding his feelings from their bond to not make him flinch. 

“I…I think I was on Mandalore. My year mission with Satine on the run. Why?”

This time both of his Masters exchange frowns. 

“On the run you said?”

“...yes.”

“Was Qui-Gon with you the entire mission?”

“No. We had to separate and I stayed with Satine. Why? What does it have to do with anything?”

“You were a teenager, Obi-Wan. A Stewjoni teenager, no less. You hadn’t stopped growing, your body became malnourished and as a consequence from starving you didn’t grow.” 

“But I-”

“It happened on Melidaan too, didn’t it?”

“I shared my food with them. They were just kids.”

“I know, Obi-Wan. You did your best. But you said you never spent much time at the Temple. Did Qui-Gon take you to the healers to see if you needed extensive medical care?”

“...no. The healers scanned me for injuries and applied bacta but nothing more. I heard them talking to Master Jinn but…”

“But he never made you eat more.” Master Windu completes, now paying full attention to the conversation, pad forgotten on the table.

“It explains why you’d eat so little. You’re used to surviving on the bare minimum. The war just aggravated it and then your exile.” Master Dooku says, voice hard. “With us you didn’t eat much at the beginning too. But you’re getting better at eating more.”

“Oh. I hadn’t noticed.” Obi-Wan looked at his own body, then turned to Master Dooku. “Do you think I’ll grow much more?”

"That is a question you have to ask your friend Bant.”

Obi-Wan smiled, finished eating and cleaned his dish. He was out in a flash after, going after Bant to ask her. He couldn’t believe he was still growing! He had no illusions of being as tall as Anakin or even Master Dooku but at least he hoped to not be the dwarf in their lineage anymore (leave that to Master Yoda and perhaps Ahsoka - he never discovered what happened to her after so he had no way of knowing how tall she would be as an adult).

(However he didn’t notice the concerned looks his Masters had after he left them).

But coming back to the present, he finds Master Plo in his bedroom, a confused look behind his mask.

“What is this?” His Master asks, pointing to… the egg .

“Oh, that.”

“Yes, Padawan. That.”

“It’s an egg.”

A tug in their bond, reprimanding.

“You see…it was my mission to kinda find it?”

“Your mission was to find an egg.”

“Yes.”

“Do I need to call your other Masters for them to hear the whole story too?”

“It would be for the best, I think.”

Master Plo just shakes his head, used to his antics. That night, Obi-Wan introduces them to…the egg.

“ A what? ” Master Windu’s frown is in full mode after hearing Obi-Wan’s recount of the mission.

“A Mythosaur.” He repeats. “At least that’s what I think it is.”

“You think?”

“I mean, the Force nudged me there. And Ba’ji Vizsla said it was possible that the species weren’t completely extinct, just hidden and less active.”

“And remind us again why you listened to a holocron of a dead Jedi Master that’s been out of commission for the last thousand years.” Master Dooku says.

None of them are angry at him or the egg per se. But they are exasperated and incredulous.

“It seemed like a good idea at the time.” 

Obi-Wan thinks that this is how Anakin must’ve felt when he gave him lectures or even reprimands over the years - he is a Knight and technically his Masters can’t lecture him anymore but he still lives and shares bonds with them.

(He thought about moving out and trying to live in one of the Knights' single-bedrooms but when he realized he had never lived by himself by his own decision, the thought of being alone for the first time in an empty apartment filled him with dread and his anxiety was so out of control that Master Windu had to hold him in his arms until he calmed down. 

That night they had another frank conversation: Obi-Wan would always be welcomed at their shared quarters with any of his Masters; he didn’t have to rush, they had time to figure out things. Obi-Wan admitted he didn’t think he could stand to arrive in an empty apartment, it’d remind him too much of his exile and he never wanted to feel that way again. His Masters understood and that had been it). 

“Alright.” Master Windu says, still frowning. “So you are taking care of an egg now. And what do you plan to do when it hatches?”

“I thought of helping it grow until it could survive in the wild and then take it back to its planet.”

“And you plan to take care of a Mythosaur inside the Temple.”

“A baby Mythosaur.”

“Obi-Wan, this egg is the size of a box. How much do you think a baby Mythosaur grows until it can survive by itself?”

“Oh.” He hadn’t...thought about that detail .

Master Plo chuckled. 

“Well, if I can’t find a ship to transport him back, the Temple is still a good place for it.” He says, making up a plan as he goes. An idea shaping in his head. “We are empaths so living with it wouldn’t be a problem and I think it’d be good for the younglings, you know? Having an animal to play with, spend energy.”

“The younglings.” Master Dooku repeated. 

“...yes.”

“Good luck explaining that one to the Council, Padawan. I’m not supporting this crazy idea.” Master Windu tells him.

“But-”

“Nope. I’m abstaining from voting. In fact I refuse to even be inside the Council chambers, I'll let Master Yaddle tell me the story later.”

Obi-Wan turned to Master Dooku and Master Plo, eyes pleading.

Master Dooku shakes his head in a negative gesture.

“Can’t you feel it? It’s a living animal! It’ll probably be cute or something!”

“Don’t take me wrong, Obi-Wan,” Master Dooku says to him oddly serious (although Obi-Wan has the distinct impression his Master is laughing at him - he can see in his eyes), “but this is not the kind of changes I think the Order should be doing.”

“Master Plo? Please, you’re my only hope!”

“Sorry, little one. I have to side with your Masters on this one.”

“...”

Obi-Wan goes to Quinlan to ask for help. Surprisingly (between the quarter of a brain cell they share), they come up with a plan: hiding the egg from the Council, when it hatches, introduce it to the younglings’ clans. When the baby Mythosaur can no longer be hidden, the Council will have no other option but to support the new addition to the Temple - with more than a hundred toka eyes’ from younglings they won’t stand a chance and victory will be theirs.

He can only hope their plan will work out in the end. 

Master Tholme, who has been paying silent attention to their conversation, is hiding a twitch of lips. 

Well, there’s a reason why Quinlan has been his best friend in both of his lives. 

–.--

Obi-Wan meets Ventress again (for the first time in this life) during his week of exams (yes, he is a Knight now but doesn’t mean he intends to give up on his Healing classes even if it’s the last thing he ever does). The Dathomirian girl is just like he remembers: sassy and clever. She is just beginning to catch up with her classes, having been raised outside the Temple, she lacked the formal knowledge background that the Jedi usually have. 

He hadn’t planned to become involved with her but…well, Master Yoda finds him one day and invites him over for tea, and he couldn’t exactly say no to his Grandmaster so he goes (and this time, he takes with him a modest bag of food and tea bags because he absolutely hates Master Yoda’s food, if it could be even be called that).

Master Yoda laughs when he sees what Obi-Wan brought with him in his bag. 

“Eight hundred years I have. Been a Master for more than half of that, I have. Never bring their own food my Padawans did, always suffering and complaining behind my back about eating with me they are.” Then he pokes Obi-Wan with his stick playfully and he pretends to be irritated. “Think yourself cleverer than them, you do?”

Obi-Wan laughs, “Master Yoda, I don’t think I’m clever, I’m just developing a sense of self-preservation. I’m pretty sure your food is not for humans.”

The troll has the audacity to laugh. “Knew something special you had, I did.”

He accepts the compliment and eats his biscuits while Master Yoda pours them more tea. 

“Especial in more ways than the eyes may see, you are Grandpadawan.” His Grandmaster says after a while. Obi-Wan doesn’t freeze but he does take a shaken breath. “When an Initiate you were, remember I do, a change in your Force signature happened. Waited I have, to know what it means. To pair you with Qui-Gon I wanted but the Force your path changed too, so observed you I have.” 

“You never said anything, Master.” 

“ Hmm ,” is what Master Yoda answers, he doesn’t appear angry or anything of the sort, just curious, “wish to know why changes you pushed for in the Order I do. Why so interested in Mandalore you are. Connected the motives behind it, I suspect they are. Explain it to me, would you?”

His Grandmaster is not pushing for answers here, he is just…trying to understand. Obi-Wan decides to tell him.

“I’ll tell you Master, if we meditate together.” 

Master Yoda agrees and when they finish their tea, Obi-Wan opens his mind and memories to his Grandmaster to see - not everything, not all the horrors, but the important parts. 

Master Yoda is breathing hard by the end of it, when he sees flashes of the Temple, burning. When he and Obi-Wan said their goodbyes and left each for their own imposed exiles. 

Obi-Wan untangles his mind from his Grandmaster’s and waits for Master Yoda to open his eyes. When he does, they seem to have aged a hundred years in the last hour they spent together meditating.

“I never said anything before because I doubted someone would believe me, Master.” He explains softly. “You understand now why I have been pushing for changes here, don’t you. I just want us to survive.”

“Right you are, in following the Force Obi-Wan.” Master Yoda agrees with him. “Blind for a long time, I have been. Stagnant and set in my old ways I had become. Glad for having you with us I am. Showed me how fool I am you did. Proud to be your Grandmaster, in both of your lives I am.”

Obi-Wan felt a lump on his throat and he felt Master Yoda’s claw squeeze his hand. 

“Need to say something, you do not. Continuing to be who you are, is just what our Order needs. Worry yourself with the future, do not, help you we will.”

“Thank you, Master Yoda.”

After a few minutes of silence, Master Yoda asks:

“Curious I am, know Padawan Ventress you do?” 

That was a question that smelled like his Grandmaster’s typical meddling.  

“I do. She was a darksider in the war. I fought her many times. Why?”

“ Hmm , in the Temple with her Master, she is. Arranged for it your Masters did. Trouble in adapting and making friends she is having.”

“You want me to help her?” Obi-Wan asks, surprised. “I…do you really think it would be a good idea, Master? I mean, she may not know me but-”

Smack . 

“Focus your mind on the present, you should. Afraid of your memories you shouldn’t be, Padawan Ventress, a lot of potential has. Help her to be a great Jedi you can. Know how she feels you do - misplaced you both feel, make her see the Temple as a home perhaps the only one who can you are.”

Obi-Wan ponders the words, finding truth in them - he did feel like a stranger here when he woke up in the Initiate dorms, disconnected from his brothers and sisters. Ventress maybe feels the same way. That makes him remember Anakin, who never really felt that the Jedi could be his family and Obi-Wan knows it was one of the factors that helped push him away from them and fall into the Sith’s hands.

If he can prevent history from repeating itself with Ventress, he should help her in any way he can.

And that’s how he finds himself looking for Padawan Ventress and finds her in the dojos - of course he would find her there. 

“Sparring with a partner usually helps to improve your form faster.” He says as a way of introducing himself. “I’m Obi-Wan.”

“Asajj, and I know who you are, Kenobi .” She says, somewhat angry with his presence there. “Don’t you have something better to do?”

“I’m afraid not, my dear.” He is a little disturbed by how easy it is to fall into their characteristic banter again, although they are meeting for the first time. (At least, flirting with her is somewhat not entirely inappropriate). “But I’m not here to offer you criticism, I’m afraid. I’m actually looking for a sparring partner and you appear to be quite a challenge, if you’d be willing.”  

He cannot help the curl of his lips and the sweet sarcasm that pours from his lips - even if his words are genuine. 

She stops fully to look at him, her eyes making way from the top of his head till his feet, judging. She looks suspicious but reluctantly agrees. 

He had already stretched in his quarters before coming here, so he’s good to go.

Their lightsabers crash and their spar begins.

–.--

A few days after that, it seems that Asajj is warming up to him. That is, if her threats of crushing him and her curses are anything to go by. She does flirt back, which is nice and they both enjoy provoking each other. 

Obi-Wan’s friends saw them sparring one time and they all looked at them with questioning expressions. Quinlan asked him after if they were kriffing - to which Obi-Wan replied only with a smirk and a laugh. 

(Obi-Wan felt a devious pleasure in confusing his friends, and even better that Asajj seemed to share his opinion and never gave a straight answer about their relationship to anyone, no matter who asked).

Master Dooku asked him after he, by coincidence, passed through the dojos and saw their flirting. He knew she was a darksider and his enemy once.

“Are you and Padawan Ventress…”

Obi-Wan smirked. “Are we what, Master?” 

When he saw that Obi-Wan had no intention of sharing any details, his Master grumbled something under his breath.

Obi-Wan had the dignity of not laughing to his face but he was very tempted to.

–.--

This time, when Obi-Wan goes to Mandalore again, he takes not only his friends with him but Ventress too, to coordinate their next mission on Zygerria. It is a good idea because even if they think she is weird, his friends are starting to warm up to her and her Master is less concerned for her as the days in hyperspace pass. 

When they finally arrive, Jaster hugs him tightly and promises a celebration the next night. In the corner of his eyes, he sees Jango’s smug smirk and Myles’ conspiratory glint in his eyes.

They get him completely wasted at the party. 

He knew they had the good stuff with them but it’s been a long time since he has drunk with the intention of letting loose, so his tolerance is not what it used to be (not that anyone needs to know that).

By midnight, Obi-Wan barely remembers his own name and he’s blushing for absolutely no reason at all. He curses himself and his lack of beard. His friends, the traitors they are, take holos of him making an ass of himself and send all evidence to his Masters. 

Oh, they will see. Obi-Wan will get his revenge soon and he doesn’t care if it’s not the Jedi way.

Against his will, Obi-Wan is enrolled in a drinking contest after that. Since he has a reputation to maintain, he has to outdrink everyone of his challengers. Including Jango, and seriously, who taught this guy to drink? He isn’t a Jedi, how is he still sitting? He should be in a coma!

They drink until Obi-Wan can’t feel his face. Force, he’ll have a splitting headache tomorrow. Jango doesn’t seem any better but none of them are willing to let the other win. 

It is, by some miracle , that Jango loses his balance while sitting and when he falls off his chair - he doesn’t get up after that. Obi-Wan is declared winner, with his reputation intact.

The downside of having drinking the entire night is that he has to be helped by Jaster into his quarters or he’ll fall on his face just like Jango (and he can’t have that now, can he). He’ll deny till his passing to the Force, but he was totally carried there. Thank the gods that Jaster made him shower and brush his teeth before allowing him to bed. 

The next morning, Obi-Wan is, as expected, terribly hungover. He swears to not let any of his so-called friends see it. So he drinks his tea and shallows medicine to help him (thank the Force for Jaster) and meditates - a better cure for his pounding headache there isn’t. 

When he appears at breakfast, with a smooth face, without a trace of red eyes or signs of pain, his friends complain.

“This isn’t fair! How can a person drink so much and not wake up with a hangover? Look at his baby Jedi face!” Quin complains.

“Oh, my friend, I’m sorry to disappoint you.”

“You’re not, liar.” 

Obi-Wan laughs and hears his friends complaining about the loudness of his voice. 

Jaster enters the living room after that, carrying a box with him. Jango is accompanying him, with Myles (he notices that neither are hungover and in a flash, he remembers his vod who he never saw sporting hangovers either, and he wonders if Jango’s DNA has something special about it). They all have bright smiles on.

“ Ugh , it’s too early for this much happiness,” Siri complains. “Go away.”

“Ah, so Jetii can suffer from hangovers just as much as common folk.” Myles says, laughing at Siri’s murderous expression.

“Kark you all.” She says which only makes Myles laugh harder.

“Ob’ika, I have a dinui for you.” Jaster says, cutting their bickering off and handling him the box. “I know being a Knight is a symbol of independence for you Jetti , and although for us the majority age is thirteen, I think this will serve you nicely.”

Obi-Wan takes the heavy box from his hands, an idea of what he’s receiving forming in his head. When he opens it, his eyes still don’t believe in him.

“Jaster…” 

“Do you like it?” The Mand’alor asks, uncharacteristically nervous.

“This is- Is it- But I’m not-”

“You are, Ob’ika. You are a Jetii , and you are also Haat Mando’ade , part of House Mereel, always. And you earned your beskar’gam because you have proved you have more mandokarla than many.”

“Oh,” he says, dumbly, “I…thank you, buir .”

He gains a hug and if Jaster’s new name sounds awfully familiar with how Jango calls him, none of Obi-Wan’s friends comment on it. Jaster quickly rushes him to change to see if his new armor fits.

When Obi-Wan returns, his armor still unpainted, his friends look at him wide-eyed.

“Obi…”

“...you look like…”

“...Tarre Vizsla.”

“Force, even your saber is Mandalorian.” 

Obi-Wan smiles, feeling… complete - he missed his Clone Wars armor but this. This is something else. His new beskar’gam fits him perfectly, as if it was his fate to wear it all along. For a second, he has a flashback from when he went to Jedha and saw himself in armor. If wearing beskar’gam means fighting for justice across the galaxy alongside his aliit , Obi-Wan is more than happy to fulfill this vision.

“I feel like I’m the second Mandalorian Jetii .” He comments.

“What do you think, Ob’ika?” Jango asks.

“You don’t have a place where I can paint it, do you?” 

–.--

Jaster takes his ade to a room full of paint supplies. Ob’ika’s eyes are wide, taking it all in.

“Have you thought about a color?”

“I have an idea or two.” His ade has always been enigmatic and quiet.

“Will you share with me? Or do I have to wait to see?”

Obi-Wan looks seriously at him, raising an eyebrow. Jaster realizes he is judging his beskar’gam’s painting. 

Smiling, he asks, “have I passed your inspection?”

“Yes.” Then he turns to pick a few colors. “Do you want to help me?”

“Of course.” 

They have nothing planned for today except to rest and update each other about the latest gossip. Obi-Wan takes a piece of paper and a few colored pencils to make a sketch before painting the beskar . Jaster doesn’t even ask where he learned the steps to paint it - he won’t get an answer.

“I heard you adopted an egg.” Jaster says, voice nonchalantly, while he waits for his ade to finish drawing.

Obi-Wan murmurs a yes.

“A Mythosaur egg.” He continues, knowing Ob’ika is paying attention. “And a little bird told me that you intend to raise it on the Temple.”

Obi-Wan looks up from his sketch. “Quin.”

Jaster nods. “Are you sure that it’s the best place for it? Won’t the Ba’ji be angry with you?”

His ade shrugs. “By the time they demand to take it off-planet, the younglings will be begging to let it stay.”

He laughs. “You are mad, have I told you that?”

“Many times, buir .” Obi-Wan complains. “Now, what do you think?”

He shows him the drawing. 

“I think your Order is in for a change of fashion.”

Obi-Wan smiles. “That’s what I thought.”

They spend hours together painting it. It is a relaxing activity and doing it with aliit is even better.

“You know, I missed this.” Obi-Wan says, his head down and eyes sharp and focused on making a straight line with his paint-brush. 

The comment’s meaning is lost to Jaster. Obi-Wan has the habit of saying things that make no sense when he is focused like this on something. If he asks, he knows Obi-Wan will pretend to not have said that or even brushing it off.

Jaster knows better. Having been a buir for more than a decade, he likes to think that he knows the signs to when an ade is lying or even hiding something. Ob’ika gives nothing away with his body - he is too well trained to make a mistake like this. But Jaster learned that it is not his body that betrays him, it’s the small innocent comments he lets out here and there when he is distracted. 

More than once, during his conversations with Obi-Wan’s Ba’ji he asked - wanting to understand better the brave verd’ika that had helped them to bring peace and unify their system. At first he thought the three of them were lying to him with their vague answers. But after getting to know them better, he understood that his Ba’ji didn’t know either what passed through the ade ’s mind. Sometime later, that changed - they knew but Jaster was still in the dark. Now, as his buir , he could ask but he wants Obi-Wan to trust him.

Ka’ra knows that this brave boy doesn’t trust easily, and Jaster wants to earn that, just like he earned Jango and Arla’s trust.

“You’re thinking too hard, Jaster.” Obi-Wan says, not looking up.

“Sometimes thinking is done best in places like this.”

Obi-Wan doesn’t hide his smile from him. “You want to ask a lot of things but you are...no, you want me to tell you.”

“I’d prefer to, yes. But I’d never force you to talk to me.”

“I know.” Obi-Wan says softly. “I don’t think you’d believe me if I told you everything.”

“Would you tell me parts of it, then?”

Obi-Wan looks up from his work. His face is serious, and Jaster thinks he looks much older like this.

“The burden of knowledge.” Obi-Wan says quietly, his eyes seeking answers that Jaster isn’t sure he has to give. “Are you sure you want to carry it?”

“Yes. I made a vow, Obi-Wan. I’m here for you.”

“Alright.” He says, returning to his beskar . “It was easier to share with my Ba’ji but I guess we’ll go the traditional way.”

Jaster wants to ask what that means but Obi-Wan starts speaking and he won’t interrupt.

“I am not a teenager, Jaster. Actually, I am older than you.” He tells him, although he is pretending to still be painting, Jaster can see that he is nervous and tense. “I lived this life once and died. The Ka’ra sent me back, and since then, I’ve been trying to fix things.”

“...alright.” Jaster is able to say after a few moments processing the information. Was he expecting this? No, this is the craziest thing Obi-Wan ever told him by far. But coming from his strange ade , it kind of makes sense. “What happened that you had to return?”

Obi-Wan's body is still, and his eyes are downcast but he is nervous. He's reading my emotions , Jaster realizes.

“A war.” He says, lifting his gaze from his beskar’gam , his eyes look so sad and distant that in this moment Jaster realizes Obi-Wan isn’t joking - he is telling the truth, a painful one. “There was a massacre of the Haat Mando’ade , you died and Jango…well, I’d say he didn’t cope. Years later the galaxy was at war, the Jedi were all killed by the end of it, only Ba’ji Yoda and I survived. Your people were scattered across the galaxy.”

Jaster doesn’t have anything to say to that. His ade continues, as if he dares to stop now, he won’t be able to say anything else.

“I fought in more battles than I could count, I wore armor alongside my vod , and I painted it with colors that meant hope.” He tells him, sounding angry at his memories. “I lost everything, everyone I loved. Now that I am here, I don’t intend to let anyone else die.”

“Ob’ika…” 

His brave ade looks in his eyes. There is a fire in them, a contained power that makes him fierce and determined. But there is also fear, an emotion Jaster is intimately familiarized with: of failure, of not being enough, of making things worse.

Getting up from his place on the floor, Jaster goes to sit beside his ade . His hand touches his face and draws him close, until their foreheads are touching. He remembers doing this to calm Jango and Arla after a nightmare, murmuring soft words to them, telling them all would be well.

“You don’t have to fix things alone, my kotep ade .” He murmurs gently, with a calm and conviction that only parenthood taught him. “I’ll be by your side to help you.”

He feels Obi-Wan’s tears but doesn’t hear them, his ade crying silently against him, his eyes closed. But his hands hold tightly on Jaster’s shirt, not letting him go. He has no intention of doing so.

“I made a vow, Ob’ika. A promise that I intend to keep. I can’t protect you from your enemies, but I will fight by your side to defeat them, I will help you carry this burden.” He continues saying, his quiet voice loud in the empty room. “There is no power in this galaxy that can keep a buir from his ade .”

Obi-Wan lets out a pained laugh quietly in between his tears. “I want to believe in you. I want to…”

“I know, but you don’t need to.” Jaster tells him firmly. “It is my promise, and I am the one who has to prove to you that I’ll keep it.”

His ade nods, eyes shining and full of light. That’s better - Obi-Wan deserves the universe.  

When they finish, much later, they admire their job. 

“I like it.” Jaster gives his honest opinion. “It fits you.”

“Yeah?”

“Yes. You make your Order proud, and our traditions.”

“I…thank you.”

“Let me take a holo of you.”

“What- Why?”

“House Mereel tradition: new beskar’gam or new painting and a holo is taken so I can frame it and display it to everyone.”

Obi-Wan raised a skeptical eyebrow, “really.”

“Yes. I’ll show you Arla and Jango’s. I even have some of Myles.”

Obi-Wan laughed, “alright.”

Of course Jaster is old fashioned and prints it to frame. He will send it to Ob’ika’s Ba’ji later too. Part of being a buir is to be embarrassing - half of the job’s fun is to make your ade red in the face, the other half is bragging about them to anyone who cares to listen. 

–.--

Being on Zygerria again gives colors to Obi-Wan’s nightmares and memories. He remembers being captured and people dying because of him, of his oh-so-self-righteousness-untamed-spirit . 

He hates being back here but he knows it is for a good cause - so that history doesn’t repeat itself.

Still. It is hard. 

Perhaps the hardest mission he’s ever been since being sent back on this time. 

Everyone notices how tense he is, how serious he’s become. Jaster makes an intervention after two days have passed and Obi-Wan shows no signs of sleeping or even eating properly.

“Alright ade , what is happening?” Jaster raises his hand, silencing his protests. “You’re not well, Ob’ika. I know you and I haven’t seen you like this since we’ve met. Talk to me.”

“I’m sorry.”

“There’s no shame in needing help, everyone does from time to time. Ka’ra knows that verde like us need it more than others, it comes with the lifestyle. Do you want me to call your Ba’ji ? Would that help?”

“...I think so.”

Jaster nods and takes a comm. It’s almost midnight in Coruscant but his Masters pick up, all three of them together playing cards.

“Is everything alright, Jaster? It’s late.” Master Windu asks, starting to frown.

His buir sits beside him and Obi-Wan appears in the holo. His Masters don’t need words, just a quick look at him is enough to know what is happening.

“Would you like to talk about it, Padawan?” Master Plo's voice is gentle, their game forgotten and all their attention on him. 

“I don’t know.” Obi-Wan manages to say. “I…I thought going on this mission was a good idea.”

“And it was, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku tells him. “You are doing a noble thing, saving lives. How long have you been slipping?”

Obi-Wan doesn’t know. 

“Two days.” Jaster answers when Obi–Wan remains quiet. “Does this happen frequently?”

“No. The last time was when we met.” Master Windu speaks. “Obi-Wan, you have to open up. Talk through what you’re feeling with us.”

“I’m remembering…” He says, it’s hard to stay anchored in the present. “Last time it wasn’t good.”

Master Windu nods, accepting the half hearted answer. Jaster holds his hand tightly in support.

“We had to infiltrate the planet to look for people who had been enslaved. I was undercover with Rex. Anakin was supposed to rescue us after we gathered intel. But it went wrong and-” 

“It’s alright, Obi-Wan, take your time.”

“They knew I was a Jedi, why I was there. They put a collar on me and I could’ve escaped but they threatened the other slaves. Said they would kill them if I helped.” He says brokenly. “I couldn’t help anyone. Every time I tried to do someone’s work for them, they hurt them, killed them. It was a shitshow. And then after Anakin finally managed to free us, he told me what they’d done with Ahsoka.”

A heavy silence falls upon them. They know she was his Grandpadawan and that she fought in the war with them, but to imagine that she was on that mission…

“I had argued that she should’ve stayed on the ship but the Council…well, they saw nothing wrong with sending a young Togruta there.” He says angrily. “She had to pretend to be a pleasure slave. They didn’t do anything with her but- After, Anakin and I had to always be with her. We all bunked together. The nightmares were…I don’t- Is it wrong to want to give up? I don’t think I-” 

“It’s not wrong, Obi-Wan.” Master Dooku answers. “Your well being is just as important as the mission.”

“No one will think less of you if you choose to return to the Temple.” Jaster says.

“I…Really?”

“Yes, Padawan. Would you like for us to go and retrieve you?”

Obi-Wan thinks about Master Plo’s offer. He would be taking the easy path if he accepted for the first time in both of his lives - some part of him wanted to know what it was like to give up and not push past his comfort zone. But he has always known sacrifice, and how important it was that he go through Sith Hells and beyond so that others didn’t need to, because he was a Jedi and he made a vow to always help no matter the cost.

“I’ll stay.” He decides quietly. 

“Are you sure, ade ?”

“I am. I’m a Jedi and it’s my duty to help even if I’m afraid of my nightmares, but I still want, need your help.”

“And you have it, Padawan, always.” Master Windu reafirms. “Have you been able to meditate?”

He shakes his head. “I tried but…”

They don’t joke that there is no try . Instead, they look supportive and encouraging, and Obi-Wan knows that if they were in the same system, he would feel them lending their strength through the bonds.

“Is there anyone who you’d feel comfortable with to help you meditate?” Master Plo asks. 

“I don’t know. Maybe Master Tholme? He’s always been nice to me.”

Master Tholme had volunteered for the mission after seeing how much Quin had grown when they’d come back from the last one.  

Jaster nods. “Will you be alright while I look for him?”

“I will.”

“What’s on your mind, Padawan?”

“I feel like an Initiate asking for help.” 

“Everyone needs help sometimes, and Tholme has infinite patience.”

Against his dark mood, Obi-Wan couldn’t help but snort. “That’s an understatement with Quin as his Padawan.” 

Master Plo lets out a little laugh. 

“Hello there. I was told you needed me?”

“Would you help me meditate, Master?”  

“Of course, Obi-Wan. It’s no trouble. Force knows Quinlan needs my guidance to start his meditations more than he’d like to admit. You know how he is.”

“I know. Thank you.”

Feeling Master Tholme’s signature brushing against his is soothing. There is no judgment coming from him, only patience and a little amusement (but Obi-Wan knows the Master is probably thinking about helping Quinlan with own meditations).

You’re doing well, Obi-Wan. If you were Quinlan, we’d still be trying to find a comfortable position to sit still.

Obi-Wan can’t help but send his own memories of trying to meditate with his friend and feeling impatient with his nervous energy.

Now, you’d like to focus on what has been troubling you?

That makes Obi-Wan hesitate. Master Tholme doesn’t know about his secret and opening up to him is…well, he doesn’t know if it is wise to do it. But then he remembers that this is Quin’s Master. He is a specialist in dealing with bullshit thrown at him. Plus, he is a Shadow and he’s seen more of the dark edges of the galaxy than most Jedi.

He can trust Master Tholme. No, that’s not right - he can trust not only Quin’s Master, but all his Jedi brothers and sisters. Even Jaster’s verde if he needs it, they’ll be there for him.

The Force nudges him and the fear he has been carrying inside himself all of these years lessens. Obi-Wan trusts the Force to guide him and this time is no different. He opens his mind to Master Tholme and lets him see his memories, sense his troubled emotions.

That’s…a lot, Obi-Wan . Master Tholme sends him, a little overwhelmed and concerned. But the Master doesn’t ask questions about what happened to him as he expects and he feels grateful for it.

I can’t clean my mind, the Force’s been…difficult, and my meditations haven’t helped.

I can see that . Master Tholme jokes lightly and Obi-Wan appreciates the effort. I’m going to help you untangle this mess, how does that sound ?

Obi-Wan sends him permission and Master Tholme gently guides him to the heavy knots of his feelings and memories to start untangling them. 

It’s a slow process and more than once they have to stop because the feelings are so strong and there’s so much repressed anger and grief and sadness that they both feel unbalanced and more than once it disrupts their connection to the Force. Obi-Wan knows he is probably crying and making Jaster worried but Master Tholme and he can’t stop in the middle, it would do more damage to his physic than not.

He is grateful for the patience and calm Master Tholme sends to him, even when he can feel the Master is not feeling like that at all and will probably spend hours in his own meditation after that just to regain his balance after he’s done with him.

You’ve been through a lot , he comments when they pause for a brief moment, a mind healer could help you so that this doesn’t happen in this intensity again.

Master Tholme’s voice in his mind has no judgment, it’s only an honest suggestion and Obi-Wan knows he is right.

I can’t yet , he decides to reply, this is just a small part, Master. There are other things at stake if my memories come out to the light and I can’t risk that. People would die if this fell into the wrong hands.

This wouldn’t happen to have anything to do with your conversation with Quinlan, would it?

Obi-Wan’s first instinct is to deny but of course Quin would share his concerns with his Master.

How much did he tell you?

Nothing concrete but the implications were enough.

Then you understand why I’m trying to keep this quiet, for now. 

My lips are sealed, Obi-Wan. If there’s anything you need, I’ll be happy to help or put the blame on Quinlan.

Obi-Wan laughs - and it’s strange to laugh inside your own mind - and the mood is less heavier after that, more hopeful.

“I feel better.” Is the first thing he says when he opens his eyes again.

“That’s good, Ob’ika.” 

“Now you just need to eat and sleep, Padawan.” Master Windu tells him. His Masters are still connected, waiting for him and Master Tholme to finish their meditation.

“How are you, Tholme?” Master Plo asks - and it just occurs to Obi-Wan that he and Master Tholme are Padawan-brothers (what a strange concept). 

Wait, does that make him…Quinlan’s uncle??!

No, he won’t think about it.

“I feel overwhelmed, to be honest. Now I know why Obi-Wan needs three Masters.” He jokes. “I’ll meditate more later.”

“I’ll get you both some food.”

Jaster goes, leaving them alone. 

“Are you sure you don’t want to return, Obi-Wan?” 

“I’m sure, Master.” He answers. “I have my aliit with me if I need help.”

“Alright, but call us if you need anything.” 

“I will.”

They say their goodbyes and disconnect. Some time later, Jaster returns with food, and both of them look at Obi-Wan with pride. That’s how he knows it will all be well.

–.--

“Ah, so this is how a holocron works.” Jango comments one evening. They are finishing wrapping things up this week before going back to Mandalore.

“Yes.”

“Didn’t buir give you one of Vizsla?”

“He did, but I’m practicing another technique.” Jango looked and saw Ba’ji Plo standing there, patiently waiting for Obi-Wan to pay attention to him again.

“Which is…?”

“Emerald Lightning.”

Lightning? 

“It’s exactly as the name suggests.” His little vod says as if he can hear his thoughts - he can. “It’s dangerous but very efficient, I’d say.”

“ Hmm .” He believes him. “Would you like to practice with me?”

Obi-Wan shakes his head. “I could hurt you, badly. Or even kill you, and I don’t want to have to explain to buir why I killed his heir.”

“What are you two doing?” Arla asks. Behind her, Ob’ika’s friends tagging along.

“Ob’ika is practicing his Jetii osik .”

“It’s not-”

“Oh yeah,” Quinlan interrupts, “we can train together then.”

“I don’t think it’s a good idea guys…”

“Nonsense.” Garen says. “Besides, just because you’re the best swordsman in the Order, doesn’t mean you can’t practice with us, mere mortals.”

“I’m not-”

“I think little Kenobi here is afraid of facing us all.” Asajj cuts him, a dangerous smile on her lips.

“Will you listen to me?” His little vod says, somewhat exasperated. It’s a face that belongs to someone older, as if his patience is being tested by foundlings. “I’m training Emerald Lightning.”

Apparently, the name is all it takes for them to shut up and become serious.

“What is this…Lightning?” His annoying vod , Arla, asks.

“It’s a forbidden technique.” Bant explains - well, Jango still feels confused.

“It’s literally lightning that I can make with the Ka’ra and throw at people.”

“You can make…” Jango can’t blame Arla for being incredulous, he is too, “lightning.”

“Yes. But I have to meditate first, it’s part of it. I have to gather Lightside emotions.”

“Why?” This time it’s Myles that asks.

“Because if I use, say my anger to do it, it’d be a Darkside technique, and I’d become a Darjetii or a Sith, if you will. And if I am a good swordsman as a Jetii , can you imagine how powerful I’d be as a Sith?”

Oh. Even thinking about it brings shivers in Jango’s spine. They all studied about the Sith Wars. To think that his little vod could become one of them…

“That’s why I am here. Besides, open places are better. Less accidents.” Ob’ika says. Then he gives them a searching gaze. “But maybe…I could teach you to deflect it.”

“There is a way of deflecting it?” Bruck asks.

“Yes. Your lightsabers can absorb the energy. Or if you’re a seasoned Master, you can use your hands.”

“Hands?” Siri looks a little bit alarmed at that. Ob’ika just gives her a rueful smile. 

“Yes. Ba’ji Plo and Ba’ji Yoda can do it.”

“Wow.” Quinlan says. “Can you?”

“With my hands?” At his nod, Obi-Wan seems to ponder something before answering. “Yes. Ba’ji Plo taught me. It was one of the first things he taught me when we began.” 

“Wizard.” Garen says. “So, can you teach us too?”

Obi-Wan looks like he’s facing a dilemma. 

“Come on, Ob’ika.” Jango tells him. “No one here will kiss and tell.”

His vod shakes his head, resigned. “I take no responsibility for any injuries.”

Jango laughs. This will be fun.

--.--

It is not fun. 

It’s terrifying .

Seeing Obi-Wan throwing lightning at them - at the little Jetii - and seeing them struggling to catch it and stay still until it ended, feeling the air around them charged with energy, and knowing that his vod is not even tired and they’ve been at this for more than an hour…

Makes Jango question if Obi-Wan is even human - but is there another species that has this type of endurance? Is it normal?

By the looks Arla and Myles exchange with him, it is not. 

Finally, the Jetii seem to start grasping the concept. Bruck and Asajj manage to catch some of the lightning with their jetii’kad . Still struggling and panting but successful. 

Obi-Wan ends it and his knees give out. Jango is on him in an instant. Arla and Myles check on the others to see if they haven’t been hit by it and hurt.

This is the first time Jango has ever seen his little vod look exhausted and as if he might pass out. Still, the little idiot has the energy to smirk. 

“Lasted more…” He says, between heavy breaths. 

“You don’t say.” Jango replies dryly. “Are you going to pass out?”

“No. But I might need some help to get back to the ship.” 

Jango laughs. “I’ll carry you.”

He knows Ob’ika is really tired and out of it when he doesn’t protest. 

Looking at the others, he takes his crazy vod in his arms. He is heavy with all the beskar’gam but nothing he can’t carry. “I’ll be right back.”

Jango finds Jaster in their bunk, reading documents in his pad. 

“What happened?” His eyes don't even stray from what he’s reading. His buir is too used to dealing with Arla and Jango getting hurt - he used to panic each time for the first years, now he learned to be calm. 

“Ob’ika was practicing to throw lightning at the little jetii’ade .”

“Lightning?” That earns him worried eyes. 

“Totally wizard, buir . My vod is crazy, but like, a whole new level of crazy. More like mad. Just ask Arla, she recorded the entire thing.”

“I will. Is he going to be alright?”

“Yes. He’s just tired, and fell asleep on the way here.”

“I’ll take care of him.” Jaster promises while Jango lowers Obi-Wan on the bed. 

Jango has just finished removing Ob’ika’s beskar’gam - he knows from experience how awful it is to sleep on it - when his buir exclaims:

“ Holy shit .” 

“I know, right?” 

“Jango, what is this?” He asks but his attention is still on the holorecording playing on his pad.

“Ob’ika called it Emerald Lightning.” 

“Kriff. He can throw lightning from his hands? How does that even work?” 

“My best guess is Jetii osik .” He answers with all honesty he has. “I think you adopted more than what you bargained for.”

“I’m starting to think that too.” His buir can’t stop the holo. “You said he was practicing? Who taught him?”

“ Ba’ji Plo.” And that had been a surprise. Ob’ika’s Ba’ji didn’t look like a great warrior, from all the times he spoke with him, he had the impression that he was a soft Jetii, fond of ade and good humored.

“Those Jetii …” Jaster murmurs.

“Yeah, I’d never guess it was him.”

“Is this to be kept quiet?” Buir asks.

“From what the jetii’ade said, it’s a forbidden technique so I think it would be for the best, yeah.”

“Alright.”

They both fall silent. Then:

“You know, buir , I think that after that, Ob’ika could be considered a great verde .” Jango says, an idea on his mind. “Perhaps the greatest of us, apart from Tarre Vizsla maybe.”

“He is.” Jaster agrees but his eyes narrow, trying to see where Jango is going with this.

“And he is a Mandalorian.”

“Yes.”

“He proved his honor many times over.”

“Yes, Jango. What is your point?”

“He has mandokarla .”

Jaster huffs, annoyed, not dignifying that with an answer.

“Our people follow him.” He continues, ignoring his buir ’s impatience.

“Yes.”

“They respect him.”

“Yes, and?”

“He would be a great Mand’alor .” 

Sitting on a chair, Jaster is looking at him silently. 

“He is a Jetii .”

“So was Tarre Vizsla.”

Jaster exhales. “I don’t think he would leave the Jetii to rule, Jango.”

“But he is perfect for the position.”

“I agree. But he can do so much more if he is not bound to Mandalore. And let’s not pretend that this is more than just you trying to run away from your responsibility.” 

“But buir -”

“If Ob’ika wants, he can help you rule, as will Arla. But I have faith that you will be a great Mand’alor , and with your vod by your side, you’ll do a lot of good for our people, Jango. Don’t doubt yourself. I know the man I raised, and he is more than capable. You’ll continue to make me proud.”

Jango laughs. “It was worth a try.”

“Yes, almost got me fooled, Jan’ika.” His buir says, good humored. “Now sit here and help me with this,” at his groan of protest, Jaster adds, “and you don’t get to complain. You’ve been running away from paperwork for a week. Don’t think I didn’t notice.”

Ob’ika is lucky he is the youngest and still in Jaster's good graces. Jango signs, it seems he has work to do.

–.--

A few months later, a holo is sent to the High Council alongside a written report made by Jaster Mereel, Mand’alor and leader of the Haat Mando’ade .

We successfully disbanded the Zygerrian Empire. The routes of sentient traffic were cut out and the Republic is already preparing to send aid to the former slaves and endorse them on programs to help them reintegrate society. 

A few pirates and smugglers joined the operation, one of them, Hondo Ohnaka and his crew, worked alongside a former slave named Shimi Skywalker to infiltrate the slave audictions and gather information. 

The following planets are now passing through an intense reform in their economies and will require aid from the Jedi Corps to…

The holo, taken from Zygerrian, showed a lot of people: Jaster, Mand’alor , his son, Jango and their second in command, Myles, with their buy’ce off; Shimi Skywalker holding a laughing child in her arms; Hondo and his crew, holding drinks on their hands; and some of the Jedi sent for the mission, Padawan Quinlan, Bant, Siri, Garen, Bruck and Asajj, and their friend, Knight-Errant Obi-Wan who appeared to be wearing beskar’gam with a cape, painted with the Jedi insignia in green, with the rest of his armor in blue with little stripes for details in black.

Their combined smiles could illuminate the twin suns of Tatooine.

–.--

When Obi-Wan entered the Temple after his extended mission, he was still in his beskar’gam , with his buy’ce on - it was a good thing that it was open on his face, allowing others to see his face, like Tarre Vizsla's.

His friends walked alongside him, all confident in their steps to report to the High Council. Masters, Knights, Padawans and Initiates stopped their conversations to look at them. Obi-Wan smiled, they’d be the talk of the Temple again. 

When they entered the High Council chambers, Obi-Wan’s new… uniform raised a lot of eyebrows and curious frowns and he knows his Masters will have questions for him later.

“Congratulations on your mission.” Master Windu says. 

They bow and Bant says: 

“As Obi-Wan says, Masters, we were just following the Will of the Force.” 

“That you were, Padawan. Still, you’ve all done the Order proud, and this mission will count for your own Knighthood Trials.”

Obi-Wan lets an amused smile at the excitement he feels leaking in the Force from them.

“Now, if you would please, we want to hear your final report about it.” 

“We infiltrated the planet by pretending to be buyers.” Bruck starts. “Hondo and the Freed were of great help. We started by cataloging their numbers and what weapons they had.”

“Half of the team was working underground to disable the bombs in the collars. And our Masters were posing as buyers and Jaster’s verde were pretending to be slaves.” Quinlan continues.

“It all went according to the plan,” Master Narec says, “the Zygerrians didn’t notice until it was too late for them to take action. Although we disagreed in some parts, things went relatively smoothly.” 

Obi-Wan is quiet beside his friends, letting them give the report and enjoying seeing their progress. But at Master Narec’s reproach, the councilors’ eyes turn to him for answers.

“I needed more information.” He says, without elaborating how he had intended to get it. “It worked, didn’t it? I told you it was going to be fine.”

Quinlan scorns from where he is at Asajj’s side. 

“What happened, Obi-Wan?” Master Windu questions him, his look says that he wants an honest and detailed answer.

He signs. 

“After we took down the Hutts, I started investigating their financial transactions. Myles is very good at slicing and we hacked some of their data to look for other routes of sentient traffic and planets where the Republic might be overlooking slavery.” He tells them. “I found it curious that important allies of the Republic were behind it. They were the ones that financed the governor of Galidraan and the Kyr’tsad and now we discovered they were involved with slavery across the galaxy. I wondered if they were involved with the sudden rise of the Zygerrian Empire too.”

“And you decided to investigate.” Master Gallia completes. 

“Yes.”

“He’s not telling everything,” Siri says and Obi-Wan wants a hole in the ground to open and shallow him. He’s going to be in so much trouble for his actions. “Tell them, Obi.”

Master Dooku raises an eyebrow at him when he turns to face the counselors again.

“The Zygerrians don’t have many databases accessible on the planet. I had to go undercover in the queen’s palace to hack into it.”

Someone coughs. 

Master Narec says disapprovingly, “that’s not everything.”

He signs again. Does he really need to tell this? 

“I went undercover as a pleasure slave.” He explains, tiredly. “Stewjon’s inhabitants are famous for their fair skin and red hair. It makes for a high desirable slave in the markets. No one agreed to this part of the plan but it was the fastest way and the safest.”

There is a moment of tension in the Council chambers.

“You will need to see a mind healer, Knight Kenobi.” Master Poof breaks the silence. “This is a grave matter.”

“I’m fine, Master,” at the incredulous stares he receives, he adds, “Force suggestions do work on Zygerrians. Nothing happened.”

“Obi-Wan-”

“I swear it, Master Windu. Besides, that’s not the important thing. The Trade Federation is involved with the Zygerrians too, and there is a trace of credits that link them with the Banking Clans.” He says, shifting the focus. “I have had a bad feeling about them ever since our mission to Galidraan. Masters, the Muuns are up to something.”

“And what, exactly, are you suggesting they are planning to do?” Master Poof asks. 

“I don’t know for sure but I have a few suspicions. Jaster promised he would investigate the matter and let their best slicers work on it. But I fear that won’t be enough. Actually, I would like permission from this Council to include a few senators in this.”

“Why? The Senate didn’t sanction this mission, Obi-Wan. And if we involve them in this, the Order’s position could be questioned.”

“I know Master Nu. But this is bigger than any of us and the Republic should be involved, not all of it because of corruption. We’ll need allies for this and they should be aware of what is happening so they can defend us when the time comes for it.”

“Knight Kenobi, what do you think it’s going to happen here? We don’t intend to become enemies of the Republic to need this kind of preventive action.”

“Trust me, we need to. If my suspicions are proved right, things will get much worse before we can fix them and public opinion should be with us in this.”

“I don’t think-”

“Right, Knight Kenobi is.” Master Yoda speaks, interrupting Master Poof. “Dark times ahead I sense. Let it spread and become strong across the galaxy, we must not. If these senators trustworth they are, help us they can. Agreed we did to be more independent, but not away from people. If suspicious and feeling betrayed the senators are, a powerful enemy they can be and our work for nothing will be. Result in war it could. Careful we must be.” 

“Who are they, Obi-Wan?” Master Plo asks.

“Senator Organa is one of them, Master. He works with Mon Mothma. I believe that together they can be trusted with this investigation. As it is already, they are providing close support to the New Mandalorians to help the free slaves to find a new way of life.”

“You aren’t giving up on this, are you?” Master Sinube asks but he’s not really expecting an answer. “Tell us, Obi-Wan: would you go against this Council’s explicit orders to investigate and involve these senators?”

“Yes.”

“I think we don’t have a choice, do we. Will you keep us informed of this?” Master Gallia says, but she has a twitch in her lips that tells Obi-Wan that she is on his side.

“I will. Thank you, Masters.” He bows. 

“Please try not to cause any more troubles while you’re here, Obi-Wan.” Master Windu’s tone is long-suffering and Obi-Wan almost laughs at him.

“Can’t promise that.” 

“More to report about your mission, you have?” Master Yaddle inquires. 

“No, Master. The Freed will continue to work on dismantling the sentient’s traffic across the galaxy and they will contact us if they need our help. I would recommend sending some Shadows in training to support them, it could be a great way of learning.” Master Narec offers. 

“We will consider it.” Master Dooku promises. 

–.-- 

“Do you think you’ll manage to link this with…you know?” Garen asks as they leave the Council chambers.

“I don’t know. I’ll look for more ways to catch them but through the Banking Clans it should be easier. I don’t know what I'd have to go through if not.” He answers honestly. “It’s not like the Council will sanction me on a solo mission to pursue what they think is a legend. I’m already relieved I won’t have to go through their backs to ask Bail for help.”

“Well, maybe they won’t sanction it but…” Bant says, “you’re more resourceful than that, aren’t you?”

Obi-Wan smiled. “I appreciate your faith in me. As it happens, I’ve got one or two ideas if this one doesn’t work.”

“Just don’t forget to let us in the loop, Obi.” Siri says.

“Never.”

“Do you need someone to go with you to talk with senator Organa?”  

“No, I should be able to handle this without problems, Bruck. But I’ll ask you if I need anything.”

“Alright, but don’t come up with any crazy plans or else it’ll be difficult to explain it to Master Tholme.” Quin jokes. “May the Force be with you, Obi.”   

“With you too. I’ll see you guys later.”

–.--

Obi-Wan shows up in Bail’s apartment unannounced. His friend is surprised to see him but happy for his return after such a long time without being able to talk much. 

“How is Breha?” 

“She’s busy with all the work you gave her,” Bail complains, “Alderaan is thinking of expanding, actually. With the Hutts down, some planets would benefit from a strong alliance through integration.” 

“Ah, that is one way to go, isn’t it.”

“Yes, but the bureaucracy involved will give me gray hairs before I’m forty. And we have to treat it carefully or some senators will think we are starting an Empire.”

“ Hmm .”

“You are here to give me more headaches, aren’t you?” Bail asks, unsurprised. “But before you ask for anything, have you seen the holonews?”

“No, why?”

“You are something of a legend, let’s say.” At Obi-Wan’s raised eyebrow, he continued. “Everyone wants to talk to the team of Jedi and Mandalorians that went on the missions, get interviews and all of that.”

Obi-Wan laughs.  

“I’m serious. Most of the senators are trying to claim they supported the missions in secret just to gain points with their home planets. People consider you guys myths.”

“We just did what is right, Bail.”

“I know. But how many people do you know that have the resources to do, or at least start something like that, and actually use their credits for the good of others?” No one, was the answer - because it had been thousands of years since anyone had joined forces with the Jedi to do something about the slavery across the galaxy. Things like that weren’t common because people tended to not care about others as they should. 

Obi-Wan knows that. “Sometimes I wonder where we went wrong. When did the Jedi stop doing things like that? I ask myself and I don’t know the answer, Bail. It’s sad that we don’t have an answer for that. We shouldn’t be legends for simply doing what is right.”

“I know.”

“Are we mentioned by names in any of those news?”

“No. There was a lot of pressure for the Order to release your names but they were tight-lipped about it. Said it was for your safety. The Mandalorians didn’t say anything either.”

“Good.” Obi-Wan is internally relieved to hear that. He has been so careful to not expose himself or anyone to the watchful eyes of Sidious and Plagueis but he can’t prevent everything all the time. 

“I think I’m going to start charging you for my services, Obi-Wan.” Bail says, breaking his thoughts. “You are famous now, so I think it’s fair to demand a raise, you should probably be able to afford it.”

“Well, if you insist on payment , I’m sure we can work something out in…let’s say, a few years?” He flirts. Bail doesn’t blush (he never did, that’s an ability only Breha possesses) but he sees amusement in the man. “But for now, I do need your help.”

“Alright.”

“I’m investigating the Baking Clans and the Trade Federation.” He says seriously, all fun left behind now. “More specifically, the Muuns.”

Bail nods slowly. “Not that we don’t know they are corrupt but why?”

“They are involved with financing slavery in the Hutt and the Zygerrian Empires.” 

“There’s more to it than this, isn’t it. You would leave that to the Mandalorians if you didn’t suspect more.”

“You’re right.” Bail could always see through him. “Are you able to keep a secret? And I mean it, Bail. If you want to know the full truth, your life will be in danger. You can’t risk telling even Breha, for her safety.”

Bail is serious now. His posture is tense and he thinks about it for a moment. He nods twice and Obi-Wan continues.

“What do you know about the Sith?”

“The Sith? Aren’t they extinct?” He asks but it’s rhetorical. “They used to be the Jedi’s enemy, and could use the Force.”

“Yes. But it’s worse than that, Bail. The Sith are cruel and merciless. They are the opposite of us. Where we help, they destroy; we heal and they damage; we free and they enslave.”

His friend nods, understanding.

“I don’t want to explain how bad it would be for the galaxy if the Sith dominated it. I think you can imagine if the Republic as we know were transformed into an evil Empire that hunts Jedi and spreads fear. Two of them would be enough to crush everything you and I fight for, Bail.”

“Only two?”

“It’s a rule. There is always one Master and one Apprentice.”

“And you think the Sith are back?”

“I don’t think they are back, they never left.” Obi-Wan says, voice low. “They just hid in the shadows, biding their time until the right opportunity arises. It’s been millenia since we last fought them. Do you think anyone would suspect their return if we believed them dead?”

“No, it would be the last thing we’d think.”

“Exactly. Now, the Force gave me a warning. I saw them in my visions and Bail, any nightmare would be better than what I’ve seen.”

“The Banking Clans and the Trade Federation?”

“Yes. The Sith Master is a Muun. That’s why I’m keeping tabs on them. But Bail, they have too much power in the Senate as it is. I can’t start a public campaign against them without leaving them a chance to cover their tracks and disappear.”

His friend had a frown on his face, nodding deeply in thought.

“You’ll need this to be legal but not public.”

“Not public until the right time.” He agrees. “And I need the Senate to be aware of it without actually being aware. I know you have some friends that could help with that. We can’t have them turning public opinion against us. It’s already a difficult balance with the Order becoming independent from the Senate as it is. If the senators suspect treason…”

“It would be the perfect opportunity for someone to seize power in the Republic and declare war against you.” Bail concludes. “Force, Obi-Wan. This is serious.”

“It is and that’s why I’m asking for your help Bail.” He looks earnest in his friend’s eyes. “You’re the only one I trust with this, you’re my only hope Bail. You and whoever you chose to help you with this.”

Bail signs hard.

“You trust in me way too much, Obi-Wan. I don’t know if it’s deserved.” 

He smiles. “It is.”

“I need a few days to think about it, but I have a few ideas of how to make your investigation legal.” He says. “I won’t tell anyone before telling you.”

“Thank you, my friend.”

“Don’t thank me yet. You’ll owe me a great deal after this is over. A trip to meet Breha for starters.”  

Obi-Wan smiles genuinely, “I would be honored.” 

–.--

“So, that’s Anakin?” Master Windu asks him on their weekly dinner together. He’s looking at the holo Jaster sent to the High Council.

“Yes, and his mother, Shimi. She was freed on Tatooine.” 

“They look happy here.” Master Dooku comments. 

“They are. Shimi is working on dismantling the sentient traffic routes left on Mid Rim planets.” He explains. “She and a group of other former slaves. Last I heard, Hondo had joined their cause and his crew and he were on their way to fame.”

“You found a group of good people, Obi-Wan.” 

“Yeah, I did, Master Plo. I’d say I consider them my dysfunctional aliit .”  

“Of course they are.”

“But this holo doesn’t explain this armor .” Master Windi points to his beskar’gam .

“I bet the counselors were intrigued when Jaster sent the report.”

“Ha, we received a lot of questioning glances. As if we knew more about this than them.” 

“Well, if you do want to know…”

“...and we do…”

“...Jaster gave it to me as a gift for becoming a Knight-Errant.” He says. “I chose the colors and painted it with him.”

“Is this beskar ? Real beskar iron?” 

“Yes and it’s really heavy.” Obi-Wan says. “I think it weighs forty pounds more or less.”

“That’s hard to carry. Your signature is blurred.”

“With the buy'ce it is worse for you to feel me, I’d say. But nothing can really block my connection to the Force so it’s an unique advantage in this case.”

“Ah, the applications of your technique.” Master Dooku says. “You’ve been neglecting our lessons.”

“I’m sorry, Master. Now that I’m here for a while we can train more.”

Master Dooku’s lips twitched amused.

“I hope so, Knight-Errant Kenobi.” 

“You’ll see. But first, I think I have a mission to go with Master Plo.”

“With me?”

“Yes, you and I are going to look for Ahsoka, Master.” 

“Ah, it’s time then.”